Ronald S. Irving - Beyond The Quadratic Formula

i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page i — #1

i i
Beyond the
Quadratic Formula
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page ii — #2
i i
c 2013 by the Mathematical Association of America, Inc.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 2013940989

Print edition ISBN 978-0-88385-783-0
Electronic edition ISBN 978-1-61444-112-0
Printed in the United States of America
Current Printing (last digit):
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page iii — #3
i i
Beyond the
Quadratic Formula
Ron Irving
University of Washington
Published and Distributed by

The Mathematical Association of America
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page iv — #4
i i
Council on Publications and Communications

Frank Farris, Chair
Committee on Books
Gerald M. Bryce, Chair
Classroom Resource Materials Editorial Board
Gerald M. Bryce, Editor
Michael Bardzell
Jennifer Bergner
Diane L. Herrmann
Paul R. Klingsberg
Mary Morley
Philip P. Mummert
Mark Parker
Barbara E. Reynolds
Susan G. Staples
Philip D. Straffin
Cynthia J Woodburn
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page v — #5
i i
CLASSROOM RESOURCE MATERIALS
Classroom Resource Materials is intended to provide supplementary class-

room material for students—laboratory exercises, projects, historical in-
formation, textbooks with unusual approaches for presenting mathematical
ideas, career information, etc.
101 Careers in Mathematics, 2nd edition edited by Andrew Sterrett

Archimedes: What Did He Do Besides Cry Eureka?, Sherman Stein
Beyond the Quadratic Formula, Ronald S. Irving
Calculus: An Active Approach with Projects, Stephen Hilbert, Diane Driscoll
Schwartz, Stan Seltzer, John Maceli, and Eric Robinson
Calculus Mysteries and Thrillers, R. Grant Woods
Conjecture and Proof, Miklós Laczkovich
Counterexamples in Calculus, Sergiy Klymchuk
Creative Mathematics, H. S. Wall
Environmental Mathematics in the Classroom, edited by B. A. Fusaro and
P. C. Kenschaft
Excursions in Classical Analysis: Pathways to Advanced Problem Solving
and Undergraduate Research, by Hongwei Chen
Explorations in Complex Analysis, Michael A. Brilleslyper, Michael J. Dorff,
Jane M. McDougall, James S. Rolf, Lisbeth E. Schaubroeck, Richard L.
Stankewitz, and Kenneth Stephenson
Exploratory Examples for Real Analysis, Joanne E. Snow and Kirk E. Weller
Exploring Advanced Euclidean Geometry with GeoGebra, Gerard A. Ven-
ema
Geometry From Africa: Mathematical and Educational Explorations, Paulus
Gerdes
Historical Modules for the Teaching and Learning of Mathematics (CD),
edited by Victor Katz and Karen Dee Michalowicz
Identification Numbers and Check Digit Schemes, Joseph Kirtland
Interdisciplinary Lively Application Projects, edited by Chris Arney
Inverse Problems: Activities for Undergraduates, Charles W. Groetsch
Keeping it R.E.A.L.: Research Experiences for All Learners, Carla D.
Martin and Anthony Tongen
Laboratory Experiences in Group Theory, Ellen Maycock Parker
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page vi — #6
i i
Learn from the Masters, Frank Swetz, John Fauvel, Otto Bekken, Bengt
Johansson, and Victor Katz
Math Made Visual: Creating Images for Understanding Mathematics, Claudi
Alsina and Roger B. Nelsen
Mathematics Galore!: The First Five Years of the St. Marks Institute of
Mathematics, James Tanton
Methods for Euclidean Geometry, Owen Byer, Felix Lazebnik, and Deirdre
L. Smeltzer
Ordinary Differential Equations: A Brief Eclectic Tour, David A. Sánchez
Oval Track and Other Permutation Puzzles, John O. Kiltinen
Paradoxes and Sophisms in Calculus, Sergiy Klymchuk and Susan Staples
A Primer of Abstract Mathematics, Robert B. Ash
Proofs Without Words, Roger B. Nelsen
Proofs Without Words II, Roger B. Nelsen
Rediscovering Mathematics: You Do the Math, Shai Simonson
She Does Math!, edited by Marla Parker
Solve This: Math Activities for Students and Clubs, James S. Tanton
Student Manual for Mathematics for Business Decisions Part 1: Probabil-
ity and Simulation, David Williamson, Marilou Mendel, Julie Tarr, and
Deborah Yoklic
Student Manual for Mathematics for Business Decisions Part 2: Calculus
and Optimization, David Williamson, Marilou Mendel, Julie Tarr, and
Deborah Yoklic
Teaching Statistics Using Baseball, Jim Albert
Visual Group Theory, Nathan C. Carter
Which Numbers are Real?, Michael Henle
Writing Projects for Mathematics Courses: Crushed Clowns, Cars, and
Coffee to Go, Annalisa Crannell, Gavin LaRose, Thomas Ratliff, and
Elyn Rykken
MAA Service Center

P.O. Box 91112
Washington, DC 20090-1112
1-800-331-1MAA FAX: 1-301-206-9789
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page vii — #7
i i
To my parents,
Florence and Herbert Irving
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page viii — #8
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page ix — #9
i i
Preface
I have also omitted here the demonstration of most of my

statements, because . . . if you take the trouble to examine
them systematically the demonstrations will present them-
selves to you and it will be of much more value to you to
learn them in that way than by reading them.
—René Descartes [19, p. 192]
Every student learns the formula for the solution of a quadratic, or de-
gree two, polynomial equation in a high school algebra course. It is one
of the few mathematical topics that many adults remember years later, at
least by name. However, the study of cubic, or degree three, and quartic, or
degree four, polynomial equations has largely disappeared from the mathe-
matical curriculum. In the rush to calculus, high school students do not see
it. At the university level, undergraduate mathematics majors often crown
their algebraic studies with Galois theory, which provides the tools needed
to show that there is no formula for the solution of degree five equations
analogous to the quadratic formula for degree two equations. Galois The-
ory can also be used to show that formulas exist for solutions in degrees
three and four, but these may be skipped over.
What are the formulas? The answer is at the heart of this book. The re-
sults are both elementary and beautiful. Moreover, they are an essential part
of the history of mathematics, representing the high point in mathematical
developments of the sixteenth century.
This book has evolved from notes used in a class for in-service and
prospective secondary mathematics teachers. It is intended to be suitable
ix
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page x — #10
i i
x Preface
for such an audience as well as for undergraduates who desire to look at

a topic they may have unwittingly skipped over, or anyone mathematically
curious and willing to do some work. Included in this category are high
school students eager to go beyond the standard curriculum. An important
feature of the book is the sections devoted to history. They are intended to
enrich the reader’s learning by revealing the key discoveries in the study of
polynomial equations as milestones in intellectual history across cultures.
The mathematical content of the book parallels that found in a few chap-
ters of a mathematical classic from 1914, Elementary Theory of Equations,
by Leonard Eugene Dickson [20]. Dickson was one of the leading Ameri-
can mathematicians of the first part of the twentieth century. This book is
more leisurely than Dickson’s, but is similar in approach and borrows some
of the examples.
The book is designed for self study. Much of the material is presented as
exercises, with outlines for working through them. Mathematics is learned
only by doing, and that is what is asked of the reader. Doing is not making
calculations. It is necessary to learn how to write results in organized, intel-
ligible, logical prose and, ideally, to practice describing the results to others
orally. In teaching, I try to keep lecturing to a minimum, asking students to
read the book on their own, to work through the ideas orally in class with
each other, and to present the results in writing.
In developing material on polynomial equations, how many of the foun-
dational results on real numbers and elementary calculus should we as-
sume? On occasion, it is useful to be able to refer to the intermediate value
theorem or basic results on turning points of a polynomial’s graph. For in-
stance, we need to know, given a positive integer n, that any positive real
number has an nth root, or that if the graph of a polynomial lies below the
horizontal axis at one point and above at another, then the graph crosses
the axis somewhere in between. From calculus, knowing the relationship
between a polynomial’s derivative and the behavior of its graph allows con-
clusions to be drawn about the connection between the discriminant of a
quadratic or cubic polynomial and its roots.
I answer this question by including two sections, Section 1.5 on the
intermediate value theorem and Section 1.6 on graphs of polynomial func-
tions, in which key ideas are sketched and theorems stated in a form that
makes them available for reference later. This allows us, for instance, to
treat discriminants early, with a small dose of calculus, returning later with
additional algebraic tools to study them purely algebraically and see them
in their proper light. Readers knowing calculus will already be familiar with
much of the material. Others I hope will be able to grasp the issues and be
comfortable using the theorems when the time comes.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page xi — #11
i i
Preface xi
Let’s take a quick tour of the book.

Chapter 1 consists of definitions and basic results on polynomials. Some
of the material, such as the discussion of graphing, is more advanced or
abstract than the material in the rest of the book and need not be understood
in detail on a first reading. A first reading gives orientation, and the chapter
can be returned to as needed.
Chapter 2 treats the quadratic formula for the solution of degree two
equations and examines it from several perspectives. The chapter closes
with a selective history of the quadratic formula, focusing on the work of
the ancient Babylonians nearly 4000 years ago and Al-Khwarizmi around
825 C.E.
The heart of the book is Chapters 3 through 6, in which we study poly-
nomial equations of degrees three and four. The discovery of solutions to
them by several mathematicians in sixteenth-century Italy represents a high
point in mathematical history and was the most significant mathematical
accomplishment in Europe for centuries. It also makes for a good story.
Chapter 3 introduces the solution to (reduced) cubic equations that has
come to be known as Cardano’s formula, in honor of Girolamo Cardano, a
co-discoverer. Following the derivation of the formula and its use in some
examples, we discuss graphs of cubic polynomials and the discriminant of
a cubic, concluding with the dramatic story of the formula’s discovery and
publication.
One lesson of Chapter 3 is that Cardano’s formula, when applied to
certain cubic equations, expresses the solutions in terms of square roots of
negative real numbers, obliging us to make sense of them. We do this in
Chapter 4, learning how to work with an expansion of the system of real
numbers known as the complex numbers and how to compute nth roots of
complex numbers using trigonometry. The history of complex numbers is
interesting. We close with a short account.
With complex numbers, we return in Chapter 5 to cubic equations, refin-
ing Cardano’s formula and giving an algebraic description of the discrim-
inant. We see how trigonometry can be used for the most difficult family
of cubic equations to dispense with complex numbers altogether. Our his-
torical review of cubics picks up where it left off two chapters earlier, as
we learn how Cardano’s successors came to terms with the appearance of
complex numbers in his formula.
After our three-chapter-long struggle with the complexities of cubic
equations, we enter smoother waters in Chapter 6, which is devoted to quar-
tic equations. Out of respect for history, we begin with the original method
of solving them, due to Cardano’s assistant Lodovico Ferrari, but then turn
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page xii — #12
i i
xii Preface
to René Descartes’ approach of a few decades later and Leonhard Euler’s

formula from a little over a century after that. All three methods require
an intermediate step of solving a cubic equation that depends on the coef-
ficients of the quartic. This is why the quartic waters are so much calmer;
nearby, the cubic channel continues churning, but once we master the nav-
igation of its shoals, the quartic provides little in the way of new obstacles.
Euler’s formula for the solution of a quartic equation leads to the calculation
of the quartic’s discriminant.
A recurring theme of the book is the abundance of information the co-
efficients of a polynomial encode about its roots. The quadratic formula
is the first illustration, with more appearing throughout the discussion of
cubic polynomials. The theme reaches its climax in Chapter 6, where we
learn how the discriminant and other polynomial expressions in a quartic’s
coefficients can be used to determine the nature of its roots. The chapter
concludes with a section inviting the reader to consolidate understanding
of the material on cubic and quartic polynomials through a series of essay
questions, followed by a historical section on the contributions of Descartes
and Euler.
Chapter 7 is an introduction to some topics in the theory of polynomials
of higher degree: quintic polynomials, the fundamental theorem of algebra,
polynomial factorization, and symmetric polynomials. The level of diffi-
culty rises, but full understanding is not the aim. The treatment is intended
as a peek at what lies ahead, with results sketched, history surveyed, and
little proved. We conclude on a highpoint that draws many of the chapter’s
elements together: a proof of the fundamental theorem of algebra that is
essentially the one given by Pierre-Simon Laplace in 1795.
Acknowledgements: I thank my Math 497 students for working with early

versions of this material. Their responses guided my selection of topics and
my choice of emphasis. I am particularly grateful to Andrew Grzadzielewski
for his continued encouragement.
Another student, Spencer Hubbard, read the manuscript and did all the
exercises. His careful review and eye for detail led to many improvements,
as well as enjoyable conversations. I thank Spencer in particular for his
question about the roots of a quartic polynomial with zero discriminant,
which motivated an expansion of Section 6.6.
The panel of reviewers that the Mathematical Association of America
assembled to read an earlier version of the book did the most extraordinary
of jobs, entirely transforming my vision of what it could be. No doubt I have
fallen short, but the book is far better thanks to their advice and criticism, as
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page xiii — #13
i i
Preface xiii
well as later extensive comments by the copy editor, criticism of the history
sections by an anonymous MAA reader, and transformation of my primitive
diagrams by Beverly Ruedi. I am indebted as well to Don Albers and Jerry
Bryce for their willingness to consider this project and for their ongoing
support.
Exploring mathematics, even elementary mathematics, is a privilege,
connecting us to fellow humans across millennia and cultures in our search
for fundamental truth. (I hope this book illuminates these connections.) My
greatest debt is to the members of my family, who have allowed and encour-
aged me to enjoy this privilege. My parents, to whom I have dedicated this
book, arranged for me to arrive on a leap day, thereby inspiring my child-
hood interests in mathematics and astronomy. Their gift of Irving Adler’s
The Giant Golden Book of Mathematics [2] on my second birthday sealed
my fate.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page xiv — #14
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page xv — #15
i i
Contents
Preface ix
1 Polynomials 1
1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Multiplication and Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Factorization and Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Bounding the Number of Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.5 Real Numbers and the Intermediate Value Theorem . . . . 12
1.6 Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Quadratic Polynomials 21
2.1 Sums and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2 Completing the Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.3 Changing Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4 A Discriminant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3 Cubic Polynomials 47
3.1 Reduced Cubics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.2 Cardano’s Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.3 Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.4 A Discriminant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.5 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4 Complex Numbers 73
4.1 Complex Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.2 Quadratic Polynomials and the Discriminant . . . . . . . . 77
4.3 Square and Cube Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
xv
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page xvi — #16
i i
xvi Contents
4.4 The Complex Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4.5 A Geometric Interpretation of Multiplication . . . . . . . . 88
4.6 Euler’s and de Moivre’s Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.7 Roots of Unity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.8 Converting Root Extraction to Division . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.9 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5 Cubic Polynomials, II 109
5.1 Cardano’s formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.2 The Resolvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3 The Discriminant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.4 Cardano’s Formula Refined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.5 The Irreducible Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.6 Viète’s Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.7 The Signs of the Real Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.8 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6 Quartic Polynomials 143
6.1 Reduced Quartics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.2 Ferrari’s Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.3 Descartes’ Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.4 Euler’s Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.5 The Discriminant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.6 The Nature of the Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.7 Cubic and Quartic Reprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6.8 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7 Higher-Degree Polynomials 179
7.1 Quintic Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.2 The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.3 Polynomial Factorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
7.4 Symmetric Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.5 A Proof of the Fundamental Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
References 217
Index 223
About the Author 227
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 1 — #17
i i
1
Polynomials
We will be studying polynomial equations throughout this book, especially

those of degrees 2, 3, and 4. In this chapter, we introduce terminology and
obtain some basic results that hold for all polynomials. The reader familiar
with this material may wish to skip ahead. Others may wish on first en-
counter to read through this chapter’s definitions and results, returning for a
closer reading as they are used.
1.1 Definitions
What is a polynomial? We know that
3x 2 4x C 7
is one, as is
5x 17 C 12x 11 4x 7 C 13x 4 C x 3 x C 113:
So are
4 100 2 88
x C x 5
3 5
and
p 333 1
2x 2x 200 C x 111 C x 4 2:
3
But
x 4 C sin x
is not a polynomial, and neither is
10x :
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 2 — #18
i i
2 1. Polynomials
(Why not? For now, we can agree that they certainly don’t look like poly-
nomials. We will return to this question in Exercises 1.12 and 1.14.)
The formal definition of a polynomial is: a polynomial is an expression
of the form
an x n C an 1x
n 1
C an 2x
n 2
C C a2 x 2 C a1 x C a0 ;
where n is a non-negative integer and an ; an 1 ; : : : ; a1 ; a0 are numbers. As

indicated in the examples, the numbers might be integers, fractions, or more
generally real numbers. (The real numbers are those numbers that mark po-
sitions on a line.) The numbers are called the coefficients of the polynomial.
The coefficient a0 is the constant term of the polynomial. Real numbers are
themselves polynomials, the constant polynomials, with 0 called the zero
polynomial.
For a non-zero polynomial, the largest integer d for which there is a
non-zero coefficient ad is called the degree of the polynomial. The expres-
sion ai x i is the degree i term of the polynomial. By the definition of degree,
the non-zero real numbers, viewed as polynomials, are degree 0 polynomi-
als. By convention, 0 is said to have degree 1.
Ordinarily, when we write a polynomial as an x n C C a1 x C a0 ,
we anticipate that n is its degree and an ¤ 0. Because this is not required
by the definitions, we must exercise some care. Two polynomials an x n C
C a1 x C a0 and bm x m C C b1 x C b0 are equal if the corresponding
coefficients are equal. More precisely, they have the same degree, d say,
and ai D bi for each i D 0; 1; : : : ; d . (If m or n is greater than d , then the
indices ai or bj with i > d or j > d will be 0, by definition of degree.)
Exercise 1.1. What are the degrees of the four polynomials displayed at
the start of the section?
Polynomials of low degree have special names: degree 1 polynomials

are linear polynomials, degree 2 polynomials are quadratic polynomials
or quadratics, degree 3 polynomials are cubics, degree 4 polynomials are
quartics, and degree 5 polynomials are quintics.
A polynomial can be regarded as a function, taking on numerical values
when numbers are substituted for x. This leads to the use of functional
notation, with polynomials represented by expressions such as f .x/. Given
a polynomial f .x/ and a number a, we write f .a/ for the number we get
when we replace x by a. For example, suppose f .x/ is the polynomial
x3 3x C 2:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 3 — #19
i i
1.1. Definitions 3
Then
f .2/ D 23 32C2D8 6 C 2 D 4:
There is nothing special about x. We may write other letters for the
variable (also called the indeterminate) of a polynomial, or any symbol in
place of x. For example,
y 3 3y C 2
is a polynomial, as are
t3 3t C 2
and
|3 3| C 2:
Although written differently, they describe the same function.
Exercise 1.2. Is
p
3 3
437 C 2411 4 C
7
a polynomial? If so, what is its degree? If not, why not?
Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number c, there is a natural way to

form their product c f .x/: we multiply each coefficient of f .x/ by c. For
example,
3 .4x 3 3x 2 C 2x C 8/ D 12x 3 9x 2 C 6x C 24
and
1 3 2 1
.4x 3 3x 2 C 2x C 8/ D x 3 x C x C 2:
4 4 2
A non-zero polynomial is monic if the coefficient of its highest-degree
term is 1. As we did in the example, we can multiply any non-zero polyno-
mial by a suitable real number to obtain a monic polynomial: Given
an x n C an 1x
n 1
C C a1 x C a0
with an ¤ 0, multiply by 1=an .

Algebra has developed from the need to solve polynomial equations. A
polynomial equation is an equation of the form
f .x/ D 0;
with f .x/ a polynomial. A solution to this equation is a real number a

satisfying
f .a/ D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 4 — #20
i i
4 1. Polynomials
The number a is also called a root of f .x/. For example,
x5 3x 3 6x C 4 D 0
is a polynomial equation, and one can check that x D 2 is a solution.

Polynomial equations need not have solutions. For example,
x2 C 1 D 0
doesn’t. Substituting any real number for x, we obtain as its square a posi-
tive real number or 0. Adding 1 yields a positive real number, which there-
fore can’t be 0.
In saying a polynomial equation has no solution, we are implicitly as-
suming that the domain of allowable solutions is the set of real numbers. In
Chapter 4, we will introduce complex numbers, and we will find that equa-
tions such as x 2 C 1 D 0 have solutions in this expanded domain. It would
be more accurate to say that x 2 C 1 D 0 has no real number solution rather
than that it has no solution.
For any non-zero polynomial f .x/ and non-zero real number c, the
polynomial equations
f .x/ D 0
and
c f .x/ D 0
have the same solutions. If a is a real number satisfying f .a/ D 0, then
cf .a/ D 0 also, and similarly, if cf .a/ D 0, then since c is non-zero, f .a/
must be 0. Therefore, whenever we want to solve a polynomial equation
f .x/ D 0 (with f .x/ non-zero), we can replace f .x/ by its associated
monic polynomial and solve the resulting equation instead. We will make
use of this elementary observation throughout the book.
1.2 Multiplication and Degree

Adding and multiplying polynomials is done in a first class in algebra.
Nonetheless, it is important to state carefully what the operations are in
general. The notation may seem complex, but the ideas and the results will
be simple and should be familiar.
Two polynomials can be added and multiplied to obtain new polyno-
mials. Addition is easy to define: we simply combine terms of like degree.
Suppose r .x/ and s.x/ are polynomials given by
r .x/ D an x n C an 1x
n 1
C C a1 x C a0
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 5 — #21
i i
1.2. Multiplication and Degree 5
and
s.x/ D bn x n C bn 1x
n 1
C C b1 x C b0 :
(We do not assume that n is the degree of r .x/ or of s.x/, so an or bn may

be 0.) The sum r .x/ C s.x/ is defined to be the polynomial
.an C bn /x n C .an 1 C bn 1 /x
n 1
C C .a1 C b1 /x C .a0 C b0 /:
The product is also as expected, but its description is more involved.

Given real numbers a and b and non-negative integers m and n, we define
the product of ax m and bx n to be
.ax m / .bx n / D abx mCn :
If m D n D 0, we are multiplying the constant polynomials a and b,

and their product is the usual product ab. This rule, combined with the
distributive law, completely determines how two polynomials r .x/ and s.x/
are multiplied. If one polynomial is 0, the product is 0. Otherwise, their
product r .x/ s.x/ is the sum of the terms obtained by multiplying each
term in r .x/ by a term in s.x/.
Exercise 1.3. Let us be more explicit about the coefficients of the product
of two polynomials. Suppose r .x/ is a non-zero polynomial of degree m,
with
r .x/ D am x m C am 1 x m 1 C C a1 x C a0 :
Suppose s.x/ is a non-zero polynomial of degree n, with
s.x/ D bn x n C bn 1x
n 1
C C b1 x C b0 :
(i) The coefficients am and bn are non-zero. Why?
(ii) Show that the constant coefficient of r .x/s.x/ is a0 b0 .
(iii) Show that the degree 1 coefficient of r .x/s.x/ is
a0 b1 C a1 b0 :
(iv) Show that the degree 2 coefficient of r .x/s.x/ is
a0 b2 C a1 b1 C a2 b0 :
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 6 — #22
i i
6 1. Polynomials
(v) Show, for any non-negative integer k, that the coefficient of x k in the
product r .x/s.x/ is
ak b0 C ak 1 b1 C ak 2 b2 C C a2 bk 2 C a1 bk 1 C a0 bk :
(It is understood that ai D 0 for i > m and bj D 0 for j > n.)
(vi) Check that the coefficient of x mCn in r .x/s.x/ is am bn .
(vii) Deduce Theorem 1.1.
Theorem 1.1. Suppose m and n are non-negative integers, r .x/ is a poly-

nomial of degree m, and s.x/ is a polynomial of degree n. Then the product
r .x/s.x/ has degree m C n.
Exercise 1.4. Practice multiplying polynomials. Determine the product of
x 12 C 3x 7 C 4x 2 2
and
4x 5 3x 4 C 12x:
Write other polynomials and multiply them.
Given polynomials f .x/ and r .x/, the polynomial r .x/ divides the
polynomial f .x/ if there is another polynomial s.x/ such that
f .x/ D r .x/s.x/:
We say that r .x/ is a factor of f .x/. As a consequence of Theorem 1.1, a

factor of a non-zero polynomial f .x/ has degree less than or equal to the
degree of f .x/.
Given two positive integers a and b, long division is an algorithm for
dividing a into b, yielding a quotient q and a remainder r , with q and r non-
negative and r < a. For example, if a D 17 and b D 892, long division
produces the quotient q D 52 and the remainder r D 8. We learn this
algorithm early in our mathematical studies. From the equation b D aq C r
and the fact that r < a, it follows that a divides b precisely when r D 0.
The long division process can be adapted to polynomials, as in high
school algebra. Given two non-zero polynomials a.x/ and b.x/, we divide
a.x/ into b.x/ to obtain a quotient q.x/ and a remainder r .x/, with r .x/
having lower degree than a.x/. The next exercise serves as review.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 7 — #23
i i
1.2. Multiplication and Degree 7
Exercise 1.5. Let a.x/ and b.x/ be non-zero polynomials. Let q.x/ be the
quotient obtained by long division when one divides a.x/ into b.x/ and let
r .x/ be the remainder.
(i) By the definition of quotient and remainder,
b.x/ D a.x/q.x/ C r .x/:
(ii) Using the definition of divisibility, show that if r .x/ D 0, then a.x/
divides b.x/.
(iii) Suppose instead that a.x/ divides b.x/. Show that r .x/ must be 0.
(This requires a little care. Use the definition of divisibility to produce
a polynomial p.x/ for which b.x/ D a.x/p.x/. Compare with the
equation in the first part of the exercise and use Theorem 1.1 to deduce
that r .x/ D 0.)
(iv) Conclude that to test if a.x/ divides b.x/, carry out long division and
see if the remainder is 0.
(v) Decide if x 2 divides x 3 C 6x 20.
(vi) Decide if x 2 C 2x C 1 divides x 5 C 4x 2 C 2.
Let us collect some facts about multiplication and division that are ana-
logues of familiar facts about number multiplication and division.
Theorem 1.2. Suppose f .x/, g.x/, and r .x/ are polynomials.

(i) If f .x/ ¤ 0 and g.x/ ¤ 0, then f .x/g.x/ ¤ 0.
(ii) If f .x/g.x/ D 0, then at least one of f .x/ and g.x/ is 0.
(iii) If r .x/ ¤ 0 and r .x/f .x/ D r .x/g.x/, then f .x/ D g.x/.
Exercise 1.6. Prove Theorem 1.2.

(i) Prove the first part either directly from the definition of multiplication
or from Theorem 1.1.
(ii) Explain why the second part follows from the first part.
(iii) Use the second part to prove the third part.
The third part of Theorem 1.2 says that when we have an equality of
polynomial products, we can cancel a non-zero factor.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 8 — #24
i i
8 1. Polynomials
1.3 Factorization and Roots

The material in this section connects finding the roots of a polynomial f .x/
with finding degree 1 factors of f .x/. We will work in greater generality
than we will need in our treatment of quadratic, cubic, and quartic equa-
tions. The generality allows us to see more clearly what the issues are,
though we do more than is needed in later chapters.
Suppose we are given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a such that
x a divides f .x/. According to the definition of division, this means there
is a polynomial s.x/ such that
f .x/ D .x a/s.x/:
If we substitute a for x on both sides, we find that
f .a/ D .a a/s.a/ D 0 s.a/ D 0:
Let’s record what we have just found as a theorem:
Theorem 1.3. Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a, if x a

divides f .x/, then f .a/ D 0.
Theorem 1.3 provides motivation for developing techniques to factor

polynomials, as is done in a first algebra course. To factor the quadratic
polynomial x 2 13x C 36, recognize that 36 D 4 9 and 13 D 4 C 9. This
leads to the factorization
x2 13x C 36 D .x 4/.x 9/
and shows that 4 and 9 are roots of x 2 13x C 36.

Factorization problems in a first algebra course usually deal with poly-
nomials having integer coefficients. However, in this book we allow not just
integers as coefficients but all real numbers. Thus, when presented with the
polynomial x 2 2, we are interested in factoring it as a product
.x r /.x s/
for real numbers r and s. If we allow integers only, there is no such factor-
ization, but with real numbers, we find the factorization
p p
.x 2/.x C 2/:
p p
Theorem 1.3 then tells us (as is already evident) that 2 and 2 are roots
of x 2 2.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 9 — #25
i i
1.3. Factorization and Roots 9
Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a, it is useful to know that

if x a divides f .x/, then a is a root of f .x/. But will every root of f .x/
arise in this way? That is, if a is a root of f .x/, must x a divide f .x/?
Before answering this, let us review a point of logic. Many mathematical
statements, such as Theorem 1.3, take the form, “If P is true, then Q is
true,” where P and Q are mathematical statements. For a statement of this
type, the new statement “If Q is true, then P is true” is called its converse.
A statement and its converse are logically independent of each other:
both may be true, one may be true while the other is false, or both may be
false. Thus the fact that a statement is true sheds no light on the truth of its
converse. For example, we know it is true that if an integer n is divisible by
10, then n is even. The converse states that if an integer n is even, then n is
divisible by 10, and this is not true. Care is needed never to assume that the
converse of a statement is true when the statement is true.
Theorem 1.3 is an example of a statement whose converse is true:
Theorem 1.4. Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a, if f .a/ D 0,

then x a divides f .x/.
Theorem 1.4 allows us to limit the possibilities for roots. If we can find
all the factors of f .x/, we will be able to find its roots by examining the
degree-one factors. The proof of Theorem 1.4 is given in the next exercise.
Exercise 1.7. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of degree n and let a be a real

number. Let x D y C a.
(i) Suppose f .x/ D an x n C C a1 x C a0 : Substitute y C a for x to get
a polynomial in y:
g.y/ D an .y C a/n C C a1 .y C a/ C a0 :
(ii) Use Theorem 1.1 to show for each positive integer i that .y C a/i has
degree i .
(iii) Deduce that g.y/ has degree n and that therefore real numbers bn ;
bn 1 ; : : : ; b1; b0 exist for which
g.y/ D bn y n C bn 1y
n 1
C C b1 y C b0 :
(iv) From y D x a, get a new expression for f .x/:
f .x/ D bn .x a/n C bn 1 .x a/n 1

C C b1 .x a/ C b0 :
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 10 — #26
i i
10 1. Polynomials
(v) Let’s determine b0 . Substitute a for x on both sides and show that
f .a/ D b0:
(vi) Conclude that
a/n 1

f .x/ D f .a/ C .x a/ bn .x C C b2 .x a/ C b1 :
That is, given f .x/ and a, there is a polynomial h.x/ such that
f .x/ D f .a/ C .x a/h.x/:
(vii) Using this, prove Theorem 1.4.
Given a root a of a polynomial f .x/, we can ask how high a power of

x a divides f .x/. The root a is called a simple root if x a divides f .x/
but no higher power does. It is a multiple or repeated root if a higher power
of x a divides f .x/. The largest integer m such that .x a/m divides f .x/
is called the multiplicity of a as a root of f .x/; that is, m is the multiplicity
of a if f .x/ can be factored as .x a/m g.x/ for some polynomial g.x/ but
not as .x a/mC1 h.x/ for any polynomial h.x/.
1.4 Bounding the Number of Roots

It is natural to pursue the ideas of Section 1.3 further, and we shall do so.
However, with two exceptions, we will not use the results of this section
until Section 7.3. The exceptions are the proofs of Theorems 1.15 and 4.18,
neither of which is essential for the development of the material in this book.
Thus, this section can be omitted on a first reading.
We begin with an extension of Theorem 1.4:
Theorem 1.5. Suppose f .x/ is a polynomial and a1 ; : : : ; ak are k distinct

real numbers that are roots of f .x/. Then the polynomial
.x a1 /.x a2 / : : : .x ak /
divides f .x/; that is, there is a polynomial g.x/ such that
f .x/ D .x a1 /.x a2 / .x ak /g.x/:
We will prove Theorem 1.5 in a sequence of exercises. First we com-

ment on the use of the word or in logic or mathematics. Given two assertions
P and Q, the statement “P or Q” means that at least one of the two holds.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 11 — #27
i i
1.4. Bounding the Number of Roots 11
The possibility that both hold is not excluded. For example, the statement
“6 is even or 7 is even” is correct, since 6 is even, and the statement “6 is
even or 8 is even” is correct also. If the statement “P or Q” is true but Q is
not true, then P must be true.
We prepare for the proof of Theorem 1.5 with some polynomial divisi-
bility facts.
Exercise 1.8. Let b and c be real numbers.

(i) Show that if c ¤ 0, then the only polynomials that divide c are non-
zero constant polynomials. (Use Theorem 1.1.)
(ii) Show that if x b divides x c, then b D c. (If x c D .x b/g.x/
for some polynomial g.x/, what must g.x/ be?)
Exercise 1.9. Suppose r .x/ and s.x/ are polynomials and a is a real num-
ber. If r .a/s.a/ D 0, then r .a/ D 0 or s.a/ D 0. (Why?) Use this and
Theorem 1.4 to deduce that if x a divides r .x/s.x/, then x a divides at
least one of r .x/ and s.x/.
We can now prove Theorem 1.5.
Exercise 1.10. Suppose f .x/ is a polynomial and a1 ; : : : ; ak are k distinct

real numbers that are roots of f .x/.
(i) Use Theorem 1.4 to show that there is a polynomial g1 .x/ satisfying
f .x/ D .x a1 /g1 .x/:
(ii) Suppose k > 1. Since a2 is a root of f .x/, use Theorem 1.4 and
Exercise 1.9 to deduce that x a2 divides x a1 or g1 .x/.
(iii) By assumption, a1 and a2 are distinct. Use this and Exercise 1.8 to
deduce that x a2 cannot divide x a1 , and so therefore x a2
divides g1 .x/.
(iv) Conclude that there is a polynomial g2 .x/ satisfying g1 .x/ D .x
a2 /g2 .x/, and therefore that
f .x/ D .x a1 /.x a2 /g2 .x/:
(v) Suppose k > 2. Make a similar argument to show that x a3 divides

.x a1 /.x a2 / or g2 .x/. Show that the first possibility can’t hold,
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 12 — #28
i i
12 1. Polynomials
so that x a3 must divide g2 .x/. Conclude that there is a polynomial

g3 .x/ satisfying g2 .x/ D .x a3 /g3 .x/, and therefore that
f .x/ D .x a1 /.x a2 /.x a3 /g3 .x/:
(vi) Repeat k 3 additional times to obtain a polynomial gk .x/ satisfying

f .x/ D .x a1 /.x a2 / .x ak /gk .x/:
An immediate consequence of Theorem 1.5 is the following important

result about a polynomial and its roots:
Theorem 1.6. Suppose f .x/ is a polynomial of positive degree n. Then

f .x/ has at most n distinct roots.
Exercise 1.11. Prove Theorem 1.6 using Theorem 1.5 and a comparison
of degrees.
We noted in Section 1.1 that sin x is not a polynomial. This now follows
as a consequence of Theorem 1.6.
Exercise 1.12. Deduce from Theorem 1.6 that sin x cannot be equal to
a polynomial. (Hint: How many solutions are there to sin x D 0?) Show
similarly that cos x and tan x are not polynomials.
1.5 Real Numbers and the Intermediate

Value Theorem
In this section, we temporarily leave algebra to introduce the intermediate
value theorem. We will make no effort to prove it, since the proof depends
on foundational results about the real numbers whose development would
take us too far afield. But the theorem is easily stated, matches our intuition,
and will be useful to have for reference, as is explained in more detail at the
start of Section 1.6.
The primary question we wish to answer about a polynomial f .x/ is
whether it has a root. Viewing f .x/ as a function, we are asking whether
f .x/ takes on the value 0 when a real number is substituted for x, or equiv-
alently, whether the graph of y D f .x/ crosses the x-axis.
The answer to this question depends on an understanding of the prop-
erties of the real numbers. To see why, let’s consider the simplest non-
trivial example for which we may find ourselves searching for a root. Every
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 13 — #29
i i
1.5. Real Numbers and the Intermediate Value Theorem 13
degree-one polynomial ax C b has a root (what is it?), so we may turn to

degree 2. Given a positive real number r , does the polynomial x 2 r have a
root? Equivalently, does r have a square root? Let’s be specific: does 2 have
a square root?
The first numbers we learn about are the integers: 0; 1; 2; : : : ; and their
negatives. Next we learn about rational numbers, the ratios a=b of two in-
tegers a and b, with b ¤ 0. No integer has a square equal to 2. Nor is
there a rational number whose square is 2. This is a famous discovery often
credited to Pythagoras some 2500 years ago. You can rediscover it in the
following exercise.
Exercise 1.13. Prove that 2 does not have a rational square root.
(i) Suppose a and b are positive integers such that a=b is a square root
of 2. Assume further that a=b is a reduced fraction; that is, no positive
integer divides a and b other than 1. Square and clear denominators to
obtain a2 D 2b 2.
(ii) Show that 2 must divide a.
(iii) Show that 2 must divide b.
(iv) This is a contradiction, proving that a and b can’t exist.
We learn early in our mathematical education that 2 does have a square

root, and that it is given by a decimal expansion that we can describe to as
many terms as we wish. Squaring 1 and 2, we find that 12 is less than 2 and
22 is greater than 2, so we anticipate that the square root, if it exists, lies
between them. With further testing, we find that 1:42 is too small and 1:52
is too large, so the square root should p lie between them. Iterating, we get
better and better approximations to 2. For instance, after a few minutes
work (or almost no work at all, when armed with a calculator), we get the
approximation 1:4142, whose square is 1:99996164, or the poorer approxi-
mation 1:4143, whose square is 2:0002449, and we conclude that the square
root lies between the two numbers. Continuing, we obtain as many terms as
we wish of a decimal expansion that we take to be the desired square root.
The process of determining a square root of 2 in this way may seem nat-
ural, but its rigorous justification requires laying a proper foundation for the
definition and properties of the real numbers. This book is not the place to
lay such a foundation. We will instead review some essential facts about real
numbers and functions on real numbers, along with their consequences for
the study of polynomials. Many introductory real analysis texts cover this
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 14 — #30
i i
14 1. Polynomials
material. Our standard reference will be Steven G. Krantz’s Real Analysis

and Foundations [38].
We must start with a formal definition of the real numbers. We first
learn that a real number consists of an integer or whole number part and a
fractional part given by a possibly infinite decimal expansion. By moving
from rational numbers to this larger class, we fill the holes. Any real number
can be approximated by a rational number as closely as desired: we truncate
the real number’s decimal expansion farther and farther out to get better
and better approximations. But only by allowing the full infinite expansion
do we succeed in filling the holes, assigning a real number to every point
on the number line. We will omit a detailed development of this process,
relying instead on the reader’s intuition about real numbers as given by
decimal expansions. (Krantz provides a treatment in two parts, introducing
the properties of the set of real numbers and stating a theorem that such a
set of numbers exists [38, pp. 58–62], then providing the technical proof of
the theorem in an appendix [38, pp. 71–73].)
Given two real numbers a < b, we introduce two sets of real numbers
associated to a and b, the closed interval Œa; b, which consists of all num-
bers x satisfying a x b, and the open interval .a; b/, consisting of all
numbers x satisfying a < x < b.
Once the real numbers are introduced, we can study properties that sets
of real numbers may satisfy, such as connectedness. We will omit the for-
mal definition, but from it we can prove two basic results [38, pp. 145–147]:
open and closed intervals are connected, and any connected set of real num-
bers that includes the numbers r < s will contain the entire closed interval
Œr; s.
We also introduce the notion of continuity, for functions defined on
the real numbers or a suitable subset. We will not go into the details (see
[38, pp. 159–164]). Informally, a continuous function is one whose graph
doesn’t skip around or have gaps. From the formal definition, we can verify
that any constant function f .x/ D c is continuous, as is f .x/ D x. We can
also prove that sums and products of continuous functions are continuous,
from which it follows that any polynomial function is continuous. This is
sufficiently important to record as a theorem:
Theorem 1.7. A polynomial with real coefficients, regarded as a function

on the real numbers, is continuous.
Another key result in the study of continuous functions is the theorem

[38, pp. 169–170] that a continuous function takes a connected set of real
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 15 — #31
i i
1.5. Real Numbers and the Intermediate Value Theorem 15
numbers to a connected set. Combining this with the result that a connected
set of real numbers containing r and s contains all the numbers in between,
we can easily deduce the intermediate value theorem [38, p. 170].
Theorem 1.8 (intermediate value theorem). Let a < b be real numbers and
let f be a continuous function defined on the closed interval Œa; b. Given
a real number d between f .a/ and f .b/, there is a real number c in Œa; b
such that f .c/ D d .
Geometrically, the intermediate value theorem tells us that if the graph

of a continuous function goes through two different heights, then the graph
goes through every height in between as it passes from one height to the
other. Although the theorem is fundamental to the development of calculus,
its proof is usually deferred to an advanced calculus or real
analysis course.
Since polynomials are continuous functions, the intermediate value the-
orem applies to them, yielding the following result.
Theorem 1.9 (intermediate value theorem for polynomials). Let a < b be

real numbers and let f .x/ be a polynomial. Given a real number d between
f .a/ and f .b/, there is a real number c in Œa; b such that f .c/ D d .
As an example of the intermediate value theorem in action, given a pos-

itive real number d that is not the square of an integer, we can find non-
negative integers a < b with a2 < d < b 2. By the intermediate value
theorem, there is a real number c satisfying a < c < b and c 2 D d . So it
is a consequence of the intermediate value theorem that every positive real
number has a positive square root. This is sufficiently important to record
as a theorem.
Theorem 1.10. Given a positive real number d , there exists a real number
c such that c 2 D d , so every positive real number has a square root.
The same argument works when we replace the exponent 2 by any pos-
itive integer n, showing that every positive real number has a positive nth
root.
Here is another application of the intermediate value theorem, stated for
polynomials although it holds for any continuous function:
Theorem 1.11. Let a < b be real numbers and let f .x/ be a polynomial
for which f .a/ < 0 and f .b/ > 0. Then there is a real number c between
a and b such that f .c/ D 0.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 16 — #32
i i
16 1. Polynomials
In terms of graphs, the theorem tells us that if there is a point on the

graph of y D f .x/ that is below the x-axis and another point that is above
the x-axis, then there must be a point of the graph on the x-axis.
1.6 Graphs
In Section 1.5, we introduced some results on real numbers. Here, we will
continue our excursion into realms beyond algebra, this time turning to an-
alytic geometry to study the shape of the graph of a polynomial function.
We will give merely an overview. Calculus gives the results of this section
as easy exercises. Some of the results can be obtained by more elementary
considerations, albeit at the cost of a little more work, but either way, foun-
dational theorems on the construction and properties of the real numbers
are essential for the proofs.
We will use the results of this section in Sections 2.4, 3.3, and 3.4, where
the discriminants of quadratic and cubic polynomials are studied. In Sec-
tions 4.2 and 5.3, the results will be proved again algebraically, so that their
derivation does not depend on the results of this section. Nonetheless, the
approach to discriminants using graphs in Sections 2.4 and 3.4 provides
additional insight and intuition.
The polynomial functions whose graphs are the simplest are the powers
of x. We know that the graph of y D x is the line forming a 45ı angle with
the x-axis. Suppose n is an integer greater than 1. For positive real numbers
a < b and r < s, the inequality ar < bs holds. Setting r D a and s D b,
we find that a2 < b 2. For a positive integer n, we can repeat the argument
n times to obtain an < b n . This tells us that the graph of y D x n is always
increasing in height as x increases, for x 0.
x
Figure 1.1. Graph of y D x n
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 17 — #33
i i
1.6. Graphs 17
We also know that the graph of y D x n increases in height without

bound; that is, for any positive number N , there is a real number r for which
r n > N . (For N > 1, the inequality will hold if we take r to be an integer
greater than N .) We can use the intermediate value theorem, Theorem 1.9,
to deduce that as x increases, with x > 0, the function x n assumes all
possible positive real number values. This leads to the next theorem, and to
the sketch in Figure 1.1 illustrating the behavior of the graph of y D x n to
the right of the y-axis.
Theorem 1.12. Let n be an integer greater than 1.

(i) For x 0, the graph of y D x n is strictly increasing; that is, an < b n
for any real numbers a and b with 0 a < b.
(ii) The graph of y D x n goes through all non-negative heights; that is, for
any non-negative real number s, there is a non-negative real number r
satisfying r n D s.
One feature of the graph in Figure 1.1 that requires calculus to justify
is the way the shape has been drawn. It’s what is called concave up. Those
familiar with calculus will recognize that this follows from the fact that for
x > 0, the second derivative n.n 1/x n 2 of x n is positive.
y
y = x4 y = 3x 3
Figure 1.2. Graphs of even and odd powers of x
We have discussed x n only for x 0. If x < 0, then . x/n D x n

for n even. This tells us that the graph to the left of the y-axis is a mirror
image of the graph to the right. Thus, as x increases, the graph falls steadily
from arbitrarily large heights to .0; 0/, then rises arbitrarily high. If instead
n is odd, then . x/n D x n , so that the graph to the left of the y-axis is
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 18 — #34
i i
18 1. Polynomials
obtained from the graph to the right by taking the mirror image across the
y-axis and then reflecting again across the x-axis. We see from this that the
graph rises steadily as x increases, from arbitrarily low heights to .0; 0/ and
then onwards to arbitrarily high heights. This is illustrated in Figure 1.2.
The graph of a general polynomial will be more complicated, but some
features remain unchanged from that of a simple power of x. For example,
consider the graph of the polynomial x 7 6x 5 C 11x 3 6x depicted in
Figure 1.3. Like the graph of an odd power of x, it rises to infinity to the
right and drops to infinity to the left. The complicating feature is that it rises
and falls in between. Counting, we find that it makes six turns on its way
from minus infinity to infinity. (Those familiar with calculus will recognize
that a seventh-degree polynomial can have no more turns, though it may
have fewer. For instance, x 7 has no turns.)
y
Figure 1.3. Graph of y D x 7 6x 5 C 11x 3 6x
Let’s discuss the general picture. Suppose that f .x/ is a monic polyno-
mial of positive degree n,
x n C an 1x
n 1
C C a1 x C a0 :
We can factor x n out to obtain

an 1 a1 a0
f .x/ D x n 1 C CC n 1 C n :
x x x
For x very large, the terms other than 1 inside the parentheses will be small
in absolute value and f .x/ will be close to x n . Using estimate arguments
typical of calculus, we can convert this idea into a proof that there is a pos-
itive real number N such that for x N , the graph of f .x/ rises steadily,
and without bound. Since the graph rises without bound, we can further
conclude by the intermediate value theorem that the graph goes through ev-
ery height above f .N /. For x negative but large in absolute value, the same
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 19 — #35
i i
1.6. Graphs 19
argument allows us to show, if n is even, that the graph of f .x/ decreases

from unbounded heights as x increases through negative values and, if n
is odd, that the graph increases from arbitrarily low levels. We summarize
what we have found in the next theorem.
Theorem 1.13. Let f .x/ be a monic polynomial of positive degree n. There

exists a positive real number N for which f .x/ satisfies:
(i) Given real numbers b > a N , we have f .a/ < f .b/.
(ii) For any real number s > f .N /, there is a real number r > N such
that f .r / D s. That is, the graph of f .x/ increases for x N and
goes through all heights above f .N /.
(iii) Given real numbers a < b N , we have f .a/ > f .b/ if n is even
and f .a/ < f .b/ if n is odd.
(iv) If n is even, then for any real number s > f . N /, there is a real
number r < N such that f .r / D s; if n is odd, then for any real
number s < f . N /, there is a real number r < N such that f .r / D
s. That is, if n is even (odd), the graph of f .x/ decreases (increases)
for x N and goes through all heights above (below) f . N /.
When n is even, since the graph of f .x/ falls, then rises, it may never
cross the x-axis. This is the graphical way of stating that an even-degree
polynomial may have no roots. For instance, as we have seen, x 2 C 1 has
no roots.
In contrast, by Theorem 1.13, an odd-degree polynomial will assume
negative values for x negative of large absolute value and positive values
for x positive and large. By Theorem 1.11, the polynomial must assume the
value 0 somewhere. This is important enough to record as a theorem:
Theorem 1.14. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of odd degree. Then there is a

real number r such that f .r / D 0. That is, every odd-degree polynomial
has a root.
Theorem 1.13 tells us that the graph of a degree-n polynomial f .x/ be-
haves like the graph of x n in its extremes. Away from them, the graph may
behave differently from the graph of x n . It may shift from rising to falling to
rising multiple times, as illustrated by the seventh-degree polynomial graph
of Figure 1.3.
A graph changes from falling to rising or rising to falling at what are
called turning points. Let us define this precisely. A local maximum of a
function f .x/ is a point .a; f .a// on its graph with the property that there
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 20 — #36
i i
20 1. Polynomials
exists a positive number r such that every c in the open interval .a r; aCr /
satisfies f .c/ f .a/. Similarly, .b; f .b// is a local minimum if there is a
positive number s such that every c in the open interval .b s; b C s/
satisfies f .b/ f .c/. A turning point for f .x/ is a point that is either a
local maximum or a local minimum.
An example of a turning point is the point .0; 1/ on the graph of f .x/ D
x 2 C 1, for which it is a local minimum. In fact, since f .x/ > 1 for any
x ¤ 0, the point .0; 1/ is more than a local minimum. It’s what is called a
global minimum.
Readers familiar with calculus will know, given a differentiable function
y D f .x/, that for .a; f .a// to be a turning point, f 0 .a/ must equal 0.
Thus, the turning points, if there are any, will be among the points where the
derivative vanishes. The converse does not hold: f 0 .a/ may equal 0 without
.a; f .a// being a turning point. An example is x 3 , whose derivative at 0 is
0, but .0; 0/ is not a turning point, since the function f .x/ D x 3 is always
increasing. (The graph is rising when x ¤ 0 but flat at x D 0.)
If f .x/ is a polynomial of positive degree n, we learn in calculus how to
compute its derivative f 0 .x/, and find that f 0 .x/ is itself a polynomial, of
degree n 1. By Theorem 1.6, f 0 .x/ can have at most n 1 distinct roots;
that is, the derivative of f .x/ vanishes at at most n 1 points. Since these
are the only candidates for turning points, we obtain the next theorem.
Theorem 1.15. A polynomial of positive degree n has at most n 1 turning
points.
We can use Theorems 1.13 and 1.15 to see again that the sine function
cannot be a polynomial, and to see that the exponential function 10x isn’t a
polynomial.
Exercise 1.14. This exercise assumes familiarity with sin x and 10x as
functions defined for all real values of x.
(i) The graph of y D sin x has the shape of an infinite wave, oscillating
between peaks of height 1 and valleys of height 1. Describe the turn-
ing points of sin x and deduce that it has infinitely many local minima
and infinitely many local maxima.
(ii) Deduce from Theorem 1.15 that sin x cannot be a polynomial.
(iii) Use Theorem 1.13 to give an alternative proof that sin x cannot be a
polynomial.
(iv) For x < 0, we have 0 < 10x < 1. Deduce from Theorem 1.13 that the
function y D 10x cannot be a polynomial.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 21 — #37
i i
2
Quadratic Polynomials
The heart of this book is the study of solutions to cubic and quartic equa-
tions, which we will begin in Chapter 3. This chapter is devoted to quadratic
equations. Even though they are familiar from a first algebra course, a close
look is warranted, as a warmup before we tackle the greater difficulties of
cubic and quartic equations and to introduce themes that will recur as we
study cubics and quartics.
The general quadratic equation has the form
ax 2 C bx C c D 0;
for real numbers a, b, and c, with a ¤ 0. The quadratic formula for the
solutions of this equation takes the form
p
b b 2 4ac
xD ˙ :
2a 2a
Since a ¤ 0, we are free to divide both sides of the equation ax 2 C
bx C c D 0 by a before searching for solutions. This amounts to setting
a D 1 and studying quadratic equations of the form
x 2 C bx C c D 0:
We will take this approach throughout this chapter. The quadratic formula
then takes the simpler form
p
b b 2 4c
xD ˙ :
2 2
We will obtain the quadratic formula (in this simpler form) by three
different approaches, and turn to some history at the end.
21
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 22 — #38
i i
22 2. Quadratic Polynomials
2.1 Sums and Products

Our initial approach to the quadratic formula depends on solving a seem-
ingly different problem, the determination of two numbers given their sum
and product. Let’s begin with a related but simpler problem.
Given the sum and difference of two numbers, can we determine the
numbers? For instance, suppose I tell you that I am 36 years older than my
son and that our ages sum to 84. Can you determine how old we are?
Exercise 2.1. Solve the age problem.
Exercise 2.2. Solve the general form of the age problem. Suppose r and s
are unknown numbers, with u D r C s and v D r s. Determine r and s
in terms of u and v.
We see from the solution to Exercise 2.2 that we can determine two
numbers from their sum and difference. It is also possible to determine two
numbers from their sum and product. Doing so requires the calculation of
a square root, which leads to an ambiguity in sign. But it turns out to be
harmless, since the two solutions it yields are the two we seek.
Exercise 2.3. Given two numbers r and s, suppose that u D r C s and

v D r s, as in Exercise 2.2. Set p D r s.
(i) Verify that
.r C s/2 .r s/2 D 4r s;
so
u2 v 2 D 4p:
(ii) Write this as
v 2 D u2 4p
and take square roots to obtain a formula for v in terms of u and p,
correct up to an ambiguity in the sign.
(iii) Using Exercise 2.2, find r and s in terms of u and p and conclude that
Theorem 2.1 holds.
Theorem 2.1. Given two real numbers r and s, let u be their sum and p
their product. Then r and s are the two quantities
p
u u2 4p
˙ :
2 2
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 23 — #39
i i
2.1. Sums and Products 23
Because of the uncertainty in sign arising from taking a square root, we

can’t specify which expression in Theorem 2.1 is r and which is s. However,
this doesn’t matter, since we are interested only in identifying the pair of
numbers r and s, not in knowing which is which.
Theorem 2.1 is essentially the quadratic formula. Before we see this,
we will obtain a general result about quadratic polynomials that is a con-
sequence of Theorem 1.4, which stated that if a polynomial f .x/ (of any
degree) has a root a, then x a divides f .x/.
Exercise 2.4. Let b and c be real numbers and let f .x/ be the polynomial
x 2 C bx C c.
(i) Suppose f .x/ factors as .x r /.x s/ for distinct real numbers r and
s. Show that r and s are the only roots of f .x/. (Hint: Suppose t is a
root. Substitute it for x.)
(ii) Conversely, show that if distinct real numbers r and s are roots of f .x/,
then f .x/ D .x r /.x s/. (Hint: Use Theorem 1.5.)
(iii) Suppose f .x/ factors as .x r /2. Show that r is the only root of f .x/.
(iv) Conclude by proving Theorem 2.2.
Theorem 2.2. Let f .x/ D x 2 C bx C c for real numbers b and c. Exactly

one of the three possibilities occurs:
(i) x 2 C bx C c has two distinct real roots r and s, and factors as
.x r /.x s/:
(ii) x 2 C bx C c has only one real root r , and factors as .x r /2 .

(iii) x 2 C bx C c has no real roots, and cannot be factored as a product of
degree 1 polynomials.
Given a quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c with real coefficients b and c

and with real roots r and s, to find a formula for r and s in terms of b and c,
it would suffice by Theorem 2.1 to find formulas for r C s and r s in terms
of b and c. We could then recover r and s from the values for r C s and r s.
This turns out to be easy to do.
Exercise 2.5. Suppose that the polynomial x 2 C bx C c has real roots r

and s, distinct or equal. Theorem 2.2 yields a factorization of x 2 C bx C c
as
.x r /.x s/:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 24 — #40
i i
(i) Multiply the expression .x r /.x s/ to show that
r Cs D b
and
r s D c:
(ii) Use Theorem 2.1 to obtain expressions for r and s in terms of b and c.
This proves Theorem 2.3.
Theorem 2.3 (Quadratic Formula). Let b and c be real numbers and sup-
pose x 2 C bx C c has real roots r and s (distinct or coincident). Then r and
s are the two quantities
p
b b 2 4c
˙ :
2 2
We see from Theorem 2.1 and Exercise 2.5 that the quadratic formula
is the expression for the roots of x 2 C bx C c in terms of their sum b and
their product c.
Let us consider how the quadratic formula of Theorem 2.3 provides
a solution for quadratic equations. In the simplest case, with b D 0, the
equation has the form
x2 C c D 0
p
and the quadratic formula tells us that the solution is x D ˙ c. If c > 0,
then c has no square roots and there is no solution. If c < 0, then c is
positive and has two square roots. The quadratic formula does not tell us
how to compute them. It tells what we already know, that the solutions to
the equation are the square roots. Thus, rather than regarding the formula
as a way to solve an arbitrary quadratic equation, we should view it as a
reduction technique. It gets us to the point of having to do a square root
calculation, then leaves us on our own. As we saw in Section 1.5, calculating
square roots is not a problem of algebra.
2.2 Completing the Square

We now turn to a second approach to deriving the quadratic formula, com-
pleting the square.
Exercise 2.6. Solve the quadratic equation
x 2 C 10x 39 D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 25 — #41
i i
2.2. Completing the Square 25
(i) Write the equation as

x 2 C 10x D 39:
(ii) Divide 10 by 2 to get 5 and add 52 to both sides to obtain
x 2 C 10x C 52 D 39 C 52 :
The left side is the square of x C 5.

(iii) Write the equation as
.x C 5/2 D 64;
take square roots on both sides, and conclude that the equation has
solutions x D 3 and x D 13.
We can now take up the general case.
Exercise 2.7. Let a, b, and c be real numbers.

(i) Verify that
.x C a/2 D x 2 C 2ax C a2 :
(ii) Deduce that the polynomial
b2
x 2 C bx C
4
is the square of a degree one polynomial.
(iii) Rewrite
x 2 C bx C c
by adding and subtracting b 2 =4 and find that solving the equation x 2 C
bx C c D 0 is equivalent to solving
.x C b=2/2 D d=4
for a suitable real number d . Write d in terms of b and c.

(iv) Deduce for d < 0 that there is no solution to x 2 C bx C c D 0.
(v) Deduce for d D 0 that x 2 C bx C c factors as .x C b=2/2 and the one
solution to x 2 C bx C c D 0 is x D b=2.
(vi) Deduce for d > 0 that there are two solutions to x 2 C bx C c D 0,
involving the square root of d . Write the solutions in terms of b and c,
giving Theorem 2.4.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 26 — #42
i i
Theorem 2.4. Let b and c be real numbers.

(i) If b 2 4c < 0, then the equation
x 2 C bx C c D 0
has no solutions.
(ii) If b 2 4c D 0, then the only solution of x 2 Cbx Cc D 0 is x D b=2.
(iii) If b 2 4c > 0, then the equation x 2 C bx C c D 0 has two solutions,
given by p
b b 2 4c
xD ˙ :
2 2
The quadratic formula takes on a simpler form if we alter how we write
the coefficients in our initial quadratic equation. Given the real numbers b
and c, let B D b=2 and C D c. Then b D 2B, c D C , and
x 2 C bx C c D 0
can be written as
x 2 C 2Bx C D 0;
or
x 2 C 2Bx D C:
For the remainder of the section, we take this as our standard form for
a quadratic equation. With this notation, we can appreciate the process of
completing the square geometrically.
Algebraically, to make the left side of x 2 C 2Bx D C a perfect square,
we add B 2 to both sides, yielding
x 2 C 2Bx C B 2 D B 2 C C
or
.x C B/2 D B 2 C C:
Taking square roots, we recover the quadratic formula, now in the form
p
x C B D ˙ B2 C C ;
or p
xD B˙ B2 C C :
The change in our coefficients results in a quadratic formula without the
cluttering appearances of 2 and 4.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 27 — #43
i i
2.2. Completing the Square 27
Let’s reconsider completing the square geometrically. Lengths can’t be

negative numbers. Let us assume, then, that B and C are positive, and in
taking the square root of a positive number, we allow only the positive
square root.
We begin with the equation
x 2 C 10x D 39
of Exercise 2.6, so that B D 5 and C D 39. Draw a square whose sides

have an unknown length x and place rectangles atop it and to its right with
sides of lengths 5 and x, as in Figure 2.1.
x 5
Figure 2.1. Completing the Square
Since the square has area x 2 and each rectangle has area 5x, the figure
drawn has area x 2 C 10x. We are given that
x 2 C 10x D 39;
so the area is also 39.

Looking at the figure, we can complete it by filling in the missing square
in the upper right corner, which has side length 5. If we do fill it in—thereby
completing the square—we get a square with side length x C 5. Its area is
.x C5/2. But also, since we are adding a 55 square to a figure that has area
39, we know that the area is 25 C 39, or 64. Equating the two expressions
for the area, we obtain
.x C 5/2 D 64:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 28 — #44
i i
p
The larger square has side length
p given by 64, so the original square has
side length x given by 5 C 64, or 3. We have solved the quadratic equa-
tion geometrically, and we have seen that the algebraic process of complet-
ing the square has a geometric counterpart.
The general case is handled similarly. Given x 2 C 2Bx D C , with B
and C arbitrary positive numbers, we draw the square whose sides have
an unknown length x, then place rectangles atop it and to the right with
sides of lengths B and x. The resulting figure has area x 2 C 2Bx, which
we recognize as equal to C , thanks to the given equation. We complete
the square by placing a square of side length B in the upper right corner,
yielding a larger square with side length x C B. Its area is both .x C B/2
and B 2 C C , yielding
.x C B/2 D B 2 C C:
From this we obtain p

xCB D B2 C C
or p
xD BC B2 C C :
We have derived the quadratic formula geometrically.
2.3 Changing Variables

Let us turn to our third approach for deriving the quadratic formula, the
technique known as change of variables. We begin with a now-familiar ex-
ample.
Exercise 2.8. Solve the equation
x 2 C 10x 39 D 0
by changing variables.
(i) Let y related to x by x D y 5. Substitute y 5 for x in the equation
and obtain an equation in y.
(ii) The new quadratic equation has the form y 2 d D 0 for a constant d .
We have a quadratic equation without a degree-one term.
(iii) Take square roots to obtain two values for y, then use x D y 5 to
obtain two solutions to the original quadratic equation.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 29 — #45
i i
2.4. A Discriminant 29
We now take up the general case, with the goal of finding a change of
variable that, as in Exercise 2.8, eliminates the degree-one term.
Exercise 2.9. Let f .x/ D x 2 C bx C c. Let a be a real number. Introduce

a new variable y by x D y C a or y D x a.
(i) Substitute y C a for x in f .x/ and get a polynomial g.y/ in y. Deter-
mine it explicitly in terms of a, b, and c.
(ii) Examine g.y/ and determine a, in terms of b and c, so that g.y/ has
the form y 2 d . The number d will be expressible in terms of b and
c.
(iii) With this a, the solutions to g.y/ D 0 are the square roots of d .
p
(iv) Use the relationship between x and y to obtain that x D a ˙ d .
(v) Show that this is the quadratic formula.
We will use this technique in our treatment of cubic and quartic equa-
tions. It will allow us to drop the term of second-highest degree from the
polynomial, as here we were able to drop the degree-one term.
2.4 A Discriminant
A quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c may have two distinct real roots, one
repeated real root, or no real roots, as we saw in Theorem 2.2. It is possible
to determine which occurs from b and c, without finding the roots.
This is evident from the quadratic formula, since the roots, if they exist,
are p
b b 2 4c
˙ :
2 2
We see that if b 2 4c > 0, there are two distinct real roots, if b 2 4c D 0,
there is one multiple root, and if b 2 4c < 0, there are no real roots. We can
obtain this independently of the roots by studying the shape of the graph of
y D x 2 C bx C c.
To do so, we first need to review the shape of the graph of y D x 2. This
was discussed in Section 1.6, where we saw that there is a turning point
at .0; 0/, with the graph falling to .0; 0/ as x increases through negative
values to 0 and rising as x increases through positive values, the shape being
concave up throughout. (See Figure 2.2.)
The graph has an alternative description from the theory of conic sec-
tions. We won’t be using it, but the issues are worth reviewing. The distance
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 30 — #46
i i
Figure 2.2. Graph of y D x 2
between two points .a; b/ and .c; d / is the square root of .c a/2 C.d b/2.
(This is essentially the Pythagorean Theorem.) The distance from a point P
to a line ` is defined to be the distance between P and the closest point Q
on ` to P , with Q being the intersection of ` and the line perpendicular to
` that passes through P .
Exercise 2.10. Verify that the points in the plane equidistant from .0; 1=4/
and the line y D 1=4 are precisely those satisfying the equation y D x 2 .
(Hint: Set the squared distances equal to each other rather than the dis-
tances.)
In the theory of conic sections, a parabola is defined as the locus of

points equidistant from a point, the parabola’s focus, and a line not contain-
ing the point, the parabola’s directrix. Using this language, Exercise 2.10
states that the graph of y D x 2 is the parabola with focus .0; 1=4/ and
directrix y D 1=4.
The unique line that passes through a parabola’s focus and meets the
directrix at a right angle is the axis of symmetry for the parabola. The point
where the axis of symmetry intersects the parabola is the parabola’s vertex.
For the graph of y D x 2 , Exercise 2.10 shows that the focus is .0; 1=4/ and
the directrix is y D 1=4. It follows that the axis of symmetry is the y-axis
and the vertex is .0; 0/. (See Figure 2.3.)
The essential results about the behavior of the graph don’t require calcu-
lus or the theory of conic sections, but do require results on the real numbers
such as the intermediate value theorem. It lets us prove that x 2 assumes all
positive real number values as x increases through positive real numbers,
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 31 — #47
i i
y = x2
Focus
(0, 1/4)
(x, y)
x
Vertex (0, 0)
Directrix y = –1/4
(x, –1/4)
Axis of symmetry x = 0
Figure 2.3. Focus and Directrix of the Parabola y D x 2
and similarly as x increases through all negative real numbers. Geometri-

cally, this means the graph of y D x 2 goes through all positive heights as
it falls to .0; 0/ on the left side of the y-axis and goes again through all
positive heights as it rises on the right side of the y-axis.
Once we know the shape of the graph of y D x 2 , we can use it for
the graphs of other monic quadratic polynomials. Doing so depends on the
following result, which tells us how to obtain equations for graphs that are
obtained from known ones by horizontal or vertical translations.
Exercise 2.11. Suppose y D f .x/ is a function defined for all real number
values of x.
(i) Given a real number C , verify that the graph of y D f .x C / is
obtained from the graph of y D f .x/ by shifting every point to the
right a distance of C .
(ii) Given a real number D, verify that the graph of y D f .x/ C D is

obtained from the graph of y D f .x/ by shifting every point on it
upward a distance of D.
(iii) Combine (i) and (ii) to obtain the result that the graph of y D f .x
C / C D is obtained from the graph of y D f .x/ by shifting every
point to the right a distance of C and upward a distance of D.
By combining Exercise 2.11 with the technique of completing the square,

we can show that the graph of any monic quadratic polynomial is obtained
from the graph of y D x 2 by vertical and horizontal translation.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 32 — #48
i i
y
y = x2 + 4
y = x2
y = x2 – 4
Figure 2.4. Graphs of three parabolas
Exercise 2.12. Let b and c be real numbers. By completing the square, we

can write y D x 2 C bx C c as
b2

b
y D .x C /2 C c :
2 4
Deduce by Exercise 2.11 that the graph of y D x 2 C bx C c is obtained
from the graph of y D x 2 by a shift b=2 to the right and c b 2=4 upward.
Exercise 2.12 tells us that the graph of y D x 2 C bx C c has the same

shape as the graph of y D x 2 , but is shifted up or down, left or right. Hence,
the graph, like that of y D x 2 , has a single turning point. This turning point
may lie above, on, or below the x-axis, as illustrated in Figure 2.4 for x 2 C4,
x 2 , and x 2 4. To decide which, we compute the y-coordinate of the turning
point of y D x 2 C bx C c, which Exercise 2.12 allows us to do.
Exercise 2.13. Let b and c be real numbers. Using Exercise 2.12, conclude
that the graph of y D x 2 C bx C c has a local (and global) minimum at
. b=2; c b 2 =4/:
The graph of x 2 C bx C c is the parabola with focus at . b=2; c b 2=4 C
1=4/, directrix y D c b 2 =4 1=4, axis of symmetry x D b=2, and
vertex at . b=2; c b 2=4/.
Now that we have found the turning point on the graph of a monic
quadratic polynomial, we can use it to get information on the polynomial’s
roots.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 33 — #49
i i
2.5. History 33
Exercise 2.14. Using Exercise 2.13, show that the nature of the roots of
x 2 C bx C c is determined by the sign of c b 2 =4:
(i) If c b 2 =4 < 0, then the graph’s turning point is below the x-axis.
Conclude that the graph crosses the x-axis twice, so that x 2 C bx C c
has two distinct real roots.
(ii) If c b 2 =4 D 0, then the turning point is on the x-axis. Conclude that
the graph of x 2 C bx C c touches the x-axis once, so that x 2 C bx C c
has one real root. Since x 2 C bx C c must factor as the product of two
degree-one polynomials, deduce that the real root has multiplicity 2.
(iii) If c b 2=4 > 0, then the turning point is above the x-axis. Conclude
that the graph of x 2 C bx C c does not touch or cross the x-axis, so
that x 2 C bx C c has no real roots.
(The three cases are illustrated in Figure 2.4.)
Exercise 2.14 shows that the nature of the roots of x 2 C bx C c is

determined by the quantity c b 2 =4. Any non-zero constant multiple of
c b 2=4 will determine their nature as well. Let’s multiply by 4, obtaining
the quantity b 2 4c. We will write ı for this and call it the discriminant of
x 2 C bx C c. We see that it is the product of 4 and the y-coordinate of the
turning point on the graph of y D x 2 C bx C c. Exercise 2.14 yields the
result we are after:
Theorem 2.5. Let f .x/ D x 2 C bx C c for real numbers b and c and let
ı be the associated discriminant b 2 4c.
(i) If ı > 0, then f .x/ has two distinct real roots.
(ii) If ı D 0, then f .x/ has a repeated real root.
(iii) If ı < 0, then f .x/ has no real root.
2.5 History
In this section, we will look at the history of quadratic equations from an-
cient Babylonian civilization four millennia ago to Italy in 1500, touching
occasionally on developments in algebra beyond the quadratic formula.
Every ancient civilization developed a body of mathematical knowl-
edge, in part to serve the practical needs of measurement, construction,
and commerce. The work of the ancient Greeks may be the most familiar,
thanks to Euclid, but important contributions were made as well by Baby-
lonian, Egyptian, Indian, and Chinese civilizations. Mathematical problems
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 34 — #50
i i
and solutions were often described through words, and geometry was used
to express concepts that we might now address algebraically through nota-
tional systems not then available. General methods would be laid out im-
plicitly through the working of a series of examples. All these civilizations
addressed problems, in different guises, that we can now interpret as fitting
under the heading of solving quadratic equations.
Let’s begin with a look at some Babylonian work on problems reducible
to quadratic equations. The first Babylonian dynasty, in the years ranging
from around 1900 B.C.E. to 1600 B.C.E., made many contributions to hu-
man culture. Perhaps most notable is the code of Hammurabi, consisting of
282 laws that were written on clay tablets. Some of the earliest preserved
mathematical texts date to this time. Babylonians used cuneiform, a wedge-
like script that evolved from pictographs, for their writing. They also used
base 60 in writing numbers, a choice that persists today in our methods for
measuring time (minutes, seconds) and angle (degrees, minutes, seconds).
Surviving on tablets are examples of the mathematical problems that Baby-
lonians posed and solved. Many reduce to solving quadratic equations.
Our understanding of the mathematics on the cuneiform tablets owes
much to the pioneering work of Otto Neugebauer, an Austrian scholar who
studied mathematics at Munich and Göttingen in the 1920s. While at
Göttingen, Neugebauer shifted his interest from mathematics to its his-
tory and did his doctoral research on Egyptian mathematics. He stayed
on at Göttingen and began to study the Babylonian tablets that can be
found at many of the major museums in Europe and the United States.
His three-volume work Mathematische Keilschrift-Texte [44], published in
1935, translated and interpreted tablets found in museums from London and
Paris to Berlin and Istanbul.
Neugebauer came to the United States in 1939 and continued his work,
publishing Mathematical Cuneiform Texts [46] jointly with Abraham Sachs
in 1945. He provided an overview of his findings in The Exact Sciences
in Antiquity [45], published in 1952 based on a 1949 lecture series he pre-
sented at Cornell. These books are well worth a look, both for their content
and for the tablet photographs.
In surveying the Babylonian treatment of algebra, Neugebauer high-
lighted its abstract nature, divorced from both geometric considerations and
practical meaning:
[G]eometrical concepts play a very secondary part in Babylonian al-
gebra, however extensively a geometrical terminology may be used. It
suffices to quote the existence of examples in which areas and lengths
are added, or areas multiplied, thus excluding any geometrical inter-
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 35 — #51
i i
2.5. History 35
pretation . . . . Indeed, still more drastic examples can be quoted for the
disregard of reality. We have many examples concerning wages to be
paid for labor according to a given quota per man and day. Again, prob-
lems are set up involving sums, differences, products of these numbers
and one does not hesitate to combine in this way the number of men
and the number of days. It is a lucky accident that if the unknown num-
ber of workmen, found by solving a quadratic equation, is an integer.
Obviously the algebraic relation is the only point of interest, exactly as
it is irrelevant for our algebra what the letters may signify.
Neugebauer further explained [45, p. 42] that some of the Babylonian

texts contain “collections of problems only, sometimes more than 200 on
a single tablet of the size of a small printed page. These collections of
problems are usually carefully arranged, beginning with very simple cases
. . . and expanding step by step to more complicated relations.” Regard-
ing one such series [45, p. 42], “one finds that they all have the same pair
x D 30; y D 20 as solutions. This indicates that it was of no concern to the
teacher that the result must have been known to the pupil. What he obvi-
ously had to learn was the method . . . . From actually computed examples
it becomes obvious that it was the general procedure, not the numerical re-
sult, which was considered important.”
A tablet of particular interest is one catalogued in the British Museum
as BM 13901. It originally contained twenty-four problems. Some are dam-
aged, but as A. E. Berriman notes in his article “The Babylonian quadratic
equation” [10, p. 185], “those that remain, however, are sufficient to reveal
a carefully graduated course of instruction.” Neugebauer studied the tablet
in the third volume of Mathematische Keilschrift-Texte [44]. A discussion
can also be found in the 2009 English translation of Jacques Sesiano’s 1999
French work, An Introduction to the History of Algebra: Solving Equations
from Mesopotamian Times to the Renaissance [59, pp. 10–16].
Let’s look at the first problem of BM 13901. We will use the Babylo-
nians’ sexagesimal number system, as Neugebauer did in his translations.
Commas separate the numbers in the 1 and 60 columns and a semi-colon
separates the integer part from the decimal part, with the first position after
the semi-colon being the number of sixtieths. For example, 1; 2 is sexages-
imal notation for the decimal number 62 and 0I 20 is the fraction 20=60, or
1=3.
The problem is stated simply [59, p. 10]: “I added the area and the side
of my square: 0I 45.” In standard fractional notation, this number is 45=60,
or 3=4. The unknown is the length of the side of the square. Thus, we are
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 36 — #52
i i
being asked to solve the quadratic equation

3
x2 C x D :
4
What follows on the tablet is a recipe: “You put 1, the unit. You divide in
two 1: 0I 30. You multiply by 0I 30: 0I 15. You add 0I 15 to 0I 45: 1. It is
the square of 1. You subtract 0I 30, which you multiplied, from 1: 0I 30, the
side of the square.”
To make sense of this, it is perhaps better to think of the equation in the
form x 2 C bx C c D 0, with b D 1 and c D 3=4. We are asked first to
divide b by 2, yielding b=2. We are then told to square it, obtaining b 2 =4.
2
We add
p this to c, obtaining b =4 c. Finally we take the square root of
this, b 2 =4 c, and subtract the number we earlier multiplied, which was
b=2. The final answer, then, is
r
b b2
C c;
2 4
or 1=2. The recipe is the quadratic formula!
Let’s take the same approach to the second problem of BM 13901 [59,
p. 10]: “I subtracted from the area the side of my square: 14; 30.” The sexa-
gesimal number 14; 30, in decimal form, is 14 60 C 30, or 870. Thus, we
are asked to solve the quadratic equation
x2 x D 870:
The solution is laid out as follows: “You put 1, the unit. You divide in
two 1: 0I 30. You multiply by 0I 30: 0I 15. You add to 14; 30: 14; 30I 15. It
is the square of 29I 30. You add 0I 30, which you multiplied, to 29I 30: 30,
the side of the square.”
Once again thinking of the equation as x 2 C bx C c D 0, this time with
b D 1 and c D 870, we can describe the solution as follows: We first
form the quantity b=2. We then square it and add the result to c to get
b 2 =4 c. The next step is to determine the square root, to which we add
the number we earlier used for multiplying, which was b=2. The result—
30—is the desired answer, and once again it is what we obtain by using the
quadratic formula.
It turns out that the two problems are not typical. Few examples of single
quadratic equations have been found. More common are problems involving
two variables and two equations, one equation having the form xy D 1, the
other being a linear equation in x and y. They can be reduced to solving a
single quadratic equation.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 37 — #53
i i
2.5. History 37
Consider for instance Problem-Text T in Neugebauer and Sachs’s Math-

ematical Cuneiform Texts. They open their commentary [46, p. 116] with
the observation that the text “can best be compared to an extensive collec-
tion of problems from a chapter of a textbook. It is obvious that a collection
of this sort was used in teaching mathematical methods.” The student is
asked to reduce each problem to what Neugebauer and Sachs refer to [46,
p. 117] as “the ‘normal’ form of quadratic equations which gives the prod-
uct of the unknown quantities and their sum or difference. . . . The whole
system of a main example with all its variants serves the purpose of giving
the general rule of solution; this corresponds in a certain sense to an alge-
braic formula in which the letters can be replaced by special numbers in
each individual case.”
The normal form is the problem we studied in Section 2.1. A represen-
tative example is the first problem on tablet AO 8862 at the Louvre in Paris,
treated by Neugebauer in the first volume of Mathematische Keilschrift-
Texte [44, pp. 108–123] and by Sesiano as well [59, p. 12]. Van der Waerden
opens the chapter on Babylonian mathematics in Science Awakening with
this example [64, pp. 63–65]: “Length, width. I have multiplied length and
width, thus obtaining the area. Then I added to the area, the excess of the
length over the width: 3; 3 (i.e., 183 was the result). Moreover, I have added
length and width: 27. Required length, width and area.”
We are asked to solve the two equations
xy C .x y/ D 183
and
x C y D 27:
The tablet then lays out a sequence of numerical calculations that lead to
the answer. They can be interpreted as instructing the student to add the
equations, yielding x.y C 2/ D 210, and to add 2 to both sides of the
second equation, yielding x C .y C 2/ D 29. This transforms the original
equations to normal form, x and y C 2 being two numbers whose product
is 210 and whose sum is 29.
It is important to note that scholarship on Babylonian mathematics in
recent decades has yielded a perspective sharply different from that en-
gendered by Neugebauer’s work. Jens Høyrup, in his 2002 study Lengths,
Widths, Surfaces: A Portrait of Old Babylonian Algebra and Its Kin [35],
observes that
The Babylonian algebra which most historians of mathematics found
in Neugebauer’s works looked astonishingly modern and similar to
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 38 — #54
i i
ours. It is the purpose of the present book to replace this standard inter-
pretation by a less modernizing reading. . . . The mathematical texts are
school texts. They contain no theorems and no theoretical investiga-
tions. . . . [Their authors] were teachers of computation, at times teach-
ers of pure, unapplicable computation . . . but they remained teachers,
teachers of scribe school students who were later to end up applying
mathematics to engineering, managerial, accounting, or notarial tasks.
Høyrup’s own analysis of the first problem on AO 8862 #1 [35, pp. 169–
170] emphasizes its concrete nature: “The text starts by stating that a rect-
angular surface or field is built, that is, marked out; after pacing off its di-
mensions, the speaker ‘appends’ the excess of the length over the width to
it; the outcome is 3; 3. Even this is done quite concretely in the terrain. Then
he ‘turns back’ and reports the accumulation of the length and the width to
be 27.”
In Mathematics in Ancient Iraq: A Social History [56], Eleanor Robson
offers an enlightening side-by-side comparison of van der Waerden’s and
Høyrup’s analyses [56, pp. 276–278]. “In van der Waerden’s translation of
1954 the problem is entirely numerical . . . In his reading ‘the Babylonians’
are just like modern mathematicians: they use ‘symbols’ and ‘equations,’
which means that the problem can ‘safely’ be expressed as modern alge-
bra. Høyrup, by contrast, opens his comments on the same problem with an
interpretative diagram that does not appear on the cuneiform tablet and con-
tinues [as quoted above]. All of van der Waerden’s apparently arithmetical
numbers turn out to have dimension: they are particular lengths and areas
that are manipulated physically.”
Another common form taken by problems on the tablets is to find two
numbers from known values of the sum of their squares and of their sum
(or difference). An example is problem 9 of BM 13901 [59, p. 15]: “I added
the area of my two squares: 1300. The side of one exceeds the side of the
other by 10.” Here we are asked to solve the equations
x 2 C y 2 D 1300
and
x y D 10:
This is easily converted to a quadratic equation in one variable. In reinter-
preting the problem this way, we are placing a modern overlay on the data
of the tablet. Høyrup offers his own analysis [35, pp. 66–70], attempting to
interpret the tablet’s prescription as a series of instructions for tearing out,
inscribing, and appending squares of given dimensions.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 39 — #55
i i
2.5. History 39
We have given more attention to Babylonian mathematics and the im-

plicit treatment within it of quadratic equations than might seem necessary.
However, it is difficult to avoid the temptation. As Eleanor Robson con-
cludes [56, p. 290]:
Compared to the difficulties of grappling with fragmentary and meagre
nth-generation sources from other ancient cultures the cuneiform evi-
dence is concrete, immediate, and richly contextualised. . . . This opens
a unique window onto the material, social, and intellectual world of
the mathematics of ancient Iraq that historians of other ancient cul-
tures can only dream of.
Around 600 B.C.E., a new mathematical current arose within the Greek
civilization of the Mediterranean, starting with the work of Thales and
Pythagoras. The Greek tradition would have enormous influence on the de-
velopment of mathematics, and much has been written about it. Perhaps
of greatest importance was the introduction of the axiomatic method and
deductive proof. For a concise introduction, William Berlinghoff and Fer-
nando Gouvêa have an informative survey [9, pp. 14–24]. (See S. Cuomo’s
Ancient Mathematics [15] for a more detailed study.) The most famous of
the Greek mathematicians is Euclid, who lived around 300 B.C.E. in Alexan-
dria. Little is known about him, or about the origins of his greatest work, the
Elements. For instance, no definitive answer can be given to the question of
how much of the Elements is due to him and how much is a compendium
of earlier work.
The Elements provided the model for the axiomatic method and laid the
basis for geometry for centuries. Most of its thirteen books are devoted to
geometry, with plane geometry treated first and regular polyhedra in three-
space covered in the concluding Book 13. Books 7 to 9 contain some of the
most famous results of elementary number theory, such as Euclid’s proof
that there are infinitely many prime numbers. Book 2 provides solutions to
geometric questions about area that amount to solving simultaneous equa-
tions x C y D a and xy D b for constants a and b [65, pp. 77–80]. As we
know, this reduces to solving a quadratic equation.
Jumping ahead five centuries to the late stages of the Greek tradition, we
come to Diophantus, another Alexandrian. Diophantus wrote Arithmetica,
a collection of about 200 problems and their solutions. Arithmetica con-
sisted of thirteen chapters, of which six were preserved in Greek and four in
an Arabic translation from the ninth century, but the Arabic chapters were
essentially lost until their rediscovery in 1968.
In contrast to Euclid’s geometric algebra, Diophantus works in a manner
we would recognize as more strictly algebraic, with symbols for the lower
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 40 — #56
i i
positive and negative powers of an unknown, rules of multiplication, and

rules of substitution. Many of his problems reduced to equations in two
unknowns. Among them were problems studied by the Babylonians, such
as finding two numbers whose sum and product are given. Solutions were
to be found in rational numbers.
The Greek chapters of Arithmetica had little influence until a revival of
interest in them among Italian mathematicians late in the sixteenth century
and even more so by the French mathematician Pierre de Fermat in the
seventeenth century. In Book II, Diophantus poses the problem to divide a
square into two squares, that is, to find solutions to x 2 C y 2 D z 2 . Although
we have not discussed this problem, it has a history as long as that of the
quadratic equation. All ancient civilizations studied it, including two we
have not discussed, those of Egypt and China.
Fermat owned a copy of a 1621 Latin translation of Arithmetica made
by the French mathematician and scholar Claude-Gaspard Bachet (1581–
1638). (Bachet’s best known work is Problèmes plaisants et délectables qui
se font par les nombres [6], his 1612 collection of arithmetic puzzles and
tricks that was the basis for many subsequent books on recreational math-
ematics.) Some time around 1637, Fermat wrote the famous marginal note
that for integers n greater than 2, the equation x n C y n D z n has no ratio-
nal solution, adding the tantalizing remark that he had a “truly marvelous
proof” that his margin was too narrow to contain.
Whether Fermat’s statement was true would remain one of the great
open questions in mathematics until it was settled in the affirmative in 1995
by Andrew Wiles and Richard Taylor. In the meantime, Diophantus be-
came the eponym for an entire branch of mathematics, Diophantine anal-
ysis, which brings number-theoretic and geometric methods to bear on the
question of whether algebraic equations in several unknowns have integer
or rational solutions. (See [7], [8, pp. 35–57], and [59, pp. 31–51] for more
information on Diophantus’s work.)
In tracing the development of algebra, let us move east to India, where
the mathematician and astronomer Aryabhata lived from 476 C.E. to about
550 C.E. In his work Aryabhatiya, he solves some problems that reduce to
quadratic equations. Satya Prakash observes in a book on the later Indian
astronomer-mathematician Brahmagupta [53, p. 215] that Aryabhata has
“given the solutions of a few quadratic equations, but he nowhere gives the
procedure of solving these equations.”
Brahmagupta, who lived from around 598 to 665, wrote several ma-
jor works, including Brahmasphutasiddhanta. Some of his work on arith-
metic and algebra was translated into English in 1817 by H.T. Colebrooke
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 41 — #57
i i
2.5. History 41
[14]. Here is one problem Brahmagupta poses [14, p. 346]: “When does
the residue of revolutions of the sun, less one . . . equal to the square root of
two less than the residue of revolutions, less one, multiplied by ten and aug-
mented by two?” Translating into modern algebraic notation, Brahmagupta
is looking for a solution of the equation x 2 86x D 249. Following Cole-
brooke in his translation, let us call 249 the “absolute number” and x the
“middle term.” With this terminology, Brahmagupta’s proposed solution
amounts to a statement of the quadratic formula:
Now, from the absolute number, multiplied by four times the coeffi-
cient of the square, and added to the square of the coefficient of the
middle term, the square root being extracted, and lessened by the co-
efficient of the middle term, the remainder is divided by twice the co-
efficient of the square, yields the value of the middle term.
Satya Prakash comments [53, p. 215] that Brahmagupta “undoubtedly is

not the discoverer of these rules, but perhaps for the first time in the history
of algebra we find the process of solving a quadratic equation so clearly
indicated.”
Brahmagupta’s greatest contribution to algebra is his study of integer
solutions to the equation x 2 ny 2 D ˙1, where n is a positive integer that
is not a square. Such an equation is now known as Pell’s equation and arises
naturally in a variety of contexts. The twelfth century Indian mathematician
Bhaskara obtained more definitive results. More information on this work
can be found in V. S. Varadarajan’s Algebra in Ancient and Modern Times
[67], which has much to say about other cultures as well. See too B. L. van
der Waerden’s Geometry and Algebra in Ancient Civilizations [65].
The subsequent centuries were ones of exciting intellectual develop-
ments in the Islamic world. Most notable for us is the work of Muhammad
ben Musa al-Khwarizmi, a Persian who lived roughly between 780 and 850
near Baghdad. Al-Khwarizmi contributed to many fields, including mathe-
matics, astronomy, and geography. Perhaps his greatest work is his treatise
on algebra, The Compendious Book on Calculation by Completion and Bal-
ancing, written in Arabic around 825. In it, he systematically studied linear
and quadratic equations using the techniques of al-jabr and al-muqabala.
The process of al-jabr is that of adding equal terms to both sides of an equa-
tion in order to eliminate negative terms. In contrast, al-muqabala is the re-
duction of positive terms by subtracting equal amounts from both sides of
an equation.
Al-Khwarizmi’s work would have a significant influence on European
mathematics several centuries later, thanks to its translation into Latin in the
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 42 — #58
i i
twelfth century by Robert of Chester and Gerard of Cremona and in the thir-
teenth century by William of Luna. Robert of Chester’s version, Liber alge-
brae et almucabola, was translated into English in 1915 by Louis Charles
Karpinski, who also provided notes and an introduction [36]. Karpinski’s
edition is well worth a look, as is the more recent Al-Khwarizmi: The Be-
ginnings of Algebra [54] by Roshdi Rashed, which includes a translation
(with the original Arabic text on facing pages) and commentary. Rashed
also writes about the traditions of calculation in the eighth century and al-
Khwarizmi’s knowledge of Greek and Indian mathematical literature.
At the outset of his book, al-Khwarizmi introduces three types of quan-
tities: roots, squares, and numbers, the root being what we would label x,
the square being x 2 , and number being number. He then gets right to busi-
ness, classifying linear and quadratic equations into six forms and illustrat-
ing how to solve each with examples. We would regard all six types as one,
but since al-Khwarizmi does not use negative numbers or 0, he is obliged to
consider separate cases, with a, b, and c always positive:
(1) Squares equal roots, or what we would describe as ax 2 D bx.
(2) Squares equal numbers, or ax 2 D c.
(3) Roots equal numbers, or bx D c.
(4) Squares and roots equal numbers, or ax 2 C bx D c.
(5) Squares and numbers equal roots, or ax 2 C c D bx.
(6) Roots and numbers equal squares, or bx C c D ax 2 .
(In addition to [36] and [54], see also the discussion of al-Khwarizmi’s work
in The Beginnings and Evolution of Algebra by I.G. Bashmakova and G.S.
Smirnova, from which the above summary is drawn [8, p. 50].)
What is novel about the opening of al-Khwarizmi’s book is that in it he
lays out the mathematical issues in purely algebraic terms before turning to
the examples—drawn from commerce and inheritances—that fill the later
pages of the book. The focus is on equations in the abstract, classified by
degree. Rashed explains in the introductory essay to his translation [54,
p. 24] that what al-Khwarizmi
does cannot be reduced to anything to be found in other traditions,
such as those of the Babylonians, of Diophantus, of Heron of Alexan-
dria, of Aryabhata or of Brahmagupta. It is not in the course of solving
problems that al-Khwārizmı̄ finds these equations. The classification
in fact precedes the problems. It is introduced deliberately as the nec-
essary first step in the construction of a theory of equations of the first
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 43 — #59
i i
2.5. History 43
and second degree; and this theory will become the nucleus of a math-
ematical discipline.
The first of al-Khwarizmi’s six cases that interests us is .4/, and the
example he uses to illustrate it is none other than the quadratic equation
x 2 C 10x D 39 that we studied in Sections 2.2. This equation is not dis-
tinguished in any mathematical sense, but since it is the first one for which
al-Khwarizmi employs the technique of completing the square, it has res-
onated through history. Or, as Karpinski suggests [36, p. 19], the equation
“runs like a thread of gold through the algebras for several centuries, appear-
ing in the algebras of the three writers mentioned, Abu Kamil, al-Karkhi and
Omar al-Khayyami, and frequently in the works of Christian writers, cen-
turies later.” Here is al-Khwarizmi’s own description of the example [54,
p. 100]:
“Squares plus roots are equal to a number”, as when you say: a square
plus ten roots are equal to thirty-nine dirhams [a unit of measure];
namely, if you add to any square [a quantity] equal to ten of its roots,
the total will be thirty-nine.
Procedure: you halve the number of the roots which, in this problem,
yields five; you multiply it by itself; the result is twenty-five; you add
it to thirty-nine; the result is sixty-four; you take the root, that is eight,
from which you subtract half the number of the roots, which is five.
The remainder is three, that is the root of the square you want, and the
square is nine.
Upon completing his treatment of the remaining types of quadratic equa-
tion, al-Khwarizmi returns to the equation x 2 C 10x D 39 and illustrates
two ways of solving it geometrically. The second is the one we used in
Section 2.2.
Rashed concludes his introductory essay by turning to the question of
Indian influence on al-Khwarizmi. Two centuries ago, in translating the
work of the Indians, Colebrooke suggested [14, pp. xx–xxi] that al-Khwa-
rizmi was a mere borrower. This assessment is misguided, but the extent to
which Islamic mathematicians and astronomers were familiar with and in-
fluenced by Indian literature is an interesting question. Rashed emphasizes
what is original to al-Khwarizmi [54, p. 77]:
Comparing the two texts, that of Brahmagupta and that of al-Khwa-
rizmi, reveals irreducible differences. . . . Brahmagupta arrived at the
quadratic equation in one unknown in the course of solving a problem
in astronomy. In other words, he did not give himself the equation as
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 44 — #60
i i
such with a view to solving it. This link between problem and equation,
which is found in other mathematics, this as it were empirical ground-
ing for the equation, has vanished in al-Khwarizmi’s programme. From
the start, al-Khwarizmi proceeded by defining basic terms, which were
then combined to give him the ideal canonical equations with which his
theory is concerned. This new approach breaks the close link between
problems and equations. As for problems, al-Khwarizmi turns to them
later, as exercises in algebra, that is as providing an area in which he
can apply the theory of equations that he has already constructed. . . .
. . . al-Khwarizmi wanted to construct “a form of calculation” for un-
knowns that was independent of what they represented, that is a new
mathematical discipline, that by its very nature was subject to the rules
of proof. There is no trace of any such programme in the work of his
predecessors.
Al-Khwarizmi was one of several Islamic scholars who made important
contributions to algebra. Others include Thabit ibn Qurra, who spent much
of his career in Baghdad, studying medicine, philosophy, mathematics, and
astronomy as well as translating Euclid and other Greeks into Arabic. He
died in 901. Also worth mentioning is the famed Persian poet, philosopher,
and mathematician Omar Khayyam, who studied in Samarkand and worked
in Bukhara (both in modern-day Uzbekistan), dying in 1131. He wrote a
book on algebra, studying quadratic equations from a geometric viewpoint
as in Euclid. The work of Thabit and Omar Khayyam is discussed in detail
in van der Waerden’s A History of Algebra From Al-Khwarizmi to Emmy
Noether [66, pp. 15–31].
While mathematics was flourishing in Arabic, Persian, and Indian lands,
the medieval era in Europe was mathematically more quiescent. The revival
of significant European mathematical activity occurred first in Italy, per-
haps because its cities were major trade centers with connections to Arabic
ports along the Mediterranean. The great Italian mathematician Leonardo
da Pisa—better known to us as Fibonacci—provides testimony to this effect
in the prologue to his influential 1202 work Liber Abaci [28, pp. 15–16], or
the Book of Calculation:
As my father was a public official away from our homeland in the
Bugia [the Algerian port city of Bejaia] customshouse established for
the Pisan merchants who frequently gathered there, he had me in my
youth brought to him, looking to find for me a useful and comfortable
future; there he wanted me to be in the study of mathematics and to
be taught for some days. There from a marvelous instruction in the
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 45 — #61
i i
2.5. History 45
art of the nine Indian figures, the introduction and knowledge of the
art pleased me so much above all else, and I learnt from them, who-
ever was learned in it, from nearby Egypt, Syria, Greece, Sicily and
Provence, and their various methods, to which locations of business I
travelled considerably afterwards for much study, and I learnt from the
assembled disputations.
Fibonacci is best known for the sequence of numbers that bears his
name, the Fibonacci numbers, which arise in his solution to the following
problem [28, pp. 404–405]:
A certain man had one pair of rabbits together in a certain enclosed

place, and one wishes to know how many are created from the pair in
one year when it is the nature of them in a single month to bear another
pair, and in the second month those born to bear also.
This is sufficiently famous that we will take a moment to review

Fibonacci’s conclusion. He works out the numbers month by month, then
explains that “we added the first number to the second, namely the 1 to the
2, and the second to the third, and the third to the fourth, and the fourth to
the fifth, and thus one after another until we added the tenth to the eleventh,
namely the 144 to the 233, and we had the above written sum of rabbits,
namely 377, and thus you can in order find it for an unending number of
months.”
In Chapter 15 of Liber Abaci, Fibonacci examines the algebra of qua-
dratic equations, following al-Khwarizmi’s treatment closely. For example
[28, p. 554], Fibonacci introduces “roots, squares, and simple numbers” and
explains that “in the solutions of problems there are six modes of which
three are simple, and three are composite,” just as in al-Khwarizmi’s classi-
fication of quadratic equations. Of particular importance is Fibonacci’s use
of Hindu-Arabic numerals, which led to their adoption in Europe.
For a brief survey of the algebraic work of Italian mathematicians in
the subsequent three centuries, concluding with Luca Pacioli (1445–1514),
one can turn to [66, pp. 42–47]. Pacioli provided an overview of the math-
ematical knowledge of the time in his 1494 book Summa de arithmetica,
geometrica, proportioni e proportionalità [50], published in Venice. The
most influential material in this book would turn out to be his account of
double-entry bookkeeping, thanks to which he has been called the Father of
Accounting. We will return to Pacioli for a moment, in Section 3.5, to begin
our survey of sixteenth-century Italian contributions to the solving of cubic
equations.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 46 — #62
i i
Let us close this historical discussion with an excerpt from Karpinski’s

introduction [36, pp. 11–12] to his translation of al-Khwarizmi, in which
he describes the study of quadratic equations as an inevitable stage in the
history of human thought.
Algebra is not, as often assumed, an artificial effort of human inge-
nuity, but rather the natural expression of man’s interest in the nu-
merical side of the universe of thought. Tables of square and cubic
numbers in Babylon; geometric progressions, involving the idea of
powers, together with linear and quadratic equations in Egypt; the so-
called Pythagorean theorem in India, and possibly in China, before the
time of Pythagoras; and the geometrical solution of quadratic equa-
tions even before Euclid in Greece, are not isolated facts of the history
of mathematics. While they do indeed mark stages in the development
of pure mathematics, this is only a small part of their significance.
More vital is the implication that the algebraical side of mathematics
has an intrinsic interest for the human mind not conditioned upon time
or place, but dependent simply upon the development of the reasoning
faculty. We may say that the study of powers of numbers, and the re-
lated study of quadratic equations, were an evolution out of a natural
interest in numbers; the facts which we have presented are traces of the
process of this evolution.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 47 — #63
i i
3
Cubic Polynomials
In this chapter, we will take our first look at cubic equations and the famous
formula for their solution known as Cardano’s formula. Girolamo Cardano,
for whom the formula is named, was a sixteenth-century Italian scholar. The
story of the formula’s discovery is complex, as we will see in Section 3.5,
and credit must be shared with Scipione del Ferro and Niccolò Fontana.
Our results in this chapter will be imprecise, because we are lacking
what turns out to be an essential tool: complex numbers. However, it is this
first look that will reveal the need for complex numbers. After developing
the basic facts about them in Chapter 4, we will return to cubic equations in
Chapter 5 and treat them with appropriate care.
3.1 Reduced Cubics

Quadratic polynomials need not have roots. In contrast, a cubic polynomial
must have a root. This is a special case of Theorem 1.14, which stated that
any odd degree polynomial has a root. (Alternatively, once we have Car-
dano’s formula and complex numbers, the existence of a root will follow
automatically from algebra alone.) Let us record this as a theorem.
Theorem 3.1. Let f .x/ be a cubic polynomial. Then there is a real number
a such that f .a/ D 0.
Theorem 1.4 states that, given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a,
if f .a/ D 0, then x a divides f .x/. Combining this with Theorem 3.1,
we find that any cubic polynomial can be factored as a product of linear and
47
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 48 — #64
i i
48 3. Cubic Polynomials
quadratic polynomials.
Exercise 3.1. Suppose f .x/ is a monic cubic polynomial.

(i) Use Theorems 1.4 and 3.1 to deduce that f .x/ factors as
.x a/.x 2 C mx C n/
for some real numbers a, m, and n.

(ii) Deduce that any real root of f .x/ besides a is a root of x 2 C mx C n.
(Hint: Suppose r is a root and r ¤ a. Substitute r in f .x/, using the
factorization in (i). What do you get?)
(iii) Apply Theorem 2.2 to x 2 C mx C n to prove Theorem 3.2.
Theorem 3.2. Let f .x/ be a monic, cubic polynomial. Exactly one of the
following occurs.
(i) f .x/ has one real root a, of multiplicity 3, and factors as
.x a/3 :
(ii) f .x/ has two distinct real roots a1 and a2 , of multiplicities 1 and 2,
and factors as
.x a1 /.x a2 /2 :
(iii) f .x/ has three distinct simple real roots a1 , a2 , and a3 , and factors as
.x a1 /.x a2 /.x a3 /:
(iv) f .x/ has one simple real root a and factors as
.x a/s.x/;
where s.x/ is a quadratic polynomial that does not factor as a product

of linear polynomials.
A cubic polynomial of the form
y 3 C py C q
is called a reduced cubic. In the next exercise, we will see that a change of
variable allows us to pass from an arbitrary cubic polynomial to a reduced
one. This is analogous to the change of variable used in Exercise 2.9 to pass
from a quadratic polynomial to a new one without a degree-one term, and
will simplify the task of solving cubic equations.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 49 — #65
i i
3.1. Reduced Cubics 49
Exercise 3.2. Let
f .x/ D x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d;
for real numbers b, c, and d . Given another real number a, let’s see what
happens under the change of variable x D y C a, or y D x a.
(i) Substitute yCa for x and obtain a polynomial g.y/ in the new variable
y. Write it as
y 3 C By 2 C Cy C D
and obtain formulas for the coefficients B, C , and D in terms of a and
the old coefficients b, c, and d .
(ii) Observe that there is a choice of a for which B D 0. Thus for this a,
changing variables provides a new polynomial g.y/ that is reduced.
(iii) Verify that g.y/ is the reduced polynomial described in Theorem 3.3.
(iv) What is the relation between a root of f .x/ and a root of g.y/? In
particular, given a root s of g.y/, describe a root r of f .x/.
(v) Conclude that solving g.y/ D 0 allows us to solve f .x/ D 0.
Theorem 3.3. Let b, c, and d be real numbers. Given a cubic polynomial

x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d , the change of variable x D y b=3 yields the reduced
cubic polynomial
2 3
3 b 2b bc
y C Cc yC Cd :
3 27 3
We have shown that we can pass from the problem of solving an arbi-
trary cubic equation to the equivalent problem of solving a cubic equation
of the form
y 3 C py C q D 0;
and that being able to solve equations of this simpler type allows us to solve
arbitrary cubic equations.
Exercise 3.3. Suppose we wish to solve the cubic equation
x3 3x 2 4x C 12 D 0:
(i) What reduced cubic equation would we solve in order to find the solu-
tions?
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 50 — #66
i i
(ii) How are the solutions of the reduced cubic equation related to the so-
lutions of the original cubic equation?
In Section 3.2, we will solve the reduced cubic equation in Exercise 3.3,
allowing us to find the solutions of the original cubic equation.
There are two families of reduced cubic equations that take on an even
simpler form, those for which p D 0 and those for which q D 0. Let’s
discuss these.
Exercise 3.4. Consider the cubic equation y 3 C py D 0.

(i) Observe that y D 0 is a solution and that the other solutions are solu-
tions to y 2 C p D 0.
(ii) Deduce that if p > 0 then y D 0 is the only solution and 0 is a simple
root of y 3 C py; if p D 0 then y D 0 is the only solution and is a
repeated root of y 3 C py; and if p < 0 then there are three distinct
p
solutions: y D 0 and y D ˙ p.
Exercise 3.5. Consider the cubic equation y 3 C q D 0. If q D 0, we are

studying the equation y 3 D 0. Obviously the only solution is 0, which has
multiplicity 3 as a root of y 3 . Assume for the remainder of this exercise that
q ¤ 0.
(i) By Theorem 3.1, the equation must have a solution, and any solution
is a cube root of q.
(ii) Suppose r is such a cube root: r 3 D q. Thus, we can rewrite the

polynomial y 3 C q as y 3 r 3 . Show that
y3 r 3 D .y r /.y 2 C ry C r 2 /:
(iii) Show that y 2 C ry C r 2 has no real roots. (What is its discriminant?)
(iv) Conclude that r is the lone root of y 3 C q and that r has multiplicity
1.
3.2 Cardano’s Formula

We have seen in Section 3.1 that every cubic polynomial has at least one
root and that by change of variable we can reduce the problem of finding
a root of a given cubic polynomial x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d to the problem of
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 51 — #67
i i
3.2. Cardano’s Formula 51
finding a root of a cubic polynomial of the form y 3 C py C q. What would

be a suitable solution to the reduced problem?
At the end of Section 2.1, we observed that the quadratic formula does
not so much solve quadratic equations as provide a reduction procedure, one
that uses algebra to reduce the problem of solving a quadratic equation to
the problem of calculating square roots of real numbers. Algebra offers no
guidance on finding the square roots. Similarly, in solving cubic equations,
we should be content if we reduce the problem to one of calculating square
and cube roots. The calculation of cube roots of real numbers, like the cal-
culation of square roots, is not a problem we should expect algebra to solve.
In fact—and this is an essential part of our story—we will discover that we
must be content with something less: a reduction to square root calculations
of real numbers and cube root calculations of entities more general than real
numbers.
No point delaying. Here’s the formula—Cardano’s formula—for a so-
lution of the reduced cubic equation y 3 C py C q D 0:
s r s r
3 q p3 q2 3 q p3 q2
yD C C C C
2 27 4 2 27 4
We will explore its history in Section 3.5. For now, let us just note that
Cardano did not write down such a formula explicitly. Rather, he illustrated
how to solve reduced cubic equations through examples.
Exercise 3.6. Substitute the expression for y given by Cardano’s formula

into the polynomial y 3 CpyCq and verify, after expanding and simplifying,
that it equals 0.
Cardano’s formula expresses the solution to y 3 C py C q D 0 in terms

of the coefficients p and q, addition, multiplication, division by some con-
stants, and the taking of square and cube roots. Thus, just as the quadratic
formula reduces the solution of quadratic equations to square root calcula-
tions, Cardano’s formula reduces the solution of cubic equations to square
root and cube root calculations. Once we use Cardano’s formula to find a
real root r of y 3 C py C q, we can divide y 3 C py C q by y r to obtain
a quadratic polynomial and use the quadratic formula to find any additional
real roots.
The formula has one worrisome feature, the appearance of the square
root of p 3 =27 C q 2 =4. In the quadratic formula, whenever the quadratic
polynomial being studied has a real root, the quantity whose square root
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 52 — #68
i i
must be calculated is non-negative. Cubic polynomials, in contrast to quadrat-

ics, always have real roots. If the value of p 3 =27 C q 2=4 for a reduced cubic
polynomial is negative, we may be in for trouble in attempting to use Car-
dano’s formula. We’ll soon see what issues arise.
Before using Cardano’s formula in specific examples, let’s see how we
might derive it. There are many ways. In the next exercise, we will work
through an approach described by François Viète in 1591. More will be
said about Viète in the historical discussion of Section 5.8.
Exercise 3.7. We begin with the cubic polynomial y 3 C py C q. The key

idea (by no means obvious!) is to introduce a new variable z satisfying
p
yDz :
3z
If p D 0, this change of variable accomplishes nothing, so let’s assume
until the last part of the exercise that p ¤ 0.
(i) Substitute z p=3z for y in y 3 C py C q D 0, expand the cubed term,
simplify, and obtain an equation in z:
p3
z3 C q D 0:
27z 3
(ii) Multiply by z 3 to clear denominators and obtain
p3
z 6 C qz 3 D 0:
27
(iii) This is a quadratic equation in z 3 . Use the quadratic formula to obtain

p
3 q q 2 C .4p 3 =27/
z D ˙ :
2 2
(iv) Introduce R as an abbreviation for p 3 =27 C q 2 =4 and rewrite the last

equality as
q p
z3 D ˙ R:
2
p
There are two possible values for z 3 , either .q=2/C R or .q=2/
(v) p
R. Multiply them and simplify to get
q p q p p 3
C R R D :
2 2 3
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 53 — #69
i i
(vi) Take cube roots of both sides and deduce that the two values of z have
a product satisfying
q p q p
r r
3 3 p
C R R D :
2 2 3
p
(vii) This means that if z is the cube
p root of .q=2/ C R, then p=3z is
the cube root of .q=2/ R.
(viii) Recall that z was introduced to satisfy y D z p=3z. The two terms on
the
p right of this equation,
p z and p=3z, are the cube roots of .q=2/C
R and of .q=2/ R.
(ix) Conclude that y is the sum of the two cube roots:
q p q p
r r
3
yD C R C 3 R:
2 2
(x) We have assumed that p ¤ 0. If p D 0, then the equation we are

solving is y 3 C q D 0 and the formula still holds. (Check that one
summand becomes 0 and the other is the cube root of q.)
We have obtained Cardano’s formula! That wasn’t hard at all. However,

in the derivation of the formula, we have not been precise on certain points.
The imprecisions will be addressed in Exercise 5.1, where we review the
derivation with the benefit of complex numbers. For now, let us ignore these
imprecisions and give the formula a try.
Exercise 3.8. Solve y 3 3y C 2 D 0.

(i) Use Cardano’s formula to find one solution r .
(ii) Use it to factor y 3 3y C 2 as the product of linear and quadratic

polynomials and find the other two solutions.
The next equation is a famous example of Cardano.
Exercise 3.9. Solve y 3 C 6y 20 D 0.

(i) Use Cardano’s formula and obtain
p p
q q
3 3
y D 10 C 6 3 C 10 6 3:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 54 — #70
i i
(ii) Observe that the function y 3 C 6y 20 is always rising as y increases.

(Consider the behavior of the separate terms y 3 and 6y.)
(iii) Deduce that the graph of y 3 C6y 20 crosses the y-axis (the horizontal
axis) only once, so that y 3 C 6y 20 D 0 has only one real solution.
(iv) Conclude that the expression we have obtained for y using Cardano’s
formula must be the lone real solution.
We can stop here, content that we have found the single real root of
y 3 C6y 20. Or we can use a calculator to determine at least approximately
what the sum of the two cube roots is. If we do this, we discover that it is
close to 2. Substituting 2 for y in y 3 C 6y 20 to see how close to 0 we
are, we further discover that
23 C 6 2 20 D 8 C 12 20 D 0:
In other words, 2 is not just approximately a root of y 3 C 6y 20. It is a

root! Since y 3 C 6y 20 has only one real root, the complicated expression
we found in Exercise 3.9 for the root as a sum of cube roots must equal 2:
p p
q q
3 3
10 C 6 3 C 10 6 3 D 2:
This is at least a little disappointing. What if we didn’t recognize that

the sum of cube roots offered by Cardano’s formula is simply 2? It turns
out, for this example at least, that we can calculate the cube roots arising
p
as summands in Cardano’s formula explicitly as expressions involving 3
and then verify that their sum is 2. Let’s do so.
Exercise 3.10. We will calculate the cube roots that appear in Exercise 3.9
by guessing and verifying.
p p
(i) Guess that the cube root of 10 C 6 3phas the form a C b 3. Cube
this. Combine terms that don’t involve 3 and terms that do to get two
equations in a and b with integer coefficients.
(ii) There’s no systematic way to solve two simultaneous equations such

as these in general. Instead, turn again to guessing. Try small integers
as values for a and b to find a solution.
p
(iii) Find a real cube root of 10 6 3 in a similar way.
(iv) Verify that the sum of the two cube roots is 2.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 55 — #71
i i
Let’s try another example where the same difficulty arises.
Exercise 3.11. Solve y 3 2y 4 D 0.

(i) Use Cardano’s formula to obtain
s r s r
3 100 3 100
y D 2C C 2 :
27 27
(ii) Rewrite this as

r r
3 10 p 3 10 p
2C 3C 2 3:
9 9
(iii) Taking a hint from Exercise 3.10, let’s seep if we can obtain a simpler
expression. Findp the cube root of 2 C 10 3=9 by guessing
p that it has
the form a C b 3. Cube this, set it equal to 2 C 10 3=9, and obtain
two equations for a and b. Try small integers for a and possibly small
fractions for b to find cube roots.
p
(iv) Obtain a cube root of 2 10 3=9 as well, and deduce from Cardano’s
formula that 2 is a solution of y 3 2y 4 D 0.
(v) Factor y 3 2y 4 as the product of y 2 and a quadratic polynomial.
Because the quadratic polynomial has no real roots, 2 is the only real
root of y 3 2y 4.
Once again, Cardano’s formula has given us a solution to a cubic equa-

tion as a frightful sum of cube roots that turns out to be a simple number.
Let’s consider yet another example. A surprise awaits, one of the great
surprises in the history of mathematics.
Exercise 3.12. Solve y 3 7y C 6 D 0.

(i) Use Cardano’s formula to obtain
s r s r
3 100 3 100
yD 3C C 3
27 27
as one root.
(ii) Rewrite this as
r r
3 10 p 3 10 p
3C 3C 3 3:
9 9
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 56 — #72
i i
The form of the solution in Exercise 3.12 is similar to the form of the
solution in Exercise 3.11, the only essential difference being the minus sign
under the square root. But what a difference! Because of the minus sign, the
solution makes no sense. After all, there is no square root of 3.
Let’s not worry about the meaninglessness of our solution pjust yet. In-
stead, taking
p a hint from Exercises 3.10 and 3.11, let’s treat 3 the way
we did 3 and try to find cube roots that we might be able p to add to ob-
tain a simpler answer. Even though we don’t know what 3 means, let’s
assume in the exercises that when we square it, the result is the number 3.
p
Exercise 3.13.
p Let’s guess that 3 C 10 3=9 has a cube root in p the
form a C b 3. We defer any concerns about the meaning of a C b 3,
choosing for now just to work with it formally.
p p
(i) Cube a C b 3. Combine terms that don’t involve 3 and terms
that do to get two equations in a and b with integer coefficients.
(ii) Make guesses for a and b. Small positive integers for a and fractions
involving thirds for b should give a solution quickly.
p
(iii) Find the cube root of 3 10 3=9 similarly.
p p
(iv) The expressions for the cube roots of 3C10 3=9 and 3 10 3=9
involve the square root of 3. Let’s not worry yet. Let’s proceed.
p
(v) Add the two cube roots: the troublesome 3 terms cancel, leaving
us with a meaningful real number, 2. Verify that 2 is a solution to y 3
7y C 6 D 0.
(vi) Conclude that Cardano’s formula has led us to a correct solution of the
equation y 3 7y C 6 D 0, namely, y D 2.
(vii) Since 2 is a solution, the polynomial y 3 7y C 6 factors as the product

of y 2 and a quadratic polynomial. Divide y 2 into y 3 7y C 6 to
find the quadratic polynomial, then determine its roots, thereby finding
all three roots of y 3 7y C 6.
Cardano’s formula has successfully produced the roots of y 3 7y C 6,

provided
p we are willing to work formally with the meaningless expression
3.
We can use Exercise 3.13 to solve the cubic equation introduced in Ex-
ercise 3.3.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 57 — #73
i i
Exercise 3.14. Solve
x3 3x 2 4x C 12 D 0
by using the change of variable of Theorem 3.3 and applying the result of
Exercise 3.13.
Let’s conclude this section withpone more illustration of what becomes

possible once we open the door to 3.
Exercise 3.15. Solve x 3 1 D 0.

(i) Observe that 1 is a solution.
(ii) Factor x 3 1 as .x 1/.x 2 C mx C n/ and determine m and n.
(iii) Use the quadratic formula to solve x 2 C mx C n D 0. Obtain in this

way two additional solutions of x 3 D 1, the two “numbers”
p
1 3
˙ :
2 2
(iv) For the displayed numbers to make sense, there must be a square root
of 3. Let’s continue not to worry about this. It will be convenient to
have a special name for the hypothetical number
p
1 3
C :
2 2
We will use the
p lower case Greek letter omega for this purpose and
write 1=2 C 3=2 as !.
(v) Verify that the other hypothetical number,

p
1 3
;
2 2
is ! 2 .
(vi) Multiply ! by ! 2 to get 1. In other words, verify that ! 3 D 1. Sim-

ilarly, verify that .! 2 /3 D 1. Thus, ! and ! 2 are both solutions to
x 3 D 1.
(vii) Conclude that the three cube roots of 1 are 1, !, and ! 2 .
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 58 — #74
i i
Exercise 3.16. Let c be any non-zero real number. From Exercise 3.5, c
has one real cube root. Call it a. Provided that the new number ! introduced
in the preceding exercise makes sense, show that !a and ! 2 a are also cube
roots of c. Conclude that if we decide to treat ! as an allowable number, we
will find that the polynomial x 3 c has three distinct roots, one real and the
others of a new form.
3.3 Graphs
In this section, we will look at the shapes of cubic polynomial graphs. The
results of this section are needed only in Section 3.4, where we take our
first look at the discriminant of a cubic. We will return to the study of the
discriminant in Section 5.3 and obtain results purely algebraically, without
reference to this section. Thus, we might choose to omit both this section
and Section 3.4. However, the principal results enhance our visual or geo-
metric understanding of cubic polynomials.
To give full proofs of the results of this section, some background from
the foundations of real numbers and calculus is needed. Readers with that
background, including familiarity with the connection between derivatives
and turning points summarized in Section 1.6, will be able to prove the re-
sults easily. For those unfamiliar with calculus, we will indicate an approach
that reduces the calculus to a minimum, although some foundational theo-
rems on the real numbers are needed.
We will restrict ourselves to reduced cubic polynomials, those of the
form x 3 C px C q. As we saw in Section 3.1, this is in fact no restriction
at all. Recall from Section 1.6 the notions of local maximum, local mini-
mum, and turning point for the graph of a function y D f .x/. We know
from Theorem 1.15 that the graph of x 3 C px C q has at most two turning
points. We know from Theorem 1.13 that the graph rises from arbitrarily
low heights on the left of the y-axis to arbitrarily high heights on the right.
The theorems tell us that the graph of a cubic has two possible behaviors: it
will rise steadily as x increases or it will rise to a local maximum, fall to a
local minimum, then rise. Which one occurs depends on the sign of p.
The possibilities are illustrated in Figure 3.1, which shows the graphs of
the cubic polynomials y 3 C px for p D 4; 2; 0; 2, and 4. For p D 2 or
4, (or, more generally, p positive), the graph rises steadily, with no turning
points. For p D 2 or 4 (or, more generally, for p negative), the graph
rises, then falls, then rises. An exceptional case occurs when p D 0. Here,
the graph never turns, but at x D 0, it stops rising for an instant, being
essentially flat. More precisely, the x-axis is tangent to the graph at .0; 0/,
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 59 — #75
i i
3.3. Graphs 59
y
y = x 3 + 4x
y = x 3 + 2x
y = x3
y = x 3 – 2x
y = x 3 – 4x
x
Figure 3.1. Shapes of cubic polynomial graphs
so that the slope of the graph there is 0.

Let us return to arbitrary reduced cubic polynomials.
Exercise 3.17. Let p and q be real numbers with p 0. Let f .x/ D

x 3 C px C q.
(i) Show for any two real numbers a < b that f .a/ < f .b/.
(ii) Conclude, using Theorem 1.14, that Theorem 3.4 holds.
Theorem 3.4. Let p and q be real numbers with p 0. Let f .x/ D

x 3 C px C q.
(i) The graph of y D f .x/ never falls as x increases. In particular, the
graph of y D f .x/ has no turning point.
(ii) The graph crosses the x-axis exactly once, so that f .x/ has exactly
one real root.
The graph of y D x 3 C px C q crosses the y-axis at .0; q/. Those

familiar with calculus will recognize that the slope of the graph at .0; q/ is
p. Thus, the larger p is, the steeper the graph is at .0; q/ and the smaller
p is, the flatter the graph is at .0; q/. In the extreme case that p D 0, the
polynomial f .x/ is just x 3 C q and the slope at .0; q/ is 0. Thus, the graph
is flat there, with tangent line y D q.
When p < 0, the graph of x 3 C px C q has two turning points. We can
use elementary calculus to prove this and determine where they are:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 60 — #76
i i
Theorem 3.5. Let p and q be real numbers with p < 0 and let f .x/ D
x 3 C px C q. Let a be the positive square root of p=3.
(i) The graph of y D f .x/ has two turning points, a local maximum at
x D a and a local minimum at x D a.
(ii) As x increases, the graph rises to a turning point at

2ap
a; q ;
3
falls to a turning point at

2ap
a; q C ;
3
then rises.
Exercise 3.18. We can use elementary calculus to prove Theorem 3.5:

(i) Calculate where f 0 .x/ takes on the value 0 and deduce that x D a
and x D a are the only candidates for turning points.
(ii) Determine the sign of f 0 .x/ for values of x satisfying x < a, a <
x < a, and a < x. Deduce that there are indeed turning points at
x D a and x D a.
(iii) Calculate the heights f . a/ and f .a/ of the turning points.
(iv) Deduce that the theorem holds.
We can prove much of Theorem 3.5 without calculus. Let’s do so, to

get an enhanced understanding of why Theorem 3.5 holds. The shape of the
graph of x 3 C px C q is independent of q. As q varies, the graph slides up
and down (as described in Exercise 2.11), but otherwise remains unchanged.
Exercise 3.19. Let p and q be real numbers with p < 0 and let a be
the positive square root of p=3. In this exercise, we will find two turning
points for the graph of y D x 3 C px C q. We can rewrite the cubic as
x 3 3a2 x C q.
(i) Let g.x/ D x 3 3a2 x C 2a3 . Because a is a root, x a divides g.x/.
Factor g.x/ as .x a/2 .x C 2a/. Use this factorization to verify for
x > a that as x increases, so does g.x/. Also check that g.a/ D 0, but
g.x/ > 0 for any x 0 besides x D a.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 61 — #77
i i
(ii) Deduce that .a; 0/ is a local minimum for g.x/ and that the graph of
g.x/ rises to the right of x D a as x increases.
(iii) Let h.x/ D x 3 3a2 x 2a3 . Because a is a root, x Ca divides h.x/.

Factor h.x/ as .x C a/2 .x 2a/. Use this factorization to verify for
x < a that as x increases, so does h.x/. Also check that h. a/ D 0,
but h.x/ < 0 for any x 0 besides x D a.
(iv) Let q be a real number and let f .x/ D x 3 3a2 x C q. The graph of
f .x/ is just a vertical shift of the graphs of g.x/ and h.x/. Conclude
that f .x/ has a local maximum at . a; q 2ap=3/ and a local mini-
mum at .a; q C 2ap=3/, with the graph rising as x increases to a and
as x increases from a.
Let’s continue with the notation of Exercise 3.19. We might guess from
the exercise that the graph of y D x 3 C px C q falls as x goes from a to a.
Theorem 3.5 tells us that this is the case, as we easily check using calculus,
since we can verify that the derivative 3x 2 C p of x 3 C px C q is negative
for all values of x satisfying a < x < a.
Without calculus, we can still show with a little more work (and an
appeal to basic facts from the foundations of real numbers) that x 3 Cpx Cq
decreases as x goes from a to a. For instance, we can show for each real
number r between a and a that there is some open interval around r on
which x 3 C px C q is decreasing. This local information, together with
basic results on the real numbers, shows x 3 C px C q is decreasing across
the entire interval . a; a/. Rather than pursuing this point further, we will
accept that it is true, as we already know from calculus.
3.4 A Discriminant
For a quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c, we know that there are three
possibilities for the roots: two distinct real roots, one real root repeated, or
no real roots. We also know that we can decide which case holds from the
coefficients b and c, as we saw in Theorem 2.5. The three cases correspond
to the quantity b 2 4c, the discriminant of x 2 C bx C c, being positive,
zero, or negative. This can be proved by using elementary calculus or the
quadratic formula.
For a cubic polynomial x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d , as for a quadratic poly-
nomial, it is possible to determine from the coefficients the nature of the
cubic’s roots: whether the cubic has one simple real root, three distinct real
roots, or repeated real roots. This is governed by an expression in b, c, and
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 62 — #78
i i
d , known as the discriminant. We will discuss an algebraic approach to the

discriminant in Section 5.3. An alternative approach based on an under-
standing of the graph of a cubic polynomial (and therefore depending on
calculus) is also possible. In this section, we will describe this approach for
a reduced cubic polynomial, using the results of Section 3.3.
We continue to work with a cubic polynomial x 3 Cpx Cq, where p and
q are real numbers, and we will write it as f .x/. Our analysis, as the results
of Section 3.3 would suggest, depends on whether p is positive, negative,
or 0. In case p D 0, we analyzed the polynomial x 3 C q in Exercise 3.5.
It has one real root, the real cube root of q, which is of multiplicity 3 if
q D 0 and of multiplicity 1 otherwise.
Exercise 3.20. Let f .x/ D x 3 C px C q with p > 0.

(i) Recall from Theorem 3.4, or observe anew, that the graph of y D f .x/
is always increasing and that therefore f .x/ has only one real root.
(ii) Let r be the real root. From Theorem 3.2, either r has multiplicity 1 as
a root of f .x/, in which case f .x/ factors as the product of x r and
a quadratic polynomial that is not a product of linear polynomials, or
r has multiplicity 3, in which case f .x/ factors as .x r /3 . Show that
f .x/ cannot factor as .x r /3 and conclude that r has multiplicity 1.
We will handle the case p < 0 in Exercise 3.21, using Theorem 3.5.
It will be helpful to have a picture in mind of the possible behaviors of the
graphs. We will use Figure 3.2 as a guide. The figure shows the graphs of the
cubic polynomials x 3 3x C q for q D 4; 2; 0; 2, and 4. All five graphs
y y = x 3 – 3x + 4
y = x 3 – 3x + 2
y = x 3 – 3x
y = x 3 – 3x – 2
y = x 3 – 3x – 4
Figure 3.2. Intersection of y D x 3 3x C q with x-axis
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 63 — #79
i i
have the same shape, as we would expect. They are translations of each
other, up or down. How far each one is shifted determines how the x-axis
meets it and therefore how many roots the corresponding polynomial has.
Imagine a video showing the graph of y D x 3 3x C q as q increases
from 10 to 10. At the start of the video, the graph of y D x 3 3x 10
is shown. As time goes by, the curve steadily rises, until at the end of the
video we arrive at the graph of y D x 3 3x C 10.
As suggested in Figure 3.2 with q D 4, at the video’s start, the curve
will cross the x-axis only once. When q D 2, the curve will cross the
x-axis off to the right, but suddenly the turning point on the left makes
contact with the x-axis, producing a second root. Once q increases above
2, the turning point rises above the x-axis and is replaced by two points
of intersection on the left, along with the point of intersection on the right.
Thus, as the figure illustrates in the case of q D 0, whenever 2 < q < 2
the graph of x 3 3x C q crosses the x-axis three times and there are three
roots. The behavior changes when q D 2. If we were to watch the video as
q increases from 2 to 2, we would see the middle of the three intersection
points approach the rightmost intersection point, until they merge when q D
2. The graph of x 3 3x C 2 therefore meets the x-axis only twice and the
polynomial has two roots. Finally, as q increases beyond 2, the graph no
longer makes contact with the x-axis to the right, crossing only on the left,
with x 3 3x C q having only one root.
Exercise 3.21. Let f .x/ D x 3 C px C q with p < 0. Let a be the positive

square root of p=3.
(i) Recall from Theorem 3.5 that the graph of y D f .x/ has two turning
points, a local maximum at . a; q 2ap=3/ and a local minimum at
.a; q C 2ap=3/.
(ii) The real roots of f .x/ occur at the x-coordinates of the points where
the graph of y D f .x/ meets the x-axis. Geometrically there are five
cases, as depicted in Figure 3.2 and described in the discussion that
preceded this exercise:
(a) The x-axis crosses the graph above the local maximum:
f .a/ < f . a/ < 0:
(b) The x-axis crosses the graph at the local maximum:
f .a/ < f . a/ D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 64 — #80
i i
(c) The x-axis crosses the graph between the local minimum and the
local maximum:
f .a/ < 0 < f . a/:
(d) The x-axis crosses the graph at the local minimum:
0 D f .a/ < f . a/
(e) The x-axis crosses the graph below the local minimum:
0 < f .a/ < f . a/:
(iii) For each of these five cases, describe the number of real roots of f .x/
and their multiplicity, referring to Theorem 3.2 for guidance on the
options.
(iv) Express the last result by saying that there are three possibilities for
the nature of the roots, depending on whether f . a/ and f .a/ have
opposite sign, f . a/ and f .a/ have the same sign, or one of them is
0.
(v) The three cases can be described more compactly in terms of the sign
of the product of f . a/ and f .a/:
(a) If f . a/f .a/ < 0, then f .x/ has three distinct real roots.
(b) If f . a/f .a/ > 0, then f .x/ has one real root, of multiplicity 1.
(c) If f . a/f .a/ D 0, then f .x/ has two distinct real roots, of mul-
tiplicities 1 and 2.
(vi) Calculate the product f . a/f .a/ to get
4p 3
f . a/f .a/ D q 2 C ;
27
so
27f . a/f .a/ D 4p 3 27q 2 :
Given the cubic polynomial x 3 C px C q, whatever the sign of p, let’s

introduce a name and a notation for the quantity that appeared at the end of
Exercise 3.21. Set
ı D 4p 3 27q 2
and call ı the discriminant of x 3 C px C q. We will discover an algebraic
interpretation of this quantity in Section 5.3.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 65 — #81
i i
Exercise 3.22. Let’s continue the analysis of the roots of the cubic poly-
nomial x 3 C px C q.
(i) Assume p D 0. Then x 3 C px C q has one real root, which has
multiplicity 1 if q ¤ 0 and multiplicity 3 if q D 0. Verify that ı < 0 if
q ¤ 0 and ı D 0 if q D 0.
(ii) Assume p > 0. From Exercise 3.20, x 3 C px C q has one simple real
root. Verify that ı < 0.
(iii) Assume p < 0. Deduce from Exercise 3.21 that when the graph of
y D x 3 C px C q crosses the x-axis three times, so that x 3 C px C q
has three distinct real roots, ı > 0. Deduce that when the graph crosses
the x-axis only once, so that x 3 C px C q has one real root, ı < 0.
Deduce that when the graph crosses the x-axis once and is tangent to
the x-axis once, so that there is a repeated real root, ı D 0.
We have considered all possible cases. Reviewing them, we see that ı is

positive precisely when there are three distinct real roots, negative precisely
when there is only one simple real root, and 0 when there is a repeated real
root. Thus, we have proved the following theorem:
Theorem 3.6. Let f .x/ D x 3 C px C q for real numbers p and q. Let

ı D 4p 3 27q 2 , the discriminant of f .x/.
(i) If ı > 0, then f .x/ has three distinct real roots.
(ii) If ı D 0, then f .x/ has a repeated real root.
(iii) If ı < 0, then f .x/ has one simple real root.
Exercise 3.23. Using Theorem 3.6, describe the nature of the roots of each
of these polynomials:
(i) x 3 3x C 2.
(ii) x 3 C 6x 20.
3
(iii) x 2x 4.
(iv) x 3 7x 6.
Cardano’s formula for a root of the reduced cubic polynomial x 3 Cpx C

q includes the square root of the quantity p 3 =27 C q 2=4, which we denoted
by R. The discriminant ı and R are constant multiples of each other:
ı D 108R:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 66 — #82
i i
If R is negative, Cardano’s formula contains square roots of negative

numbers. Since R is negative when ı is positive, and ı is positive precisely
when f .x/ has three distinct real roots, we see that the troublesome sit-
uation of having to deal with square roots of negative numbers in using
Cardano’s formula arises precisely when f .x/ has three distinct real roots.
We will discuss this further in Section 5.4.
3.5 History
We closed our account of quadratic equations in Section 2.5 with Luca Paci-
oli, who summarized the mathematical knowledge of the time in 1494 [50].
Regarding cubic and quartic equations, Pacioli wrote [66, p. 47] that “it has
not been possible until now to form general rules.” This was the setting at
the dawn of the sixteenth century.
By the century’s end, general rules would be in place, thanks to the work
of Cardano and other Italian mathematicians. The story of these discoveries
is a wonderful one. Given the excellent accounts in [67] and [66], as well
as the 1953 biography Cardano: The Gambling Scholar [49] by the math-
ematician Øystein Ore, only a brief account will be given here. (Ore’s bi-
ography is unfortunately no longer in print. For more on Cardano, one can
also turn to Anthony Grafton’s Cardano’s cosmos: the worlds and works
of a Renaissance astrologer [33] as well as Cardano’s autobiography, The
Book of My Life [13], available in a 2002 edition that contains both Jean
Stoner’s 1929 English translation and an introduction by Grafton.)
An important point to keep in mind in preparation for the story is that
the academic culture at the time was not anything like that to which we are
accustomed. If someone were now to solve a centuries-long problem, he or
she would immediately announce it, lecture on it, and publish it, with the
written account being made available on the internet long before it actually
appears in print. Other mathematicians would study the solution, make sure
there are no errors, and pay close attention to the methods used for the solu-
tion, in anticipation that the methods and the new ideas they contain may be
applicable to other problems. In contrast, in sixteenth century Italy, scholars
would keep techniques of solution to themselves, perhaps employing them
to succeed at public competitions.
Scipione del Ferro was the first person to obtain a formula for solutions
to cubic equations. Del Ferro lived from 1465 until 1526, serving as a pro-
fessor at the University of Bologna for the final thirty years of his life. He
found a way to solve cubic equations of the form
x 3 C px D q:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 67 — #83
i i
3.5. History 67
Del Ferro and his contemporaries worked with positive numbers only, both
as coefficients and as solutions, so p and q are understood to be positive
and we seek positive values of x. An example would be x 3 C 6x D 20, the
cubic equation of Exercise 3.9.
We saw in Section 2.5 that seven centuries earlier, al-Khwarizmi had
classified quadratic equations into three forms (excluding cases in which
one of the coefficients is 0). Similarly, because of the restriction to positive
coefficients, there are three forms for cubic equations with no degree 2 term,
the form x 3 C px D q that del Ferro studied as well as
x 3 D px C q
and
x 3 C q D px:
Were 0 available, we might momentarily be tempted to add a fourth case,
x 3 C px C q D 0:
But since p and q are positive, it cannot have a positive solution. Hence, we
are missing nothing by omitting it.
Del Ferro did not publish his solution, but he did communicate it to his
son-in-law, Annibale della Nave, and his colleague Antonio Maria Fior. In
1535, Fior challenged the Venetian mathematician Niccolò Fontana (1499–
1557) to a contest in which each would pose thirty problems to the other, the
loser paying for a banquet for thirty. Fontana, better known by his nickname
Tartaglia, or the stutterer, prepared problems of varying types. In contrast,
all of Fior’s problems were cubic equations of the type x 3 C px D q, with
del Ferro’s solution as his secret weapon.
Just before time expired, on the night that ran from February 12 to 13,
Tartaglia found a way to solve the equation x 3 C px D q on his own! So
much for Fior’s secret weapon. Tartaglia solved all thirty of Fior’s problems,
whereas Fior could solve only some of Tartaglia’s. Victory was sufficient
satisfaction for Tartaglia, who chose to forgo the banquet. Of course, he had
also won eternal fame as independent co-discoverer, with del Ferro, of the
cubic’s solution.
The story now shifts to another participant, the one for whom the so-
lution to the cubic equation is named, Girolamo Cardano. Cardano was a
prominent scholar in many fields, famous as a doctor, astrologer, philoso-
pher, and mathematician. He lived from 1501 to 1576 and spent most of
his life in the city of his birth, Milan. In 1539, having heard of Tartaglia’s
solution to the cubic, he asked Tartaglia through an intermediary what the
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 68 — #84
i i
solution was, but Tartaglia chose not to tell. Cardano then invited Tartaglia
to come to Milan as his guest, enticing him with the opportunity to meet Al-
fonso d’Avalos, the military commander of Milan, to whom Tartaglia would
be able to show some of his military inventions.
Like Cardano, Tartaglia was a man of many talents, including expertise
in ballistics and military engineering. In 1546, he would publish some of his
military work in Quesiti et Inventioni Diverse, or New Problems and Inven-
tions [63]. (Its drawings of cannons, cannonball paths, and fortifications are
reason enough to seek out a copy of the book.) Naturally, Tartaglia accepted
Cardano’s invitation. During his stay, Tartaglia told Cardano how he solved
the equation x 3 C px D q, with Cardano swearing an oath on March 29,
1539 never to publish it.
We should note at this point that the principal source for many details
of this story, including Cardano’s oath, is Tartaglia himself, as he would
devote the final pages of Quesiti et Inventioni Diverse to an account of his
dealings with Cardano.
After Tartaglia left, Cardano saw how to use Tartaglia’s ideas in order
to obtain solutions to the cubic equations of the forms x 3 D px C q and
x 3 C q D px. Difficulties arise in these two cases because for certain
values of p and q, the solutions may contain expressions with square roots
of negative numbers, as we saw in Exercise 3.12. (In contrast, this cannot
occur in the expression for a solution of the cubic equation x 3 C px D
q.) Nonetheless, in principle Cardano had found a solution to any cubic
equation without a degree 2 term, and as we know, it is then an elementary
matter to solve all cubic equations.
The fourth participant in our story is Lodovico Ferrari, who lived from
1522 to 1565. Ferrari came from Bologna to Milan at the age of 14 to work
as a servant in Cardano’s household. Cardano quickly realized Ferrari’s
talent, and Ferrari moved from servant to student to collaborator. Ferrari
learned from Cardano the method of solving cubic equations, then made
his own great contribution: the solution of quartic equations. What Ferrari
discovered is that one can reduce the problem of solving a quartic equation
to that of solving an auxiliary cubic equation, one whose coefficients are
expressed in terms of the coefficients of the original quartic. We will study
Ferrari’s discovery in Section 6.2.
Ferrari’s result was an advance of the greatest importance, but it posed
a difficulty for Cardano. He had given his oath to Tartaglia that he would
not publish Tartaglia’s solution to cubic equations of a special form. Yet,
Cardano had extended this to other cubic equations and his disciple Ferrari
had shown how to use it to solve quartic equations. This was too important
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 69 — #85
i i
3.5. History 69
to keep secret. Moreover, he may have had a way out, since the formula was
initially due to del Ferro, not Tartaglia.
Cardano decided to publish the solution, which he did in the book Ars
Magna, written in Latin and published in 1545. (It is available in an English
translation by T. Richard Witmer, with the title The Great Art; or, The Rules
of Algebra [12].) He states clearly at the beginning of Ars Magna [12, pp. 8–
9] that the solution to the cubic equation in the special form x 3 C px D q
was discovered by del Ferro and re-discovered by Tartaglia:
In our own days Scoipione del Ferro of Bologna has solved the case
of the cube and first power equal to a constant, a very elegant and ad-
mirable accomplishment. Since this art surpasses all human subtlety
and the perspicuity of mortal talent and is a truly celestial gift and a
very clear test of the capacity of men’s minds, whoever applies him-
self to it will believe that there is nothing he cannot understand. In
emulation of him, my friend Niccolò Tartaglia of Brescia, wanting not
to be outdone, solved the same case when he got into a contest with
his [Scipioine’s] pupil, Antonio Maria Fior, and, moved by my many
entreaties, gave it to me. For I had been deceived by the words of Luca
Paccioli, who denied that any more general rule could be discovered
than his own. Notwithstanding the many things which I had already
discovered, as is well known, I had despaired and had not attempted
to look any further. Then, however, receiving Tartaglia’s solution and
seeking for the proof of it, I came to understand that there were a great
many other things that could also be had. Pursuing this thought and
with increased confidence, I discovered these others, partly by myself
and partly through Lodovico Ferrari, formerly my pupil. Hereinafter
those things which have been discovered by others have their names
attached to them; those to which no name is attached are mine. The
demonstrations, except for the three by [al-Khwarizmi] and the two by
Lodovico, are all mine.
Cardano turns to cubic equations in Chapter 11, “On the Cube and First
Power Equal to the Number,” which is devoted to equations of the form
x 3 C px D q. At the start of the chapter, he once again credits del Ferro
and Tartaglia [12, p. 96]:
Scipio Ferro of Bologna well-nigh thirty years ago discovered this rule
and handed it on to Antonio Maria Fior of Venice, whose contest with
Niccolò Tartaglia of Brescia gave Niccolò occasion to discover it. He
[Tartaglia] gave it to me in response to my entreaties though with-
holding the demonstration. Armed with this assistance, I sought out its
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 70 — #86
i i
demonstration in [various] forms. This was very difficult. My version

of it follows.
By modern standards, Cardano had given proper credit for the results
on which he and Ferrari built, and had satisfied all scholarly expectations.
But this was a different era, and Tartaglia was furious. As already noted, he
told his side of the story a year later in Quesiti et Inventioni Diverse [63],
making the story of the oath—and its text—public.
Cardano did not respond to Tartaglia’s accusations, but Ferrari, on Car-
dano’s behalf, issued a public challenge. The dispute was argued in Milan
on August 10, 1548, with Tartaglia leaving before it was settled and evi-
dently being named the loser. (See Ore’s discussion [49, pp. 99–105] for an
attempt to sort out the details from the available records.)
These discoveries make for a richly entertaining story, worthy of the
greatness of the discoveries themselves. As Varadarajan notes in conclud-
ing his account of the dispute [67, p. 62], “Tartaglia, through his penchant
for secrecy, represents the middle ages, while Cardano, with his generous
views about authorship and sharing of knowledge, represents the modern
view. Mathematics was very fortunate that a person with the great vision
and world-view like Cardano was able to get his hands on the original dis-
covery and was then able to build a wonderful structure on top of it that led
to the beginning of Algebra as we know today.” Ore offers the following
conclusion [49, p. 106]:
Cardano and Ferrari represent by far the greater mathematical pene-

tration and wealth of novel ideas. Tartaglia was also, doubtless, an ex-
cellent mathematician, but his great tragedy was the head-on collision
with the only two opponents in the world who could be ranked above
him. Without them, he would most likely have been reckoned as the
foremost mathematician in the middle of the sixteenth century.
As for Cardano’s actual account of his formula, let us see what he says
in Chapter 11 of Ars Magna in his treatment of equations of the form x 3 C
px D q [12, pp. 98–99]. Some of his terminology has been modernized
in the English translation. The terms binomium and p apotome, which
p the
translation retains, refer to pairs of numbers such as 5 C 3 and 5 3.
Cube one-third the coefficient of x; add to it the square of one-half the

constant of the equation; and take the square root of the whole. You
will duplicate this, and to one of the two you add one-half the number
you have already squared and from the other you subtract one-half the
same. You then have a binomium and its apotome. Then, subtracting
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 71 — #87
i i
3.5. History 71
the cube root of the apotome from the cube root of the binomium, the
remainder [or] that which is left is the value of x.
For example,
x 3 C 6x D 20:
Cube 2, one-third of 6, making 8; square 10, one-half of the constant;
p results. Add 100 and 8, making 108, the square root of which is
100
108. This you will duplicate: to one add 10, one-half the constant,
and frompthe other subtract the same. p Thus you will obtain the bi-
nomium 108 C 10 and its apotome 108 10. Take the cube roots
of these. Subtract [the cube root of the] apotome from that of the bi-
nomium and you will have the value of x:
3 p 3 p
q q
108 C 10 108 10:
One should compare this description with Exercise 3.9.

Cardano continues in Chapter 11 with two more examples [12, pp. 99–
100], the equations x 3 C 3x D 10 and x 3 C 6x D 2. He then returns to the
first example and notes that the complicated difference of cube roots can be
calculated to be 2.
We will return to the cubic equation’s history in Section 5.8. We con-
clude for now with the opening words of Grafton’s introduction to Car-
dano’s autobiography [13, p. ix]:
Cardano dazzled readers across sixteenth-century Europe. His original
and influential books dealt with medicine, astrology, natural philoso-
phy, mathematics, and morals—to say nothing of devices for raising
sunken ships and stopping chimneys from smoking. They won the at-
tention of popes and inquisitors, Catholics and Protestants, theologians
and playwrights. And nothing did more to enhance their appeal than
the polished stories about Cardano’s past that glittered like enticing
gems in his most technical treatises, or the longer, dramatic retellings
of his whole life story that he offered the public at suitable intervals.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 72 — #88
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 73 — #89
i i
4
Complex Numbers
Our experience with Cardano’s formula has taught p us that to solve cubic
equations, we need to work with numbers such as 3, that is, square roots
of negative numbers. Cubic equations were where they were first encoun-
tered. They are now called complex numbers, and have been found to have
many important uses in mathematics and science. In this chapter, we will
introduce them and see how to calculate their nth powers and roots, which
is needed in our study of polynomial equations.
4.1 Complex Numbers

In this section we will develop the arithmetic
p of complex numbers. We be-
gin bypintroducing a new number, 1, to serve as a square root of 1.
Once 1 is admitted topthe roll
p of allowable
p numbers,p we are led to more
new numbers, such as 3 1, 2 C 1, andp4 1, when we try
to perform arithmetic operations that combine 1 and our old numbers.
In general, given real numbersp a and b, we must admit to the roll of num-
bers the new number a C b 1. Numbers of this type are called complex
numbers. Real numbers are themselves complex numbers: p the real number
a can be thought of as the complex number
p a C 0 1.
Given a complex number a C b 1, the real number a is called its
real part and the real pnumber b is called its imaginary part. For example,
the real part of 2 C 3 1 is 2 and the imaginary part is 3. Real numbers
are complex numbers with imaginary part 0. Also p of note are the complex
numbers with real part 0, numbers of the form b 1, called pure imaginary
numbers.
73
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 74 — #90
i i
74 4. Complex Numbers
p p
Suppose we are given two complex numbers, aCb 1 and c Cd 1.
How do we add and multiply them? Let’s do what comes naturally and see
what happens. This will lead us to definitions of sum and product.
For addition, if we rearrange and combine terms, we obtain
p p p p
.a C b 1/ C .c C d 1/ D a C c C b 1Cd 1
p
D .a C c/ C .b C d / 1:
This would appear to be a sensible definition of addition, and it is what we
adopt. For example,
p p p
.2 C 3 1/ C .8 C 2 1/ D 10 C 5 1:
How about multiplication? Let’s use the distributive law and multiply
the same two numbers:
p p p p p p
.2 C 3 1/ .8 C 2 1/ D 2 8 C 2 2 1C3 18C3 12 1:
p
It is natural to p
p expect that 1 should commute with real numbers so that
18 D8 1. Assuming this and rearranging terms, we obtain
p p p p p
.2 C 3 1/ .8 C 2 1/ D 2 8 C 2 2 1C38 1 C 3 2. 1/2 :
p
If 1 is to make sense as a number, then it must have the property that its
square is 1: p
. 1/2 D 1:
If we assume this, then we find that
p p p p p
.2C3 1/.8C2 1/ D 16C4 1C24 1C6. 1/ D 10C28 1:
p p
More generally, suppose we wish topmultiply aCbp 1 and cp Cd 1.
Proceeding in the same way, assuming 1c Dc 1 and . 1/2 D
1, we will obtain
p p p
.a C b 1/ .c C d 1/ D .ac bd / C .ad C bc/ 1:
Let us adopt this as our definition of multiplication. The product of two
complex numbers is again a complex number, as would need to be the case
if the definition is to be of any use. p p
Let’s summarize. Given complex numbers a C b 1 and c C d 1,
we have adopted the rules that their sum and product are given by
p p p
.a C b 1/ C .c C d 1/ D .a C c/ C .b C d / 1
and
p p p
.a C b 1/ .c C d 1/ D .ac bd / C .ad C bc/ 1:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 75 — #91
i i
4.1. Complex Numbers 75
Exercise 4.1. Our definition of multiplication

p for two complex numbers
was motivated
p by the assumptions that 1 commutes with real numbers
and that . 1/2 D 1. Now that we’ve defined multiplication, we should
verify that these properties actually hold.
(i) Given a real number a, use the definition of multiplication to prove
that p p
a 1D 1 a:
p
(Hint: The real number a is the complex
p p number a C 0 1, while
1 is the complex number 0 C 1 1.)
(ii) Use the definition of multiplication to prove that
p
. 1/2 D 1:
p
Often the symbol i is used in place of 1 to denote the square root
of 1. There’s no need to do this, but it does make our expressions easier
to write. In this notation, a complex number has the form a C bi , for real
numbers a and b, and i satisfies i 2 D 1. The sum of two complex numbers
a C bi and c C d i is
.a C bi / C .c C d i / D .a C c/ C .b C d /i
and their product is
.a C bi /.c C d i / D .ac bd / C .ad C bc/i:
Exercise 4.2. Add and multiply the pairs of complex numbers.

(i) 3 and 17 15i .
(ii) 3i and 17 15i .
(iii) i and i .
(iv) 4 C i and 3 C 7i .
(v) 4 C 5i and 3 C 6i .
(vi) 2 C 3i and 2 i.
(vii) 5 C 2i and 5 2i .
p
A positive real number r has a real square root r . When we square
p
a pure imaginary number r i according to our multiplication rule, we
obtain
p
. r i /2 D r:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 76 — #92
i i
p
Thus r i is a square root of r . By creating the new number i to serve
as a square root of 1, we have obtained square roots for all negative real
numbers.
A notion that we will need is that of complex conjugate. The complex
conjugate, or simply the conjugate, of a complex number a C bi is the
complex number a bi . The conjugate of a complex number r is denoted
by putting a bar over r to get r . In this notation, we would write for example
that
2 C 3i D 2 3i
and
12i D 12i:
The complex conjugate of a real number a is a itself and the complex con-
jugate of a pure imaginary number bi is its opposite bi .
A multiplicative inverse of a number r is a number s satisfying r s D 1.
For instance, the multiplicative inverse of 1 is 1 and the multiplicative
inverse of 2 is 1=2. What is the multiplicative inverse of ? It is 1= , of
course. But this isn’t an answer. It’s a notation. The fact that there is a real
number s for which s D 1 is by no means obvious. It requires a proof, one
that depends on foundational results about the construction of real numbers.
(See, for instance, [38, pp. 71–73] for a discussion.)
Let us accept the truth of the statement that every non-zero real num-
ber r has a multiplicative inverse, which we will write as 1=r . Thanks to
conjugation, we can deduce from this that non-zero complex numbers have
multiplicative inverses.
Exercise 4.3. Let a and b be real numbers.

(i) Check that .a C bi /.a bi / D a2 C b 2.
(ii) Assume that a C bi ¤ 0. Describe (in terms of a and b) the real and
imaginary parts of a complex number that is a multiplicative inverse of
a C bi .
Let’s derive the basic facts on conjugation and the arithmetic operations
for complex numbers.
Exercise 4.4. Let r and s be complex numbers.

(i) Show that
r Cs Dr Cs
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 77 — #93
i i
4.2. Quadratic Polynomials and the Discriminant 77
and
r s D r s:
(ii) Use this to show that

r2 D r 2
and
r 3 D r 3:
(iii) We can use mathematical induction to show more generally that
rn D rn
for any positive integer n.
Let’s restate one part of Exercise 4.4 as a theorem, for later reference.
Theorem 4.1. Let r and s be complex numbers.

(i) If r 2 D s, then r 2 D s.
(ii) If r 3 D s, then r 3 D s.
One consequence of Exercise 4.4 is Theorem 4.2. We won’t use it until

Exercise 7.1, yet its proof is worth working out now as an exercise on con-
jugation facts. For quadratic, cubic, and quartic polynomials, we will obtain
Theorem 4.2 independently by direct determination of the roots.
Theorem 4.2. Let f .x/ be a positive-degree polynomial with real coeffi-

cients and let r be a root of f .x/ that is a non-real complex number. Then
r is also a root of f .x/.
Exercise 4.5. Prove Theorem 4.2. (Hint: Apply Exercise 4.4 to calculate
f .r /.)
4.2 Quadratic Polynomials and the

Discriminant
We can use complex numbers to obtain a better understanding of the roots
of quadratic polynomials.
Exercise 4.6. Consider the quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c, with real

numbers b and c as coefficients. Assume that b 2 4c < 0. In this case
x 2 C bx C c has no real roots.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 78 — #94
i i
(i) The quadratic formula gives as roots of x 2 C bx C c the two numbers

p
b b 2 4c
˙ :
2 2
Until now, we have viewed these as non-existent, since we had no
numbers available to serve as square roots of the negative real num-
ber b 2 4c. With the introduction of complex numbers, we now have
square roots.
(ii) Rewrite the two roots of x 2 C bx C c given in the previous part as
complex numbers, using i .
(iii) Substitute the resulting complex numbers into x 2 C bx C c and verify
that they are roots of x 2 C bx C c.
(iv) Draw the conclusion that if complex numbers are allowed, the quadratic
formula makes sense even when b 2 4c < 0.
(v) The two roots we have obtained in this way are complex conjugates of
each other. Write the roots as r and r . Verify that
x 2 C bx C c D .x r /.x r/
by multiplying out the right side of the equation.

(vi) Deduce that Theorem 4.3, a refinement of Theorem 2.2, holds.
Theorem 4.3. Let f .x/ D x 2 C bx C c for real numbers b and c. Exactly

one of three possibilities occurs:
(i) x 2 C bx C c has two distinct real roots a1 and a2 , and factors as
.x a1 /.x a2 /:
(ii) x 2 C bx C c has only one real root a, and factors as .x a/2 .

(iii) x 2 C bx C c has two distinct complex roots r and r, and factors as
.x r /.x r/.
Moreover, the first possibility occurs if b 2 4c > 0, the second possibility
occurs if b 2 4c D 0, and the third possibility occurs if b 2 4c < 0.
We saw in Theorem 2.5 that the nature of the roots of a quadratic poly-
nomial x 2 C bx C c is determined by the sign of b 2 4c, which we denoted
ı. In the next exercise, we will see that the nature is determined by the sign
of the square of the difference of the polynomial’s roots.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 79 — #95
i i
4.2. Quadratic Polynomials and the Discriminant 79
Exercise 4.7. Suppose b and c are real numbers. Write r1 and r2 for the
roots of x 2 C bx C c and for .r1 r2 /2 .
(i) Conclude from Theorem 4.3 that there are three mutually exclusive
possibilities for r1 and r2 : they are real and distinct, or real and coin-
cident, or distinct complex conjugates of each other.
(ii) If r1 D r2 , then D 0.
(iii) If r1 and r2 are real and distinct, then > 0.
(iv) The only remaining possibility is that r1 and r2 are not real but are
complex numbers, each the conjugate of the other. Suppose r1 D m C
ni and r2 D m ni , with m and n real numbers and with n ¤ 0. (If
n D 0, the roots are real.) Calculate and show that it is a negative
real number.
(v) We wish to show that the converses of the results in (ii)-(iv) hold as
well; that is:
(a) If > 0, then r1 and r2 are real and distinct;
(b) if D 0, then r1 is a real number and r1 D r2 ;
(c) if < 0, then r1 and r2 are non-real, complex numbers, each the
conjugate of the other.
(vi) Assume that > 0. We are to prove that r1 and r2 are real and dis-
tinct. Suppose this is not the case and deduce from the first part of the
exercise that either r1 and r2 coincide and are real or they are non-real
complex conjugates. Use other parts of the proof to obtain the contra-
diction that 0. Conclude, as desired, that r1 and r2 are real and
distinct.
(vii) Make similar arguments to prove the other two converses.
(viii) Conclude that the sign of determines the nature of the roots of x 2 C
bx C c.
Both b 2 4c, which we write as ı, and .r1 r2 /2 , which we write as

, determine the nature of the roots of x 2 C bx C c. Let’s compare the two
quantities.
Exercise 4.8. With the notation of Exercise 4.7, recall that x 2 C bx C c

factors as .x r1 /.x r2/. Use this to express b and c in terms of r1 and
r2 and deduce that .r1 r2 /2 D b 2 4c, so that and ı coincide.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 80 — #96
i i
We see that the discriminant of x 2 C bx C c has two descriptions. It is

the square of the difference of the roots and it is the quantity b 2 4c. We are
free to take either of these as the definition of the discriminant. However,
the more fundamental quantity is .r1 r2 /2 . One reason is that it can be
generalized for higher-degree polynomials. Hence, it is the one we adopt as
the defining expression for a quadratic polynomial’s discriminant.
The fact that .r1 r2 /2 equals b 2 4c can then be interpreted as the
statement that we can calculate the discriminant of x 2 C bx C c, defined as
the square of the difference of the roots, in terms of the coefficients b and
c, without knowledge of the roots. We record this in the next theorem.
Theorem 4.4. Let b and c be real numbers and let r1 and r2 be the roots
(real or complex) of the quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c, so that x 2 C
bx C c factors as .x r1 /.x r2 /. Let be the discriminant of x 2 C bx C c,
which by definition is .r1 r2 /2 .
(i) determines the nature of the roots of x 2 C bx C c: If > 0, then
the roots are real and distinct; if D 0, then there is one root, real of
multiplicity 2; if < 0, then the roots are a pair of non-real complex
conjugates.
(ii) can be calculated in terms of the coefficients:
D b2 4c:
Complex numbers have allowed us to obtain the refinement Theorem

4.3 of Theorem 2.2. Similarly, we can refine Theorem 3.2 on the roots of
cubic polynomials.
Theorem 4.5. Let f .x/ be a monic, cubic polynomial. Exactly one of (i)–
(iv) occurs.
(i) f .x/ has one real root a, of multiplicity 3, and factors as
.x a/3 :
(ii) f .x/ has two distinct real roots a1 and a2 , of multiplicities 1 and 2,
and factors as
.x a1 /.x a2 /2 :
(iii) f .x/ has three distinct simple real roots a1 , a2 , and a3 , and factors as
.x a1 /.x a2 /.x a3 /:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 81 — #97
i i
4.3. Square and Cube Roots 81
(iv) f .x/ has one real root a and two distinct non-real, complex roots r
and r, and factors as
.x a/.x r /.x r /:
Exercise 4.10. Suppose x 3 C px C q is a cubic polynomial. We saw in

Theorem 3.1 that it must have a real root. Suppose you have found such a
root, r , by using Cardano’s formula or other methods. Explain how you can
find the other two roots, whether real or complex.
4.3 Square and Cube Roots

At the end of Section 2.1, we saw that the quadratic formula reduces the
problem of solving a quadratic equation to that of calculating square roots
of real numbers. At the beginning of Section 3.2, we hoped that solving
cubic equations could be reduced, similarly, to the problem of calculating
square and cube roots of real numbers. Our initial experience with Car-
dano’s formula suggested that we might need to find cube roots of non-real
complex numbers as well. Let’s take a look at the problem of calculating
square and cube roots of complex numbers.
We begin with square roots. How do we find square roots of a complex
number a C bi ? There are two issues here. Does a C bi have another com-
plex number as its square root? If so, can we calculate it? Regarding the
second question, we already have noted that algebraic techniques alone do
not allow us to compute square roots of positive real numbers. We must use
techniques of approximation. We cannot expect the calculation of square
roots of complex numbers to be any easier. We should be content if we can
reduce the problem of calculating square roots of complex numbers to the
problem of calculating square roots of positive real numbers.
Fix real numbers a and b; they should be regarded as known constants,
not as variables. Suppose we wish to find square roots of a C bi . If b D 0,
then finding the square roots of a C bi reduces to finding the square roots
of the real number a. This is trivial if a D 0. If a ¤ 0, it reduces to the
problem of finding the square root of a if a is positive or the square root
of a if a is negative (in which case the square roots of a are i times the
square roots of a). Thus, we can assume that b ¤ 0. Let’s deal with this
case in an exercise.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 82 — #98
i i
Exercise 4.11. Let a and b be real numbers with b ¤ 0. We wish to find

a complex number r C si such that .r C si /2 D a C bi . We can introduce
variables x and y for the unknown real numbers r and s, so that finding a
square root amounts to solving the equation
.x C yi /2 D a C bi
for real values of the unknowns x and y. We view a and b as known, fixed
constants.
(i) Expand the equation .x C yi /2 D a C bi and obtain two simultaneous
equations for x and y with real coefficients.
(ii) Using one of the equations and the fact that b ¤ 0, show that if these
equations have solutions, x and y will be non-zero.
(iii) Using this, divide both sides of one equation by x to get an equation
expressing y in terms of x and substitute this into the other equation
to get a single equation in x.
(iv) To find a square root of a C bi , we need to solve a single equation in x
involving only real numbers. Clear denominators in this equation and
obtain a degree 4 or quartic equation in x.
(v) It can be regarded as a degree 2 or quadratic equation in x 2. Use the
quadratic formula to obtain two values for x 2 in terms of a and b.
(vi) We are looking for a real value of x that solves the equation. If one of
our expressions for x 2 is a positive real number, then its two square
roots are our desired values for x. Verify that one of the expressions
for x 2 is positive.
(vii) Take square roots to obtain two values of x. Using an equation you
obtained earlier in the problem, obtain the two corresponding values
for y.
(viii) Write the formulas for the two square roots of a C bi . Notice that each
is 1 times the other.
We have just shown that any non-zero complex number has two com-
plex numbers as its square roots, each the opposite of the other. We will
record part of this.
Theorem 4.6. Given a complex number s, there exists a complex number

r satisfying r 2 D s; in other words, every complex number has a complex
square root.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 83 — #99
i i
4.3. Square and Cube Roots 83
The existence of square roots allows us to extend the quadratic formula

to quadratic polynomials with complex coefficients. We won’t need the re-
sult for our analysis of cubic and quartic polynomials, but we will use it
in the final section, Section 7.5. In anticipation of that, let’s work out the
details here.
Exercise 4.12. Let b and c be complex numbers.

(i) Rework Exercise 2.7 to show that the roots of x 2 C bx C c are
p
b b 2 4c
xD ˙ :
2 2
(ii) Use Theorem 4.6 to deduce that x 2 C bx C c has a root in the complex
numbers, and so factors as a product of two linear polynomials.
(iii) Conclude that Theorem 4.7 holds.
Theorem 4.7. Let b and c be complex numbers. There exist complex num-
bers r1 and r2 (possibly coincident) such that
x 2 C bx C c D .x r1 /.x r2 /:
In Exercise 4.11, we have proved that complex square roots exist and
shown how to determine them explicitly in terms of square roots of posi-
tive real numbers. We wish to be able to compute cube roots of complex
numbers as well, since this is essential in using Cardano’s formula. Our ex-
perience in Exercise 4.11 suggests that we should be able to calculate cube
roots of complex numbers in terms of cube roots of real numbers. Let’s
mimic what we did for square roots and see how far we can get.
Exercise 4.13. Fix real numbers a and b; they should be regarded as con-
stants, not as variables. Assume b ¤ 0. We wish to determine the cube roots
of the non-real complex number a C bi ; that is, we wish to find a complex
number m C ni such that .m C ni /3 D a C bi . We can introduce variables
x and y for the unknown real numbers m and n, so that finding a cube root
amounts to solving the equation
.x C yi /3 D a C bi
for real values of x and y.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 84 — #100
i i
Expand the equation .x C yi /3 D a C bi and obtain two simultaneous

equations for x and y with real coefficients. Conclude that the problem of
finding a complex cube root of aCbi is equivalent to the problem of finding
real solutions to the two equations.
In Exercise 3.13, we solved the equations that arise in Exercise 4.13

by trial and error for certain choices of a and b. Now we want a general
solution, but there is no obvious way to proceed. Let’s experiment.
Exercise 4.14. Begin with the two equations for x and y obtained in Ex-
ercise 4.13.
(i) Using one of the equations and the assumption that b ¤ 0, show that
if these equations have solutions, then y will be non-zero.
(ii) Introduce a new variable s and set x D sy, so that s D x=y. This
makes sense, since we know that y can’t be 0. Substitute sy for x in
the two equations for x and y to get two equations in s and y. Write
them so that each is an expression in s times y 3 . Using the assumption
that b ¤ 0, show that 3s 2 1 ¤ 0.
(iii) Solve one equation for y 3 , substitute in the other, and obtain a cubic
equation in s with coefficients involving a, b, and 3.
We have reduced the problem of finding a cube root of a C bi to the

problem of solving a cubic equation in s with real coefficients. If we can
solve the cubic equation for s, then we can determine y 3 , take cube roots,
find a value for y, and then a value for x. This is analogous to what hap-
pened in Exercise 4.11, where we reduced the problem of finding square
roots of a C bi to the problem of solving a quadratic equation with real co-
efficients. We could solve that equation using square roots of real numbers.
In our current situation, however, it is not clear how to proceed. Indeed,
we seem to have made a circle. We wish to compute cube roots of complex
numbers in order to solve cubic equations involving real numbers. Now we
find that computing cube roots of complex numbers leads us to the problem
of solving cubic equations with real number coefficients, and this may lead
us back to the calculation of the cube root of a complex number. We will
return to this issue in Section 5.5.
4.4 The Complex Plane

We discovered at the end of Section 4.3 that an algebraic approach to calcu-
lating cube roots of complex numbers does not seem to work, since it leads
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 85 — #101
i i
4.4. The Complex Plane 85
to the problem of finding roots of a cubic polynomial with real coefficients,

which leads back to the problem of computing cube roots of complex num-
bers. We need a new idea.
There is such an idea, one that will allow us to calculate not just cube
roots but nth roots of complex numbers for any positive integer n, provided
we supplement algebra with trigonometry. The idea depends on a geometric
interpretation of complex numbers, which we develop in this section.
A complex number a C bi is encoded by the two real numbers a and b,
its real and imaginary parts. This allows us to identify a C bi with the pair
.a; b/. But we can also regard .a; b/ as the cartesian coordinates of a point
on the plane: a, as usual, is the x-coordinate, specifying how far the point is
to the left or right of the y-axis, and b is the y-coordinate, specifying how
far the point is above orpbelow the x-axis. For pexample, we can identify the
complex number 1 C 3i with the pair .1; 3/, which we think of as the
coordinates of the point on the plane depicted in Figure 4.1.
p/3
(0, 0) (1, 0)
p
Figure 4.1. The Point 1 C 3i in the Plane
Points in the plane can also be specified by their polar coordinates. The
polar coordinates of a point p in the plane are numbers r and , with r rep-
resenting the distance from p to the origin of the plane and representing
the angle formed by the positive ray of the x-axis and the line connecting p
to the origin. The angle is measured in radians, proceeding counterclock-
wise from the x-axis to the line with p on it. Negative angles indicate that
we proceed in a clockwise direction from the x-axis.
Let’s write a pair of polar coordinates as Œr; , using the brackets to
indicate that the pair ofpnumbers is not the usual cartesian coordinates. For
example, the point .1; 3/ (in cartesian coordinates) can be written in polar
coordinates as Œ2; =3. See Figure 4.1.
Polar coordinates have some disadvantages. The principal one is that a
point p is described by infinitely many different pairs of polar coordinates.
If we move around the plane along a circle, tracing an angle of 2 , we return
to the point at which we started. Thus, in addition to Œr; , the point p also
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 86 — #102
i i
has polar coordinates Œr; C 2 . One more trip around the circle and we
return to the same point, but this time with polar coordinates Œr; C 4 .
More generally, for any integer n, the point has polar coordinates Œr; C
2n . The origin can be described in still more ways, since it has polar
coordinates Œ0; for arbitrary .
Polar coordinates have advantages as well (or else we would not intro-
duce them). One advantage is that certain figures in the plane can be de-
scribed as the graphs of equations that take on an especially simple form in
polar coordinates. For example, r D 1 is the equation in polar coordinates
of a circle of radius 1 with the origin as its center.
In cartesian coordinates, the circle is described by the equation x 2 C
2
y D 1, and we can use it to define the cosine and sine functions for ar-
bitrary real numbers . Given a point p on the circle such that the radius
from the origin to p forms an angle with the x-axis (measured counter-
clockwise from the x-axis to the radius), the x and y coordinates of p are
the cosine and sine of :
p D .cos ; sin /:
This is the key to relating cartesian and polar coordinates.
Exercise 4.15. Let r be a non-negative real number.

(i) The equation of the circle with radius r and center the origin is x 2 C
y 2 D r 2 . Check that a point q on the circle for which the radius from
the origin to q forms an angle with the x-axis (measured counter-
clockwise from the x-axis) has cartesian coordinates
.r cos ; r sin /:
(ii) Conclude that a point with cartesian coordinates .a; b/ and polar coor-
dinates Œr; satisfies
a D r cos I b D r sin :
These equations show how to recover the cartesian coordinates of a

point from its polar coordinates.
To describe the polar coordinates of a point in terms of its cartesian

coordinates, we use inverse trigonometric functions. Any one will do. Let’s
choose the inverse cosine function, arccos t.
Given a real number t between 1 and 1, there are infinitely many an-
gles for which cos D t. Thus, there are infinitely many possibilities for
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 87 — #103
i i
4.4. The Complex Plane 87
arccos t. In defining arccos t, by convention we regard as restricted to the

interval Œ0; . Within this interval, as increases from 0 to , its cosine
will decrease from 1 to 1, assuming all possible values in this range ex-
actly once. The inverse function arccos t is then defined, for t in Œ 1; 1, as
the unique angle between 0 and for which cos D t. It will decrease
from to 0 as t increases from 1 to 1. It is positive for t < 1 and zero for
t D 1.
Exercise 4.16. Let a and b be real numbers. We wish to find polar coordi-
nates Œr; for the point described in cartesian coordinates by .a; b/.
(i) If .a; b/ has polar coordinates Œr; , explain why .a; b/ has polar
coordinates Œr; .
(ii) Describe r in terms of a, b, and square roots.
(iii) Assume b 0. Describe in terms of a, b, and the inverse cosine
function.
(iv) What is if b < 0?
Exercise 4.17. Let a and b be real numbers.

(i) Using the identification of the complex number a C bi with the point
.a; b/ in the plane, show that a non-zero complex number a C bi can
be written as
r cos C .r sin /i
for some non-negative real number r and some real number .
(ii) Write the following complex numbers in this form:
(a) 1 and 1.
(b) i and i .
(c) The four complex numbers ˙1 ˙ i .
p
(d) The four complex numbers ˙1 ˙ 3i . (See Figure 4.1.)
We have found that any complex number a C bi can be written as
r cos C .r sin /i
for real numbers r and , with r and chosen to be polar coordinates of the
point with cartesian coordinates .a; b/. Exercise 4.16 shows how to express
r and explicitly in terms of a and b. We call r the length or magnitude of
the complex number a C bi and the angle of inclination of a C bi , since it
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 88 — #104
i i
represents the angle at which the line through .a; b/ and .0; 0/ inclines with
respect to the x-axis. Often, is called the argument of a C bi .
Recall that in Exercise 4.1 we proved that real numbers commute with
i under multiplication. Thus, the complex number a C bi is the same as
a C i b. Sometimes, when working with complicated expressions for the
imaginary part, the a C i b form is preferable, in that it eliminates the need
for extra parentheses. Thus, for example, we might prefer r cos C i r sin
to r cos C .r sin /i . Sometimes it’s convenient to write r cos C r i sin .
For example, we might write 2 cos.=3/ C 2i sin.=3/ rather than putting
the i before the 2 or after the sine term.
4.5 A Geometric Interpretation of

Multiplication
Having identified complex numbers with points on the plane, we will see
in this section how to interpret multiplication of complex numbers geomet-
rically. Let’s first review how to interpret multiplication of real numbers
geometrically. We identify real numbers with points on the line in the usual
way and wish to understand what multiplication by a non-zero real number
r does to the line. Begin with three special cases.
If r D 2, multiplication of a real number a on the line by 2 yields
the number 2a, which is twice as far from 0 as a is. Thus, multiplication
by 2 “expands” the line by a factor of 2. If r D 1=2, multiplication of a
by 1=2 yields the number a=2, which is half as far from 0 as a is. Thus,
multiplication by 1=2 “contracts” the line by a factor of 2. If r D 1,
multiplication of a by 1 yields the number a, which is the mirror image
of a on the opposite side of the line from the origin, 0. Thus, multiplication
by 1 “reflects” the line across 0.
In general, given a positive real number r , we can interpret multiplica-
tion by r as an expansion of the real number line if r > 1, as a contraction
if r < 1, and as leaving the line unchanged if r D 1. Multiplication by r
performs the same scale change on the line as well as reflecting it across 0.
Multiplication of complex numbers by a non-zero real number has a
similar geometric interpretation, but with the real line replaced by the plane.
We identify a complex number a C bi with the point .a; b/ on the plane.
Given a positive real number r , multiplication of the complex number aCbi
by r yields ra C r bi , which lies on the line through 0 and a C bi in the
plane but is r times as far from the origin as a C bi . Thus, multiplication by
r is an expansion of the plane if r > 1, a contraction if r < 1, and a fixing
of the points on the plane if r D 1.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 89 — #105
i i
4.5. A Geometric Interpretation of Multiplication 89
Let’s see what multiplication by 1 does to the plane. Suppose Œs; are
polar coordinates for the point .a; b/, so that
a C bi D s cos C si sin :
Using the trigonometric identities cos. C / D cos and sin. C / D

sin , we obtain
.a C bi / D s cos. C / C si sin. C /:
Thus, multiplication by 1 leaves the length of each point in the plane un-
changed and adds to its angle of inclination. This results in a rotation of
the plane around the origin by , or 180ı. Given a positive real number r ,
it follows that multiplication by r is an expansion or contraction of the
plane followed by a 180ı rotation.
We wish to extend this analysis to obtain a geometric description of
multiplication of complex numbers by an arbitrary complex number. The
essential case to handle is that of multiplication by i , the most basic of
non-real complex numbers. First we check that multiplication of complex
numbers satisfies the associative law.
Exercise 4.18. Verify that multiplication of complex numbers is associa-

tive; that is, given complex numbers p, q, and r , verify that
.pq/r D p.qr /:
To do this, introduce real numbers a, b, c, d , e, and f with p D a C bi ,

q D cCd i , and r D eCf i , then carry out the multiplications and compare,
using the associative law for multiplication of real numbers. (The fact that
multiplication of real numbers is associative requires proof, but we will take
it as a known property of the reals.)
Thanks to associativity, whatever action multiplication by i performs on

the plane, performing it twice must produce the same action as multiplica-
tion by i 2 . The action of i on a complex number p followed by a second
action of i yields i .i p/, whereas the action of i 2 on p is given by .i 2 / p,
and they are equal. But i 2 D 1 and we just saw that multiplication by
1 is a 180ı rotation. Thus, performing the action of i twice in succession
produces a 180ı rotation. This suggests a candidate for the action of multi-
plication by i on the complex plane: rotation by 90ı . There are two choices,
rotation clockwise and rotation counterclockwise. That’s good, since there
are two square roots of 1, the imaginary numbers i and i . We might
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 90 — #106
i i
imagine that one rotation corresponds to multiplication by i , the other to

multiplication by i . Let’s sort this out in the next exercise.
Exercise 4.19. Let’s identify a complex number a C bi with the point

.a; b/ on the plane and let Œs; be its polar coordinates.
(i) Using polar coordinates and the trigonometric identities
cos. C =2/ D sin ; sin. C =2/ D cos ;
verify that
i.a C bi / D i.s cos C i s sin /

D s sin C i s cos
D s cos. C =2/ C i s sin. C =2/:
(ii) Conclude that multiplication by i rotates the complex plane counter-

clockwise 90ı.
(iii) Similarly, verify that
i.a C bi / D i.s cos C i s sin /

D s sin i s cos
D s cos. =2/ C i s sin. =2/
and conclude that multiplication by i rotates the complex plane clock-

wise by 90ı (or counterclockwise by 270ı).
We introduced complex numbers as formal entities in order to deal with

the lack of a square root of 1, declaring i to be such a square root. Addi-
tional numbers were introduced so the ordinary rules of addition and mul-
tiplication hold, thereby bringing the complex numbers into existence. No
concrete meaning was attached to i . It was indeed imaginary. Now, how-
ever, having identified complex numbers with points on the plane and mul-
tiplication by non-zero real numbers with geometric actions on the plane,
we have found a meaning for i . No longer imaginary, it is revealed to be
the number that, when used to multiply other complex numbers, produces a
counterclockwise rotation by 90ı .
To complete our picture, we next need to extend our interpretation of
multiplication by i (and i / to multiplication by any complex numbers of
length 1. Geometrically, these are the numbers that lie on the unit circle
centered at the origin. The angle of inclination of i is 90ı and the angle
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 91 — #107
i i
4.5. A Geometric Interpretation of Multiplication 91
of inclination of i is 270ı . We have seen that multiplication by i and i

produces rotations of exactly those angles. It is not difficult to guess the
general result.
Theorem 4.8. Let u be a complex number with length 1 and angle of incli-
nation , so that
u D cos C i sin :
Let v be a complex number with length s and angle of inclination , so that
v D s cos C si sin :
Then the product uv has length s and angle of inclination C :
uv D s cos. C / C si sin. C /:
Thus, multiplication by u effects a rotation of the complex plane counter-
clockwise through the angle .
Theorem 4.8 will follow from the standard trigonometric identities for
the sine and cosine of the sum of two angles. These are sufficiently impor-
tant that we should record them.
Theorem 4.9. Let and be two real numbers. Then
sin. C / D sin cos C cos sin
and
cos. C / D cos cos sin sin :
We should also take a moment to review how Theorem 4.9 is proved, to
ensure that we avoid any circularity in our reasoning. Some books provide
a proof of Theorem 4.9 as a consequence of de Moivre’s formula, which
we will prove in Section 4.6 as a consequence of Theorem 4.9. This is the
circularity we wish to avoid.
Fortunately, there are many other ways to prove Theorem 4.9. See Chap-
ter 6 of Eli Maor’s Trigonometric Delights [40, pp. 87–94] for one based
on the classical result of plane geometry known as Ptolemy’s theorem.
This states, for a quadrilateral inscribed in a circle, that the product of the
lengths of the quadrilateral’s two diagonals equals the sum of the products
of lengths of the two pairs of opposite sides. (Ptolemy is the great Alexan-
drian astronomer and mathematician of the second century C.E.)
Exercise 4.20. Use Theorem 4.9 to show that

.cos C i sin / .cos C i sin / D cos. C / C i sin. C /:
Deduce that Theorem 4.8 holds.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 92 — #108
i i
Let’s do some calculations to illustrate Theorem 4.8.
Exercise 4.21. Compute the product of each pair of numbers:

(i) cos.=2/ C i sin.=2/ and cos.3=2/ C i sin.3=2/.
(ii) cos.=4/ C i sin.=4/ and cos.=4/ C i sin.=4/.
(iii) cos.=6/ C i sin.=6/ and cos.=3/ C i sin.=3/.
(iv) cos.=18/ C i sin.=18/ and cos.=5/ C i sin.=5/.
For the first three examples, rewrite the numbers in more familiar terms,
using the explicit values of the trigonometric functions.
We conclude the sequence of ideas in this section with a description of

the product of two complex numbers.
Exercise 4.22. Suppose we are given a complex number u with length r

and angle of inclination and a complex number v with length s and angle
of inclination . Thus
u D r cos C r i sin
and
v D s cos C si sin :
Show that
.r cos C r i sin / .s cos C si sin / D r s cos. C / C r s i sin. C /:
Reinterpret this to say that the product uv is the complex number whose
length is the product r s of the lengths r and s of u and v and whose angle
of inclination C is the sum of the angles of inclination and of u
and v.
We have found that multiplying two complex numbers amounts, geo-

metrically, to multiplying their lengths and adding their angles of inclina-
tion.
4.6 Euler’s and de Moivre’s Formulas

Our motivation in studying complex numbers is our desire to compute their
cube roots. The result that will allow us to do this—de Moivre’s formula—
provides at the same time a procedure for computing nth roots for any pos-
itive integer n. (The formula’s name honors Abraham de Moivre (1667–
1754), a French mathematician who spent much of his life in England.)
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 93 — #109
i i
4.6. Euler’s and de Moivre’s Formulas 93
Thus, we may as well consider the general case. However, we will lay out
the issues in such a way that the reader can ignore the general case and
focus on the cases n D 2 and n D 3.
One way to derive de Moivre’s formula is to use trigonometry and Theo-
rem 4.9. We will take this approach in a moment. But first let’s see how eas-
ily it follows from Euler’s formula, a result due to Leonhard Euler (1707–
1783), the greatest mathematician of the eighteenth century.
Euler’s formula involves the number e, whose central role in mathemat-
ics Euler first discovered and whose notation he introduced. Readers who
have studied calculus will be familiar with it as the number most naturally
used for exponentiation. What makes it so natural is that the exponential
function e x with base e is its own derivative, in contrast to other expo-
nential functions such as 2x and 10x . Another attractive feature is that its
inverse function loge x is the antiderivative of 1=x. For readers unfamiliar
with e, suffice to say that it is an irrational number with decimal expansion
that begins 2:71828 and that for theoretical reasons it is the best base for
studying exponentiation.
Euler’s formula relates exponential and trigonometric functions:
Theorem 4.10 (Euler’s formula). Let be a real number. Then
e i D cos C i sin :
At first glance, the formula may appear both mysterious and wondrous.
For those readers familiar with power series expansions of functions, the
mystery is easily addressed, but the wonder remains.
In a calculus course, it is shown that the sine and cosine functions have
power series expansions
x2 x4 x6
cos x D 1 C C
2Š 4Š 6Š
and
x3 x5 x7
sin x D x C C ;
3Š 5Š 7Š
and the exponential function satisfies
x x2 x3 x4 x5
ex D 1 C C C C C C :
1Š 2Š 3Š 4Š 5Š
The expansions are valid for any real number x.
Once complex numbers are introduced, it is not a large leap to replace
real numbers in the power series expansion of e x with pure imaginary num-
bers. Suppose for instance that is a real number and let x D i. If we
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 94 — #110
i i
substitute i for x in the power series expansion of e x and use the equali-
ties i 2 D 1, i 3 D i , and i 4 D 1, we find that
2 3 4 5
e i D 1 C i i C Ci C :
2Š 3Š 4Š 5Š
Collecting real and imaginary terms on the right side of this equation, we
obtain cos C i sin , yielding Euler’s formula. That’s all there is to it.
Given a real number and a positive integer n, the rules of exponentia-
tion yield
.e i /n D e i n :
Reinterpreting the left and right sides of this equation via Euler’s formula,
we see that
.cos C i sin /n D cos n C i sin n:
This is de Moivre’s formula:
Theorem 4.11 (de Moivre’s formula). Let n be a positive integer and a

real number. Then
In words, de Moivre’s formula says that the nth power of a complex

number of length 1 is the number obtained by multiplying the original num-
ber’s angle of inclination by n. In particular, squaring amounts to doubling
the angle and cubing amounts to tripling the angle.
We were led to de Moivre’s formula from Euler’s formula, but the proof
of Euler’s formula requires ideas from calculus. An alternative, more ele-
mentary proof of de Moivre’s formula is desirable. As de Moivre under-
stood, the underlying issue is one of trigonometry. The proof sketched in
Exercise 4.23 uses the classical angle sum formulas of Theorem 4.9 (and an
implicit induction argument). The cases n D 2 and n D 3, which are all we
need, are treated separately before we handle the general case.
Exercise 4.23. Prove de Moivre’s formula.

(i) The formula holds trivially for n D 1.
(ii) Square cos Ci sin , combine real and imaginary terms, and use The-
orem 4.9 to show that
.cos C r i sin /2 D cos 2 C i sin 2:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 95 — #111
i i
(iii) Multiply both sides of the last equality by cos C i sin and use The-
orem 4.9 to show that
.cos C r i sin /3 D cos 3 C i sin 3:
(iv) We can continue this process step by step to obtain the general result.
Suppose k is a positive integer less than n and we know that
.cos C i sin /k D cos k C i sin k:
Multiply both sides of this equality by cos C i sin and use Theorem
4.9 to deduce that
.cos C i sin /kC1 D cos.k C 1/ C i sin.k C 1/:
(v) Deduce that we can make this argument n 1 times successively to

obtain the formula for k D 2, then k D 3, then k D 4, and so on, until
we obtain the formula for k D n.
Exercise 4.24. Let’s do some computations using de Moivre’s formula.

(i) Compute
.cos.=4/ C i sin.=4//n
for n D 2, 3, 4, and 8, thus finding
p p !n
2 2
C i
2 2
for these values of n.

(ii) Compute
p !n
1 3
C i
2 2
for n D 2, 3, and 6.
Exercise 4.25. As a minor extension of de Moivre’s formula, prove Theo-

rem 4.12, which describes the nth power of a non-zero complex number.
Theorem 4.12. Let n be a positive integer, r a positive real number, and

a real number. Then
.r cos C r i sin /n D r n cos n C r n i sin n:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 96 — #112
i i
De Moivre’s formula and Theorem 4.12 allow us to compute nth powers

of complex numbers instantly, once the numbers are expressed in the form
r cos C r i sin . They also reveal how to calculate nth roots: we do the
reverse, calculating the real nth root of the length of a complex number and
dividing the angle of inclination by n.
The procedure has the drawback that it is not purely algebraic. It re-
quires trigonometry to determine the angle of inclination of a given com-
plex number and trigonometry again, once nth roots have been taken, to
calculate the real and imaginary parts.
Let’s work through the details, dealing first with square roots and cube
roots. We already found how to compute the two square roots of a non-
zero complex number in Exercise 4.11, using algebra, but now we’ll use the
trigonometric approach.
Exercise 4.26. Suppose we wish to compute the square root of a non-zero

complex number c. Write c as
r cos C r i sin
p
for some positive real number r and some real . Write r for the positive
real square root of r .
(i) Using Theorem 4.12, verify that the two complex numbers
p p
r cos C r i sin
2 2
and
p p
r cos. C / C r i sin. C /
2 2
are square roots of c.
(ii) Check that each is the opposite of the other, as we would expect.
(iii) Use the formula to compute square roots of
(a) 4 and 4.
(b) i and i .
(c) 1 C i and 1 C i .
Next let’s find cube roots.
Exercise 4.27. Suppose c is a non-zero complex number. Write it as
r cos C r i sin
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 97 — #113
i i
for some positive real number r and some real .

p
3
(i) Recall that r has a unique real cube root. Write it as r.
(ii) Using Theorem 4.12, show that
p
3 p
r cos C 3 r i sin
3 3
is a cube root of c, as are
p
3
2 p 2
r cos. C / C 3 r i sin. C /
3 3 3 3
and
p
3 4 p 4
r cos. C / C 3 r i sin. C /:
3 3 3 3
(iii) As in Exercise 3.15, let
p
1 3
!D C :
2 2
Show, using the formulas, that the three cube roots of 1 are 1, !, and
! 2 . (Hint: First express 1 as cos 0 C i sin 0.)
(iv) Suppose d is one of the cube roots of c. Verify that the other two are
!d and ! 2 d .
(v) Suppose c is a non-zero real number, with real cube root d . Conclude
that c has one real cube root, d , and two non-real cube roots, !d and
!2 d .
We can use Exercise 4.27 to redo some cube root calculations that we
made earlier when we used Cardano’s formula, as illustrated next.
Exercise 4.28. In Exercise 3.13, we found a cube root of

10 p
3C 3
9
and a cube root of
10 p
3 3:
9
Let’s now find all three cube roots.
(i) Use the method
p of Exercise 4.27 and a calculator to find a cube root
of 3 C 10 3=9. Then use Exercise 4.27 to find its other two cube
roots.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 98 — #114
i i
p
(ii) In the same way, find the three cube roots of 3 10 3=9.
(iii) Alternatively, use Theorem 4.1 to find its three cube roots.
(iv) Compare the results to those arising from the calculation of cube roots
in Exercise 3.13.
We have focused so far on finding square and cube roots of a non-zero

complex number, but the same approach allows us to find nth roots for any
positive integer n. As a consequence of Theorem 1.12, any positive real
p
number has a unique positive real nth root, which we write n r. Here is the
general result:
Theorem 4.13. Let r be a positive real number. The complex number

r cos C r i sin
has n distinct nth roots, given by
p p

n 2j 2j
r cos C C n r i sin C
n n n n
as j D 0; 1; : : : ; n 1.
Exercise 4.29. Prove Theorem 4.13:

(i) Verify that the n quantities are distinct.
(ii) Verify that they are nth roots.
4.7 Roots of Unity

The only result from this section that we will use later is Theorem 4.16,
which can be proved by direct calculation. Thus, the reader may wish to
go straight to Theorem 4.16, and its proof, and move ahead. However, a
natural generalization of Theorem 4.16 is easy to obtain, and it enhances
our understanding of nth roots.
A complex number that has an nth power equal to 1, where n is a
positive integer, is called a root of unity. Thanks to Theorem 4.13 (or de
Moivre’s formula), we have identified them all.
Theorem 4.14. The n distinct nth roots of unity are

2j 2j
cos C i sin ;
n n
as j D 0; 1; : : : ; n 1.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 99 — #115
i i
4.7. Roots of Unity 99
Exercise 4.31. For small n, we can write down the nth roots of unity as
ordinary complex numbers, without trigonometric functions in their expres-
sions. We have already done so in several cases. Let’s review and extend
what we know. Describe without cosines and sines the two square roots of
1, the three cube roots of 1, the four fourth roots of 1, the six sixth roots of
1, and the eight eighth roots of 1.
The two square roots of 1 are the powers of 1, the three cube roots of
1 are the powers of the number we have called !, and the four fourth roots
of 1 are the powers of i . For an arbitrary positive integer n, let n be the
number
2 2
cos C i sin :
n n
Here, is the Greek letter zeta. Notice that 2 is 1 and 3 is !, while 4 is
i.
We learn different parts of Theorem 4.15 early in our mathematical ed-
ucation. One might not think to state it as a theorem, but it provides the
template for the results that follow.
Theorem 4.15. Let 2 be the number cos.2=2/ C i sin.2=2/. For sim-

plicity, write 2 in its more familiar form as 1.
(i) The two distinct square roots of 1 are 1 and 1, with . 1/2 D 1.
(ii) 1 C . 1/ D 0.
(iii) x 2 1 D .x 1/.x . 1//.
(iv) A2 B 2 D .A B/.A . 1/B/.
Theorem 4.15 has an analogue for any integer n > 2, with 1 and 1
replaced by the nth roots of unity. We will need the appropriate analogue
for n D 3 in Section 5.3.

plicity, write 3 in its more familiar form as !.
(i) The three distinct cube roots of 1 are 1, !, and ! 2 , with ! 3 D 1.
(ii) 1 C ! C ! 2 D 0.
(iii) x 3 1 D .x 1/.x !/.x ! 2 /.
(iv) A3 B 3 D .A B/.A !B/.A ! 2 B/.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 100 — #116
i i
Exercise 4.32. Prove Theorem 4.16. The first part has already been shown
in Exercise 3.15 (or Exercise 4.31). Verify the second part by direct calcu-
lation, and use it to prove the third and fourth parts.
The analogous result for n D 4 is even easier to prove.

plicity, write 4 in its more familiar form as i .
(i) The four distinct fourth roots of 1 are 1, i , i 2 , and i 3 , with i 4 D 1.
(ii) 1 C i C i 2 C i 3 D 0.
(iii) x 4 1 D .x 1/.x i /.x i 2 /.x i 3 / D .x 1/.x C1/.x i /.x Ci /.
(iv) A4 B 4 D .A B/.A iB/.A i 2 B/.A i 3 B/

D .A B/.A C B/.A iB/.A C iB/.
Here is the theorem that generalizes Theorems 4.15, 4.16, and 4.17:
Theorem 4.18. Let n be a positive integer and let n be the number cos.2=n/C
i sin.2=n/.
(i) The n distinct nth roots of unity are 1; n ; n2 ; : : : ; nn 1
, with .n /n D
1.
(ii) 1 C n C n2 C C nn 2

C nn 1
D 0.
(iii) x n 1 D .x 1/.x n /.x n2 / .x nn 1

/.
(iv) An B n D .A B/.A n B/.A n2 B/ .A nn 1

B/.

(i) Use Theorem 4.14 and de Moivre’s formula to obtain the first part.
(ii) For the second part, verify that x n 1 factors as
xn 1 D .x 1/.x n 1
C xn 2
C C x 2 C x C 1/:
Then substitute n for x and use the fact that n ¤ 1 to deduce the
desired result.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 101 — #117
i i
4.8. Converting Root Extraction to Division 101
(iii) The proof of Theorem 1.5 works just as well for complex roots of a
polynomial as for real roots. Deduce that Theorem 1.5 can be applied
to show that
.x 1/.x n /.x n2 / .x nn 1

/
divides x n 1. Compare degrees and deduce that x n 1 must be a

constant multiple of the product. Then compare the coefficients of x n
and deduce that equality holds.
(iv) Deduce the fourth part from the third using the substitution x D A=B.
4.8 Converting Root Extraction to Division

Throughout our discussion of the quadratic formula and Cardano’s formula,
we have emphasized that the role of algebra is to reduce the problem of
solving quadratic and cubic equations to that of calculating square and cube
roots, but that algebra does not provide us with the means to make the root
calculations. Let’s discuss how we can in principle make the calculations
(and more generally nth root calculations) through the use of exponential
and trigonometric functions and their inverses. We will once again assume
familiarity with the exponential function e x , where the base e is Euler’s
number, which we met in Section 4.6. We will also use the inverse function
loge .x/, the natural logarithm function, which we’ll write as log.x/.
Exercise 4.35. Let r be a positive real number and n a positive integer.

Suppose we wish to calculate the real nth root of r .
(i) Set c D r 1=n , the real nth root. Apply log.x/ to both sides to obtain
log.c/ D log.r /=n:
(ii) Exponentiate both sides to obtain
c D e log.c/ D e log.r /=n:
(iii) Rewrite this as

r 1=n D e log.r /=n:
(iv) Conclude that this reduces the problem of calculating nth roots of posi-
tive real numbers to that of computing certain values of the exponential
and logarithm functions and dividing by n.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 102 — #118
i i
The lesson of Exercise 4.35 is that applying the logarithm converts ex-
traction of an nth root of a real number to division by n.
Exercise 4.36. Let a and b be real numbers satisfying a2 C b 2 D 1 and let

n be a positive integer. Suppose we wish to calculate an nth root of a C bi .
For simplicity in the trigonometric considerations to follow, assume that
b 0. Then a C bi can be written as cos C i sin for an angle given by
D arccos a:
(i) Use Theorem 4.13 to deduce that one nth root of cos C i sin is
cos.=n/ C i sin.=n/:
(ii) By substitution, conclude that one nth root of a C bi is given by
cos..arccos a/=n/ C i sin..arccos a/=n/:
(iii) We may rewrite this in another way. The sine and cosine functions
satisfy
sin x D cos.x =2/:
Rewrite the expression for an nth root of a C bi as
cos..arccos a/=n/ C i cos..arccos a/=n =2/:
(iv) Conclude that this reduces the problem of calculating nth roots of com-
plex numbers of length 1 to that of computing certain values of the
inverse cosine and cosine functions and dividing by n.
A non-zero complex number aCbi can be written in the form r .cos C

i sin / for a positive real number r and a real number . Exercises 4.35 and
4.36 give us procedures for computing the nth roots of r and cos C i sin ,
allowing us to compute an nth root of a C bi .
The calculational methods of the last two exercises have a common fea-
ture. In each nth root calculation, we make use of a familiar function f .x/
and its inverse f 1 .x/, applying f 1 to a real number c, dividing what
we obtain by n, then calculating f on the result. Both times, this process
converts nth root extraction to division by n. The cost of this simplification
is the requirement that we have the means to compute f 1 and f on given
real numbers.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 103 — #119
i i
4.9. History 103
4.9 History
Complex numbers are so widely used that it can be difficult to understand
why their acceptance took centuries, stretching from their appearance in
Cardano’s Ars Magna [12] in 1545 to the development of the subject now
called complex analysis in the late nineteenth century. Two entertaining
accounts of the intellectual challenge complexp numbers posed are Paul J.
Nahin’s An Imaginary Tale: The Story of 1 [43] and Barry Mazur’s
Imagining Numbers (Particularly the Square Root of Minus Fifteen) [41].
They serve as natural complements to each other, with rich historical dis-
cussions that are especially worth reading. In this section, we will touch on
just a few historical highlights.
Let’s begin with de Moivre’s formula. It does not appear that de Moivre
wrote the formula down explicitly, but he surely knew it. Or at least he
understood that taking nth roots of complex numbers produces formulas
similar to trigonometric formulas for sines and cosines, allowing him to
relate taking nth roots with dividing angles by n. For instance, in a 1707
note with the title “The analytic solution of certain equations of the third,
fifth, seventh, ninth and other higher uneven powers, by rules similar to
those called Cardan’s,” he writes [16], [60, pp. 443–444]:
If the equation were
61
5y 20y 3 C 16y 5 D ;
64
yD
s r s r
1 5 61 375 1 5 61 375
C C :
2 64 4096 2 64 4096
And if by any means the fifth root of the binomial can be extracted the
root will come out true and possible, although the expression seems to
include an impossibility. Now the fifth root of the binomial
r
61 375
C
64 4096
is
1 1p
C 15;
4 4
and of the binomial r
61 375
64 4096
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 104 — #120
i i
is
1 1p
15
4 4
whose semi-sum 1=4 D y. But if the extraction cannot be performed,
or should seem too difficult, the thing may always be effected by a
table of natural sines in the following manner.
To the radius 1 let a D 61=64 D 0:95112 be the sine of a certain
arc which therefore will be 72ı 230 , the fifth part of which (because
n D 5) is 14ı 280 ; the sine of this is 0:24981; near ly D 1=4. So also
for equations of higher degree.
p
De Moivre recognizes that .61=64/C i 375=4096 has the form sin C
i cos for a suitable , and adding the fifth roots of this number and its
conjugate amounts to computing the sine of =5. As Mazur comments ([41,
p. 199]), “Although there were earlier hints of the link between the solu-
tion of polynomial equations and trigonometry, we know that Abraham De
Moivre, by 1707, had perceived the analogy between the geometric prob-
lem of cutting an arc of a circle into n equal parts and taking the nth root of
a complex number.”
In 1748, Leonhard Euler stated de Moivre’s formula in its standard
form, deriving it using the angle-sum formulas for sine and cosine. Here
is the start of his discussion:
Since .sin z/2 C .cos z/2 D 1, on decomposing into factors we get
.cos z C i sin z/.cos z i sin z/ D 1:
These factors, although imaginary, are of great use in the combination

and multiplication of arcs. For example, let us seek the product of these
factors.
Euler then continues in a familiar way to find the square, the cube, and the
nth power of cos z ˙ i sin z.
Euler made many contributions to the understanding of complex num-
bers, including his famous formula relating the exponential, cosine, and
sine functions. Beyond the results themselves, he played an essential role
in bringing about the acceptance of their use. For example, in his 1770 text
Elements of Algebra [26], Euler introduces complex numbers early, in Chap-
ter XIII of Section 1, where he writes [26, pp. 42–43]:
When it is required, therefore, to extract the root of a negative number,
a great difficulty arises; since there is no assignable number, the square
of which would be a negative quantity. : : : it is evident that we cannot
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 105 — #121
i i
4.9. History 105
rank the square root of a negative number amongst the possible num-
bers, and we must therefore say that it is an impossible quantity. In this
manner we are led to the idea of numbers, which from their nature are
impossible; and therefore they are usually called imaginary quantities,
because they exist merely in the imagination. : : : But notwithstanding
this, these numbers present themselves to the mind; they exist in our
imagination, and we still have a sufficient idea of them; : : : for this
reason also, nothing prevents us from making use of these imaginary
numbers, and employing them in calculation.
Elements of Algebra would become an influential text. A translation
from German to French was prepared by Johann III Bernoulli, with about
one hundred pages of additions by Joseph-Louis Lagrange. An English
translation of the French edition was begun by Francis Horner, who also
wrote a short biography of Euler, and completed by Reverend John Hewlett.
The 1840 edition of the English translation containing Bernoulli’s notes,
Lagrange’s additions, and Horner’s biography remains available thanks to
Springer-Verlag.
A good account of Euler’s work on complex numbers can be found in
Chapter 5 of William Dunham’s Euler: The Master of Us All [23]. Dunham
concludes it with the observation [23, pp. 101–102] that “complex numbers
were here to stay. A concept only dimly understood for its role in solving
cubic equations had been legitimized by the discoveries and influence of
Leonhard Euler. Without apology or embarrassment, he treated these num-
bers as equal players on the mathematical stage and showed how to take
their roots, logs, sines, and cosines.”
As the eighteenth century gave way to the nineteenth, the geometric
description of complex numbers presented in Sections 4.4 and 4.5 first ap-
peared. How it did is a fascinating story, well told in the books of Nahin
[43] and Mazur [41]. We will provide a brief sketch. But first we should
note that an earlier effort to describe pure imaginary numbers as points on
the plane that lie off the real number line appears in a 1685 work on algebra
[69] by the English mathematician John Wallis (1616–1703). His approach
was inconclusive. We will return to some of the material in Wallis’s book in
Section 5.8.
The first person to describe complex numbers geometrically in the way
we now understand was the Norwegian Caspar Wessel (1745–1818). He
presented a paper to the Royal Danish Academy of Sciences in 1797 that
was published in Danish two years later in the Academy’s Memoires [70].
Wessel recognized that in multiplying two complex numbers, one adds their
angles of inclination. It appears, however, that Wessel’s work went unno-
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 106 — #122
i i
ticed for nearly a century, until it was rediscovered in 1895 [43, pp. 48–49,
243].
In 1806, the Swiss-born Jean-Robert Argand (1768–1822) published a
pamphlet, Essay on the Geometrical Interpretation of Imaginary Quanti-
ties, in which he also identified complex numbers with points on the plane.
(We will quote from A.S. Hardy’s 1881 translation [4].) Before tackling
complex numbers, Argand reviews the one-time challenge of making sense
of negative numbers [4, pp. 17–22], concluding that
the difficulty of the subject will not be questioned if we remember
that the exact sciences had been cultivated for many centuries, and had
made great progress before either a true conception of negative quan-
tities was reached or a general method for their use had been devised.
The notion of a negative number, Argand explains, might seem imaginary,
but when we compare two quantities, we consider not just the ratio of their
absolute values, but also “a relation of direction, or of the sense in which
they are estimated, a relation either of identity or opposition.”
Next Argand poses the problem [4, p. 23] of finding “the geometric
mean between two quantities of different signs, that is, to find the value of
x in the proportion C1 W x WW x W 1.” In effect, he asks for a a value of x
satisfying 1=x D x=. 1/, or x 2 D 1.
Here we encounter a difficulty . . . ; but, as before, the quantity which
was imaginary, when applied to certain magnitudes, became real when
to the idea of absolute number we added that of direction, may it not
be possible to treat this quantity, which is regarded imaginary, because
we cannot assign it a place in the scale of positive and negative quan-
tities, with the same success? On reflection this has seemed possible,
provided we can devise a kind of quantity to which we may apply the
idea of direction, so that having chosen two opposite directions, one
for positive and one for negative values, there shall exist a third —
such that the positive direction shall stand in the same relation to it
that the latter does to the negative.
Having opened the door to additional directions, Argand explains that
the quantity x which is to be the geometric mean of 1 and 1 should be
perpendicular to the line containing them. This yields two choices, which
are “related to each other
p as C1 and p 1. They are, therefore, what is ordi-
narily expressed by C 1 and 1.” So begins Argand’s identification
of complex numbers with points on the plane.
Argand’s work was ignored initially. Guillaume-Jules Hoüel tells the
story in his preface to the 1876 reprint of Argand’s book [4, pp. iii–xvi]. (See
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 107 — #123
i i
4.9. History 107
also [43, pp. 73–74].) Argand was living in Paris at the time, and he sent a
copy to the great French mathematician Adrien-Marie Legendre. Without
mentioning Argand’s name, Legendre described Argand’s ideas in a letter
to François Français, a professor of mathematics. On François’s death in
1810, his younger brother Jacques inherited his papers. Jacques published
an article in 1813 in the Annales de Mathématiques describing Argand’s
ideas as well as Legendre’s letter, and asked who the unknown author of the
pamphlet might be. Argand saw Français’s article and identified himself,
receiving full credit from Français.
Carl Friedrich Gauss (1777–1855), the greatest mathematician of the
era, had come up with the same ideas, perhaps even earlier than Wessel. He
chose not to publish his work until 1831, yet he came to share naming rights
with Argand. The plane, when its points are identified with complex num-
bers, has come to be called the Gaussian plane, Argand plane, or Argand
diagram.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 108 — #124
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 109 — #125
i i
5
Cubic Polynomials, II
We derived Cardano’s formula for roots of reduced cubic polynomials in

Section 3.2, only to discover that using it may require us to compute cube
roots of complex numbers. This phenomenon arose in Exercise 3.12, when
we tried to solve the cubic equation y 3 7y C 6 D 0. Our study of the dis-
criminant in Section 3.4 revealed that this difficulty will occur whenever we
work with a cubic whose roots are real and distinct. With that, we brought
Chapter 3 to a close and turned to a study of complex numbers in Chapter 4.
Now that we have learned how to use trigonometry to compute cube roots
of complex numbers, we are ready for a more systematic treatment of cubic
polynomials.
5.1 Cardano’s formula

Given real numbers p and q, Cardano’s formula for a root of the reduced
cubic polynomial y 3 C py C q takes the form
s r s r
3 q p3 q2 3 q p3 q2
yD C C C C :
2 27 4 2 27 4
Our derivation of the formula in Exercise 3.7 lacked precision, first because
we didn’t yet know how to interpret the expressions within the cube root
signs if p 3 =27 C q 2 =4 < 0 and second because we didn’t yet understand
that there are three possibilities for each cube root. We can proceed now
with confidence. p
Let us once again write R for p 3 =27 C q 2=4 and ! for 1=2 C 3=2,
which is a cube root of 1. We learned in Exercise 4.27 how to compute cube
109
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 110 — #126
i i
110 5. Cubic Polynomials, II
p
roots of q=2 C R. Let A be one of them. Then p the other two are !A and
2
! A. Similarly, if B is a cube root of q=2 R, then the other two are
!B and ! 2 B. In the next exercise, we determine which cube roots to add
together in order to obtain roots of y 3 C py C q.
Exercise 5.1. Let p and q be real numbers with p ¤ 0. (We can handle
the p D 0 case directly.) Since any non-zero number has three distinct
cube roots, each summand on the right side of Cardano’s formula has three
possible values.
p
(i) Check,
p as in Exercise 3.7, that the product of q=2 C R and q=2
R is p 3=27.
(ii) The derivation inpExercise 3.7 showed

p that for the sum of the cube
roots of q=2 C R and q=2 R to be a root of y 3 C py C q, the
two cube roots must be chosen so thatptheir product is p=3. Select
one of the three cube roots of q=2 C R—any one, it doesn’t matter
which—and call it A.
(iii) Although A is chosen arbitrarily,

p we will exercise care in choosing a
cube root B of q=2 R so that A C B is a root of y 3 C py C q.
We have three choices for it. We will want to choose a specific one,
given the choice of A. For now, let us choose one arbitrarily and call it
B. The other two are !B and ! 2 B.
(iv) Check that A3 B3 D p 3 =27 and deduce that AB equals one of the
numbers p=3, !p=3, and ! 2 p=3.
(v) If AB D p=3, set B D B. If AB D !p=3, set B D ! 2 B; and if

AB D ! 2 p=3, set B D !B. Verify in all cases that AB D p=3.
(vi) Show, with A and B chosen the numbers !A and ! 2 B

pin this way, that p
are cube roots of q=2 C R and q=2 R with the property that
2
their product equals p=3.pShow also that the p numbers ! A and !B
are cube roots of q=2 C R and q=2 R with the property that
their product equals p=3.
p
(vii) Concludep that if A and B are chosen as cube roots of q=2 C3 R and
q=2 R satisfying AB D p=3, then the three roots of y CpyCq
have the form
r1 D A C BI r2 D !A C ! 2 BI r3 D ! 2 A C !B:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 111 — #127
i i
5.1. Cardano’s formula 111
Exercise 5.1 removes the imprecision that was present in our earlier
derivation of Cardano’s formula. We can summarize what we have found in
a theorem.
Theorem 5.1 (Cardano’s formula). Suppose p and q are real numbers, with
p ¤ 0. Let A be a cube root of
r
q p3 q2
C C
2 27 4
and let B be the unique cube root of
r
q p3 q2
C
2 27 4
p
satisfying AB D p=3. Let ! be the cube root 1=2 C 3=2 of 1. Then
the three roots of the polynomial y 3 C py C q are
A C B; !A C ! 2 B; ! 2 A C !B:
Exercise 5.2. Use Cardano’s formula, as clarified in Theorem 5.1, to solve

the cubic equation
y 3 C 6y 20 D 0
that we first studied in Exercises 3.9 and 3.10. There’s no need to redo work
already done. Use the result of Exercise 3.10 to write a cube root for each
term in the formula. Then use what we have learned since then to write two
more cube roots for each term, pair them correctly, and take their sums to
find the three solutions to the equation. One solution is real and two are not.
Given a cubicp polynomial y 3 Cppy C q for which R is negative, the

numbers q=2 C R and q=2 R will not be real, and the calculation
of the roots given by Cardano’s formula requires us to compute cube roots
of non-real numbers.
Exercise 5.3. Use Cardano’s formula to solve the cubic equation
y3 7y C 6 D 0
that we first studied in Exercise 3.13.

(i) Write the solution given by the formula as a sum of cube roots. It
involves the cube roots of
10 p
3C 3
9
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 112 — #128
i i
and
10 p
3 3:
9
(ii) Using thepnumbers ! and ! 2 and the determination of one cube root of
3 C 109 3 in Exercise 3.13 or Exercise 4.28, write expressions
p for
the three complex numbers that are cube roots of 3 C 10 9
3.
p Write
also the three complex numbers that are cube roots of 3 10 9
3.
10
p 10
p
(iii) Pair the cube roots of 3 C 9 3 and 3 9
3 as specified in
Theorem 5.1 to get three pairs such that the product of the complex
numbers in each pair equals 7/3.
(iv) Add the complex numbers in each pair to obtain all three real solutions
of y 3 7y C 6 D 0.
When making calculations

p of cube roots of complex numbers, ! can be
written as 1=2 C 3=2 or as cos 120ı C i sin 120ı , depending on the
form used for complex numbers, and similarly for ! 2 . It may be convenient,
given angles and that add up to 360ı, to view not as 360ı but as
, keeping in mind that cos.360ı / D cos. / D cos and sin.360ı
/ D sin. / D sin .
Exercise 5.4. Solve the cubic equation
y3 3y C 1 D 0:
(i) Using Cardano’s formula, show that the solutions have the form
s p s p
3 1 3 3 1 3
C i C i:
2 2 2 2
(ii) The numbers inside the cube roots signs are our familiar friends ! and
! 2 , the non-real cube roots of 1. Thus, the solution can be rewritten as
p p3
y D 3 ! C !2 :
(iii) Find three cube roots of ! and three cube roots of ! 2 , expressed in
terms of the cosine and sine of suitable angles.
(iv) Form pairs of cube roots in accordance with Exercise 5.1 and add them,
taking into account the advice that preceded this exercise.
(v) The three solutions to y 3 3y C 1 D 0 have the form 2 cos , for three
particular angles . What are they?
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 113 — #129
i i
5.2. The Resolvent 113
(vi) We now have precise expressions for the three roots of y 3 3y C

1, expressed in terms of cosines. To proceed further, use a calculator
to determine the values of the cosines, at least approximately. Then
substitute the approximate answers into the polynomial y 3 3y C 1.
As the last part of Exercise 5.4 may suggest, once we turn to calculators,
we are settling for approximate answers, and these can be obtained in a
variety of ways independent of Cardano’s formula. For example, we can
solve cubic equations using Newton’s method—a standard application of
calculus—or turn to a selection of mathematical programs without even
worrying about the nature of the underlying algorithms.
The need to approximate already reared its head in our use of the qua-
dratic formula. The finding of square roots of positive real numbers is an
algorithmic process, one we carry out until we arrive at as close an approx-
imation to the answer as we wish.
What the quadratic formula does for us is reduce the problem of solving
arbitrary quadratic equations to that of calculating square roots. Likewise,
Cardano’s formula reduces solving cubic equations to the calculation of
square and cube roots. It is only at this stage, and because we may be cal-
culating cube roots of complex numbers, that we turn to trigonometry and
calculators.
In addition, both the quadratic formula and Cardano’s have theoretical
value, representing roots of polynomials in terms of their coefficients. We
will make use of this in Section 5.3 in obtaining a formula for the discrimi-
nant of a cubic polynomial.
5.2 The Resolvent

Given the reduced cubic polynomial y 3 C py C q, one can rewrite the terms
r
q p3 q2
˙ C
2 27 4
whose cube roots we compute in using Cardano’s formula as
p
q q 2 C 4p 3 =27
˙ :
2 2
These are the roots of the quadratic polynomial t 2 C qt p 3 =27, which has
q 2 C 4p 3=27 as its discriminant. This suggests an alternative approach to
the derivation of Cardano’s formula, one presented by Euler in Elements of
Algebra [26, pp. 263–264].
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 114 — #130
i i
Exercise 5.5. Let b and c be real numbers and let U , V be the roots of the
quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c. From Exercise 2.5, b D .U C V / and
c D UV.
(i) Let d be the real cube root of c. Choose cube roots A of U and B of
V so that AB D d .
(ii) Using the formulas A3 D U , B 3 D V , and AB D d , expand .ACB/3
and verify that
.A C B/3 D 3d.A C B/ b:
(iii) Conclude that Theorem 5.2 holds.
p
Theorem 5.2. Let b and c be real numbers and let 3 c be the real cube
root of c. Let U and V be the roots of the quadratic polynomial
x 2 C bx C c:
p p p p p
Choose cube roots 3 U and 3 V of U and V so that 3 U 3 V D 3 c.
Then the sum p p
3 3
UC V
is a root of the cubic polynomial
p
y3 3 3 c y C b:
It is now an easy matter to rederive Cardano’s formula:
Theorem 5.3 (Cardano again). Let p and q be real numbers. Let U and V
be the roots of the quadratic polynomial
p3
t 2 C qt :
27
p
3
p
3
p
3
p
3
Choose cube roots U and V of U and V so that U V D p=3.
Then the sum p p
3 3
UC V
is a root of the cubic polynomial
y 3 C py C q:
Exercise 5.6. Verify that Theorem 5.3 is an immediate consequence of

Theorem 5.2. Verify also that Theorem 5.3 becomes Cardano’s formula in
its usual form once we use the quadratic formula to express U and V in
terms of p and q.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 115 — #131
i i
5.3. The Discriminant 115
The polynomial t 2 C qt p 3 =27 associated with y 3 C py C q is called

its resolvent quadratic.
5.3 The Discriminant

For a quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c with real or complex roots r1 and
r2 , we saw in Exercise 4.8 and Theorem 4.4 that the squared difference
.r1 r2 /2 of the roots is expressible in terms of the coefficients:
.r1 r2 /2 D b 2 4c:
This allows us to obtain information on the roots from the coefficients alone:
if b 2 4c is positive, the roots are real and distinct; if b 2 4c is 0, the roots
are real and coincide; and if b 2 4c is negative, then the roots are a pair of
non-real, complex conjugate numbers.
We would like similarly to be able to obtain information about the roots
of a cubic polynomial in terms of its coefficients. The discussion that fol-
lowed Exercise 4.8 showed that the two quantities b 2 4c and .r1 r2 /2
associated with x 2 C bx C c can both be regarded as its discriminant, but
.r1 r2 /2 is the more fundamental quantity, the one we chose as the dis-
criminant’s definition.
Given a cubic polynomial x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d , let’s write r1 ; r2; r3 for
its roots, real or complex. In analogy with the quadratic case, we define the
discriminant of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d to be
.r1 r2 /2 .r1 r3 /2 .r2 r3 /2
and denote it by .
For the special case of a reduced cubic polynomial x 3 C px C q, we
introduced the quantity 4p 3 27q 2 in Section 3.4, denoted it by ı, and
called it the discriminant. We also saw, in Exercise 3.22 and Theorem 3.6,
that the nature of the roots of x 3 CpxCq is determined by ı: the polynomial
has three distinct real roots if ı is positive, a repeated real root if ı is 0,
and one simple real root plus two complex conjugate roots if ı is negative.
Let’s show for a general cubic polynomial that our newly introduced
determines the nature of the roots in the same way.
Exercise 5.7. Let f .x/ D x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d . We will relate the sign of

the discriminant of f .x/ to the nature of the roots of f .x/.
(i) Suppose f .x/ has a multiple root. Show that D 0.
(ii) Suppose that the three roots are real and distinct. Show that > 0.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 116 — #132
i i
(iii) Suppose that one root is real and the other two are complex conjugates.
Show that < 0. (Hint: Suppose the roots are r , a C bi , and a bi ,
with r , a, and b all real numbers. Using this notation, calculate by
calculating the product of the root differences before squaring.)
(iv) Prove the converses: if D 0, then f .x/ has a multiple root and all
its roots are real; if > 0, then f .x/ has three distinct real roots;
and if < 0, then f .x/ has one real root and two non-real complex
conjugate roots. (Hint: These follow from the three statements by the
logical argument that we used in Exercise 4.7 to prove the quadratic
analogue.)
(v) Conclude that you can determine the nature of the roots of f .x/ from
the sign of the discriminant of f .x/, as described in Theorem 5.4.
Theorem 5.4. Let f .x/ be a degree 3 polynomial with discriminant .

(i) If is positive, then f .x/ has three distinct real roots.
(ii) If D 0, then f .x/ has only real roots, one of which occurs with
multiplicity at least 2.
(iii) If is negative, then f .x/ has three distinct roots. One is real and two
form a complex conjugate pair.
We would like to be able to compute the discriminant of a cubic polyno-

mial in terms of its coefficients, so that we can determine the nature of the
roots without computing them. Let’s first consider a reduced cubic polyno-
mial, one of the form y 3 C py C q. We just reviewed that the nature of its
roots is determined by the sign of the quantity ı, with ı D 4p 3 27q 2. If
we can prove that ı D , then we can put aside any concerns that the two
uses of the word “discriminant” conflict. At the same time, we will have an
algebraic proof that the quantity 4p 3 27q 2 determines the nature of the
roots. This would contrast with our proof of Theorem 3.6, which depended
on calculus.
Exercise 5.8. Suppose p and q are real numbers and consider the poly-
nomial y 3 C py C q. We will use the notation and results of Exercise p
5.1.
Accordingly, we choose A to be one of p the three cube roots of q=2 C R
and B to be the cube root of q=2 R satisfying AB D p=3. With
these choices the three roots of y 3 C py C q are
r1 D A C B; r2 D !A C ! 2 B; r3 D ! 2 A C !B:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 117 — #133
i i
(i) Verify that

r1 r2 D .1 !/.A ! 2 B/;
that
r1 r3 D ! 2 .1 !/.A !B/;
and that
r2 r3 D !.1 !/.A B/:
(ii) Verify that

p
.1 !/3 D 3.! 2 !/ D 3 3i
and use Theorem 4.16 to deduce that

p
.r1 r2 /.r1 r3/.r2 r3 / D .1 !/3 .A3 B 3/ D 3 3i.A3 B 3 /:
p
The definitions of A and B yield A3 D q=2C R and B 3 D q=2
(iii) p
R. Deduce that
p
A3 B 3 D 2 R
and that
p p
.r1 r2 /.r1 r3 /.r2 r3 / D 6 3i R:
(iv) Deduce that the discriminant of y 3 C py C q is given by the formula
D 108R:
(v) Conclude that Theorem 5.5 holds.
Theorem 5.5. Given real numbers p and q, the discriminant of the poly-
nomial y 3 C py C q is
4p 3 27q 2:
Exercise 5.9. Calculate the discriminant of each cubic polynomial and

state whether it has a multiple root, a real root and two non-real roots, or
three distinct real roots.
(i) y 3 3y C 2.
(ii) y 3 C 5y C 1.
(iii) y 3 5y C 1.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 118 — #134
i i
It remains to show for a general cubic polynomial x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d

that its discriminant can be computed in terms of b, c, and d . This will
allow us, as in the quadratic case, to determine the nature of the roots of a
cubic from the coefficients alone.
Exercise 5.10. Consider the cubic polynomial x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d , with

real numbers b, c, and d as coefficients.
(i) From Exercise 3.2 and Theorem 3.3, the change of variable x D y
.b=3/ transforms x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d into a polynomial of the form
y 3 C py C q. Write the roots of y 3 C py C q as r1 , r2 , and r3 . In
terms of r1 , r2 , and r3 , what are the roots of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d ? (See
Exercise 3.2.)
(ii) Observe that although the roots of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d and y 3 C px C q
differ, their differences are the same.
(iii) Deduce that the discriminant of x 3 Cbx 2 CcxCd and the discriminant
of y 3 C px C q are equal.
(iv) Using the formulas of Theorem 3.3 for p and q in terms of b, c, and
d and the formula for the discriminant of y 3 C px C q, obtain the
formula in Theorem 5.6 for the discriminant of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d in
terms of b, c, and d .
(v) Conclude that the nature of the roots of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d can be
determined in terms of b, c, and d , without explicit knowledge of the
roots.
Theorem 5.6. Given real numbers b, c, and d , the discriminant of x 3 C

bx 2 C cx C d is
18bcd 4b 3d C b 2 c 2 4c 3 27d 2:
Exercise 5.11. Calculate the discriminant of each cubic polynomial and

state whether it has a multiple root, a real root and two non-real roots, or
three distinct real roots.
(i) x 3 C 2x 2 4.
3 2
(ii) x C 3x 5x C 1.
The discriminant separates cubic polynomials into three families ac-

cording to the nature of their roots, as described in Theorem 5.4: there are
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 119 — #135
i i
three distinct real roots when is positive, there is one real root along with
a distinct pair of complex conjugate roots when is negative, and there is
a repeated root when is zero. Theorem 5.6 allows us to determine which
occurs for a cubic polynomial from its coefficients alone. If D 0, we can
use the coefficients to do a little more.
Theorem 5.7. The polynomial x 3 Cbx 2 Ccx Cd has one real root, of mul-
tiplicity 3, if D 0 and b 2 3c D 0. It has two real roots, of multiplicities
1 and 2, if D 0 and b 2 3c ¤ 0.

(i) Check that the only reduced cubic polynomial with a root of multiplic-
ity 3 is y 3 . (Hint: Given a real number r , what is the coefficient of y 2
in .y r /3 ?)
(ii) Deduce that y 3 C py C q has a root of multiplicity 3 if D 0 and
p D 0, but roots of multiplicities 1 and 2 if D 0 and p ¤ 0.
(iii) Observe that x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d has a root of multiplicity 3 precisely
when the reduced cubic polynomial associated with it by the change
of variable of Theorem 3.3 does.
(iv) Show that the theorem follows.
The sign of a cubic’s discriminant determines whether or not we will

have to calculate cube roots of non-real complex numbers when using Car-
dano’s formula. We saw this at the conclusion of Section 3.4 in terms of
ı, the discriminant we obtained using calculus. Having now developed the
theory of the discriminant algebraically, we can restate the situation in terms
of .
Exercise 5.13. Consider the reduced cubic polynomial y 3 C py C q. As

usual, let R D p 3 =27 C q 2 =4.
(i) Using Theorem 5.5, observe that and R have opposite signs.
(ii) Review the relation of the sign of to the nature of the roots and
rephrase it as a relation between the sign of R and the nature of the
roots.
(iii) Deduce that if y 3 C py C q has one real root and two non-real roots,
then Cardano’s formula expresses the real root as the sum of cube roots
of real numbers.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 120 — #136
i i
(iv) In contrast, deduce that if y 3 Cpy Cq has three distinct real roots, then
Cardano’s formula for the roots expresses all three of them as sums of
cube roots of non-real complex numbers.
The appearance of cube roots of non-real complex numbers in Car-

dano’s formula when is positive can be made explicit by rewriting Car-
dano’s formula with in place of R:
s p s p
3 q 3 q
yD C p C p :
2 6 3 2 6 3
Our examples of polynomials for which such cube roots arose weren’t anoma-
lies. They were inevitable.
5.4 Cardano’s Formula Refined

The nature of a reduced cubic polynomial’s roots depends on the sign of
its discriminant. For each of the three possible cases—zero, negative, or
positive—we can obtain a refined version of Cardano’s formula. Let’s start
with the case of zero discriminant.
Exercise 5.14. Let y 3 C py C q be a reduced cubic polynomial with dis-

criminant equal to 0; that is, 4p 3 27q 2 D 0. The case p D q D 0 is not
interesting, so let’s assume p and q are both non-zero.
(i) Show that p must be negative.
(ii) Solve the equation 4p 3 27q 2 D 0 for q in terms of p. Show that

r
2p p
qD˙ :
3 3
(iii) To
p simplify notation, let’s introduce a new constant a, with a D
p=3; that is, a is the positive square root of p=3. Check that
p D 3a2 and q D ˙2a3 . The choice of sign in the expression for
q in terms of a is determined by the sign of q: if q is positive, then
q D 2a3 ; if q is negative, then q D 2a3 .
(iv) Assume that q is positive. Rewrite the cubic polynomial y 3 C py C q

as
y3 3a2 y C 2a3:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 121 — #137
i i
5.4. Cardano’s Formula Refined 121
Verify that y D a and y D 2a are roots. Show that we have the

factorization
y3 3a2 y C 2a3 D .y a/2 .y C 2a/:
(v) Assume that q is negative. Rewrite y 3 C py C q as
y3 3a2 y 2a3 :
Verify that its roots are a and 2a, and that we have the factorization
y3 3a2 y 2a3 D .y C a/2 .y 2a/:
(vi) Deduce Theorem 5.8.
Theorem 5.8. Let y 3 C py C q be a reduced cubic polynomial with dis-

criminant equal to 0.
(i) If q D 0, then p D 0 and 0 is a root of multiplicity 3.
p p
(ii) If q > 0, then p=3 is a root of multiplicity 2 and 2 p=3 is a
root of multiplicity 1.
p p
(iii) If q < 0, then p=3 is a root of multiplicity 2 and 2 p=3 is a
root of multiplicity 1.
Let’s next consider the case of negative discriminant. We saw in Exer-

cise 4.27 that a real number c has one real cube root, say d , and two non-
real cube roots, !d and ! 2 d . This allows us to be more explicit about our
choices of A and B in the version of Cardano’s formula stated as Theorem
5.1.
Exercise 5.15. Let y 3 C py C q be a reduced cubic polynomial with

negative discriminant; that is, 4p 3 27q 2 < 0. Let R as usual equal
p 3 =27 Cpq 2 =4, so D 108R
p and R > 0. In particular, the quantities
q=2 C p R and q=2 R are real. Let A be thepreal cube root of
q=2 C R and let B be the real cube root of q=2 R.
(i) Verify that AB D p=3. (This can be done directly. Or, from Exercise
5.1, the product of A with one of B, !B, and ! 2 B is p=3. Consider
which product is a real number.)
(ii) Deduce in the case of negative discriminant that Theorem 5.1 takes on
the special form of Theorem 5.9.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 122 — #138
i i
Theorem 5.9. Let y 3 Cpy Cq be a reduced cubic polynomial with negative

discriminant. Let A be the real cube root of
r
q p3 q2
C C ;
2 27 4
let B be the real cube root of
r
q p3 q2
C ;
2 27 4
p
and let ! D 1=2 C 3=2. Then y 3 C py C q has one real root, A C B,
and two non-real roots, !A C ! 2 B and ! 2 A C !B.
In using Cardano’s formula to find the roots of a cubic polynomial

y 3 C py C q with positive discriminant, we can cut the work of cube root
calculations in half once we recognize that the two expressions whose cube
roots we need to calculate are complex conjugates of each other.
Exercise 5.16. Let y 3 C py C q be a reduced cubic polynomial with pos-

itive discriminant; that is, 4p 3 27q 2 > 0. Let R D p 3 =27 C q 2 =4, so
that R < 0.
p p
(i) Since R is negative, p R has two real square
proots, R and R.
Observe that q=2 C R i and q=2 R i are complex conju-
gates.
(ii) If s is a complex number and r is one of its cube roots, then Exercise
4.1
p yields that r is a cube root of s. Suppose A is a p
cube root of q=2C
R i . Deduce that A is a cube root of q=2 R i.
(iii) Verify that AA D p=3. (Use the fact that the product of A with one
of A, !A, and ! 2 A is p=3. Consider which product is a real number.)
(iv) Use Exercise 4.4 to verify that !A and ! 2 A are complex conjugates
and that ! 2 A and !A are complex conjugates.
(v) Deduce that Theorem 5.1 takes on the special form of Theorem 5.10.
Theorem 5.10. Let y 3 CpyCq be a reduced cubic polynomial with positive

discriminant. Let A be a cube root of
r
q p3 q2
C C
2 27 4
p
and let ! be the cube root 1=2 C 3=2 of 1. Then the three roots of
y 3 C py C q are A C A, !A C !A, and ! 2 A C ! 2 A.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 123 — #139
i i
5.4. Cardano’s Formula Refined 123
Let us return to the cubic y 3 7y C 6 and find its roots using Theorem
5.10.
Exercise 5.17. Use Cardano’s formula, as refined in Theorem 5.10, to

solve the cubic equation
y3 7y C 6 D 0:
p
(i) One cube root of 3 C 10 3=9 was determined in Exercise 3.13 or
Exercise 4.28. Add this cube root to its conjugate to obtain one solution
to y 3 7y C 6 D 0.
(ii) Using ! p and ! 2 , write expressions for the other two cube roots of
3 C 10 3=9. Add each to its conjugate to obtain the other two
solutions.
We close this section with two exercises that provide an opportunity to

tie together the ideas we have learned so far.
x 3 C 6x 2 C 3x C 18 D 0:
The solution should be presented in essay form, with explanations of what is

being done at each step and why it is being done. The solution should not be
merely lines of calculation. There should be English prose. The following
steps should be included.
(i) Change variables to obtain a presumably simpler cubic equation to
solve.
(ii) State Cardano’s formula clearly in general and then explain how to
apply it.
(iii) Use Cardano’s formula to obtain a real solution.
(iv) Obtain the other two solutions in two ways. First use factorization and
the quadratic formula. Then obtain the other two solutions using cube
roots of 1 and Cardano’s formula again.
(v) Obtain three solutions to the original equation.
x3 3x 2 10x C 24 D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 124 — #140
i i
Again the solution should be presented as an essay. The points listed in

Exercise 5.18 apply to this equation as well, but there are some differences
in the details:
(i) This time it may be necessary to calculate cube roots of non-real com-
plex numbers, which can be done using trigonometry, along with a
calculator.
(ii) Calculator solutions are only approximate. Point this out. Even though
the solution is approximate, it may in fact be correct. Check to see if it
is.
5.5 The Irreducible Case

Reduced cubic polynomials with positive discriminant are precisely those
with three distinct real roots, as we saw in Theorem 5.4. Thus, they factor as
products of three distinct linear polynomials and are said to be completely
reducible in modern terminology. Yet, they are also the polynomials whose
roots Cardano’s formula expresses as sums of cube roots of non-real com-
plex numbers. Cardano called this the irreducible case. To understand the
sense in which “irreducible” applies, let’s continue an analysis that we be-
gan in Exercises 4.13 and 4.14.
Exercise 5.20. Fix real numbers a and b with b ¤ 0. We wish to calculate

cube roots of a C bi . This amounts to solving the equation .x C yi /3 D
a C bi for real values of x and y,
(i) Review Exercises 4.13 and 4.14, where we found that the equation
.x C yi /3 D a C bi yields two equations for x and y:
x3 3xy 2 D aI 3x 2y y 3 D b:
(ii) The substitution x D sy led to a single equation in s,

a a
s3 3 s2 3s C D 0:
b b
The equation is a cubic in s with coefficients expressed in terms of
a=b.
(iii) Using Cardano’s formula to solve a cubic equation of “irreducible”
type requires us to calculate a cube root of a non-real complex number.
We now find that calculating such a cube root leads to a new cubic
equation. Have we made progress? Let’s examine the new cubic.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 125 — #141
i i
5.6. Viete’s Formula 125
(iv) Introduce another variable t, with s D t C .a=b). Substitute t C .a=b/

for s in the equation for s to obtain a reduced cubic equation for t,
a
t3 3kt 2 k D 0;
b
with k D 1 C .a2 =b 2/.
(v) We can try to solve it using Cardano’s formula. Calculate R, or for
this new reduced cubic. Verify that R has the form k 2 . This means the
new cubic, in t, is also of irreducible type, so that solving it will require
another calculation of the cube root of a non-real complex number.
(vi) Show that in fact using Cardano’s formula to solve the cubic in t re-
quires us to compute the cube root of
a
k C ki:
b
(vii) Write this as

k
.a C bi /;
b
a real number times a C bi .
(viii) Conclude that in order to use Cardano’s formula to find roots of the
reduced cubic equation in t, we must be able to compute the cube root
of none other than a C bi , the complex number whose cube root we
were trying to calculate in the first place!
The calculation in the last exercise shows that we have come full circle.
To solve an “irreducible” cubic equation, we need to calculate the cube root
of a non-real complex number a C bi . To compute it, we are led to solve a
different cubic equation. Passing from this different cubic to its associated
reduced cubic equation and applying Cardano’s formula, we find that we
must compute the same cube root with which we began. It is in this sense
that the problem is irreducible.
We need not despair. We must accept that non-algebraic techniques are
needed. For example, we can use trigonometry to compute cube roots, as
worked out in Exercise 4.27.
5.6 Viete’s Formula

We closed Section 5.5 with the recognition that we must leave the realm of
algebra for trigonometry to find the roots of reduced cubic polynomials in
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 126 — #142
i i
the irreducible case. We previously observed (Exercise 5.16 and Theorem

5.10) in this case that the two summands in Cardano’s formula are complex
conjugates of each other. The sum of a complex number and its conjugate
is twice the real part of the two numbers: .a C bi / C .a bi / D 2a.
Thus, given a cubic polynomial y 3 C py C q with positive discriminant,
p
if we can determine the real parts of the cube roots of q=2 C R in
terms of p and q, we will have a new formula for the cubic’s roots. We
will obtain such a formula, using the standard trigonometric functions and
inverse trigonometric functions.
From the discussion before Exercise 4.16, the inverse cosine function
arccos x is defined only for real numbers in the interval Œ 1; 1. As x in-
creases from 1 to 1, the value arccos x decreases from to 0, taking each
value once. The following inequality ensures that the inverse cosine is de-
fined on expressions that will arise in Exercise 5.22.
Exercise 5.21. Suppose p and q are real numbers. Assume p < 0 and let
p
p=3 be the positive square root of p=3. Show that
3q
1< p <1
2p p=3
precisely when 4p 3 27q 2 > 0. (Hint: Use the fact, for a real number r ,
that 1 < r < 1 precisely when r 2 < 1.)
Exercise 5.22. Suppose p and q are real numbers satisfying

p 4p 3 27q 2 >
3 2
0. Let R D p =27 C q =4 (which is negative) and take R to be the pos-
itive square root of R.
p
(i) Observe that p must be negative. Write p=3 for the the positive
square root of p=3.
(ii) By Exercise 4.17, we can write

q p
C Ri
2
in the form
r cos C .r sin /i
for real numbers r and , with r > 0. Using Exercise 4.16, show that
r
p3
r
p p
rD D ;
27 3 3
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 127 — #143
i i
and that one choice of is

!
q 3q
D arccos D arccos p :
2r 2p p=3
(By Exercise 5.21, arccos is defined here.)

(iii) Let’sp
simplify our notation by introducing new constants a and b, with
aD p=3 and b D 3q=p. Then r D a3 and D arccos.b=2a/.
(iv) From Exercise 4.27, one cube root of
r cos C r i sin
is
p3 p
r cos C 3 r i sin :
3 3
Deduce, using our shorthand notation, that

1 b 1 b
a cos arccos C ai sin arccos
3 2a 3 2a
p
is a cube root of q=2 C Ri .
(v) By Theorem 5.10, one root of y 3 C py C q is given by adding the
complex number displayed in (iv) to its conjugate. Adding a complex
number and its complex conjugate yields twice the real part of the
complex number. Conclude that

1 b
2a cos arccos
3 2a
is a root of y 3 C py C q.
The formula for a root of the reduced cubic y 3 C py C q in Exercise

5.22 is due to François Viète, whose work we will discuss further in Section
5.8. Let’s record it as a theorem, replacing a and b with the expressions in
p and q that they represent.
Theorem 5.11 (Viète). Suppose p and q are real numbers. Let y 3 C py C q

be a cubic polynomial with positive discriminant. Then one of the roots of
y 3 C py C q is given by the formula
r !!
p 1 3q
2 cos arccos p :
3 3 2p p=3
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 128 — #144
i i
From Exercise 4.27, we can express the other two roots of y 3 C py C q

by similar expressions, by adding 2=3 and 4=3 to the argument of the
cosine.
Viète’s formula allows us to avoid calculating cube roots of non-real
complex numbers in finding roots of cubic polynomials of irreducible type.
This is reminiscent of the situation we discussed in Section 4.8, where we
examined how to calculate nth roots of real and complex numbers using the
exponential and logarithm functions or using the cosine and inverse cosine
functions. We concluded that discussion with the observation that in both
cases the calculation involved using a familiar function f —the exponential
or cosine function—in the same way. We calculate the value of f 1 for
some constant c, divide the resulting number by n, and then apply f to the
result or a minor variant. For example, the nth root of a positive real number
r is
e log.r /=n :
Viète’s formula fits into this theme, with the cosine function as f . We calcu-
late an inverse cosine, divide by 3, and calculate a cosine, thereby replacing
a cube root calculation (of a complex number!) with division by 3. Let’s try
it.
Exercise 5.23. Verify that y 3 7y C 6 has positive discriminant. Then use

Viète’s formula and a calculator to solve
y3 7y C 6 D 0:
Exercise 5.24. Verify that y 3 3y C 1 has positive discriminant. Then use

Viète’s formula to express one of the solutions to the equation
y3 3y C 1 D 0
in terms of cosines. We get the same answer as in Exercise 5.4 using Car-
dano’s and de Moivre’s formulas.
Viète’s formula applies also to a cubic y 3 C py C q with zero dis-

criminant. We can rework Exercise 5.21 p (still assuming p < 0) to find that
4p 3 27q 2 D 0 precisely when 3q=2p p=3 equals 1 or 1 . We obtain
1 when q is positive and 1 when q is negative. The inverse cosine
p of 1
is and of 1 is 0. Thus, when q > 0, Viète’s formula
p yields y D p=3,
while when q < 0, the formula yields y D 2 p=3. This proves again
part of Theorem 5.8.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 129 — #145
i i
Although Viète’s formula allows us to bypass the calculation of cube

roots of non-real complex numbers, such cube roots did appear in its deriva-
tion. Once we know—or guess—that a formula for y exists expressing it as
twice a positive multiple of a cosine, we may wish to derive it directly, with-
out reference to Cardano’s formula or complex numbers. This can be done,
using the cosine triple angle formula:
Theorem 5.12. Let be a real number. Then
cos 3 D 4 cos3 3 cos :

(i) Using the angle sum formulas of Theorem 4.9, write formulas for
sin 2 and cos 2 in terms of sin and cos .
(ii) Using Theorem 4.9 again, write cos 3 in terms of sines and cosines
of and 2.
(iii) Obtain the identity
cos 3 D cos3 3 sin2 cos :
(iv) Use
cos2 C sin2 D 1
and the equality in (iii) to obtain the desired identity.
We can now use Theorem 5.12 to derive Viète’s formula independently

of Cardano’s formula.
Exercise 5.26. Let y 3 C py C q be a cubic polynomial with positive dis-

criminant. Recall that p must be negative. We wish to find a solution in the
form y D 2a cos , where a and are real numbers expressedpin terms of
p and q and a is positive. (We have been using a to represent p=3, but
for now we assume that a is unknown).
(i) Substitute 2a cos for y in the equation y 3 C py C q D 0 to obtain
8a3 cos3 C 2ap cos C q D 0:
If we can find values of a and , in terms of p and q, for which this

holds, then we will have the desired formula.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 130 — #146
i i
(ii) Use the triple angle formula and collect terms to rewrite the equation
as
.6a3 C 2ap/ cos C 2a3 cos 3 C q D 0:
It will suffice to find values of a and for which 6a3 C 2ap D 0 and
2a3 cos 3 C q D 0.
(iii) We have assumed that a is positive, so that a ¤ 0. Using this, solve
6a3 C 2ap D 0 for a and show that
p
aD p=3:
p
(iv) Substitute p=3 for a in the equation
2a3 cos 3 C q D 0;
solve for , and show that

!
1 3q
D arccos p :
3 2p p=3
(v) Rewrite 2a cos as an expression in p and q using the expressions we

have just obtained for a and .
We have succeeded in deriving Viète’s formula directly, without intro-

ducing complex numbers.
5.7 The Signs of the Real Roots

We have seen how to compute the discriminant of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d in
terms of the coefficients b, c, and d . We have also seen how to use to de-
cide whether x 3 Cbx 2 Ccx Cd has a repeated root, three distinct real roots,
or one real root and two complex conjugate roots. Thus this information can
be determined using only the coefficients.
It is possible to obtain more information from the coefficients, such as
how many of the real roots are positive and how many are negative. We will
close our treatment of cubic polynomials by working this out, because it is
interesting in its own right and because we will need the result in our study
of quartic polynomials. We begin by obtaining analogous results for linear
and quadratic polynomials.
Exercise 5.27. Let c be a real number. Show that the only root of the linear
polynomial x C c is c. Deduce that the sign of the root can be determined
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 131 — #147
i i
5.7. The Signs of the Real Roots 131
in terms of the sign of the constant coefficient. (Yes, this is trivial, but it is
the first in a sequence of results.)
Exercise 5.28. Let b and c be real numbers and let r1 and r2 be the roots
of the quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c. Since we are interested in the case
that the roots are real, we assume that b 2 4c 0.
(i) If c D 0, the roots are 0 and b, so their sign is determined by the sign
of the coefficient b.
(ii) Assume c ¤ 0. From Exercise 2.5, c D r1 r2 and b D .r1 C r2/.
Show that if r1 and r2 have the same sign, then c > 0, and if they have
opposite sign, then c < 0.
(iii) Assume that c is positive. Show that r1 and r2 are both positive pre-
cisely when b < 0 and both negative precisely when b > 0.
(iv) Deduce Theorem 5.13.
Theorem 5.13. Let b and c be real numbers satisfying b 2 4c 0 and

c ¤ 0.
(i) The polynomial x 2 C bx C c has two real roots, both non-zero.
(ii) If c > 0 and b < 0, then both roots are positive.
(iii) If c < 0, then one root is positive and one is negative.
(iv) If c > 0 and b > 0, then both roots are negative.
To handle cubic polynomials, we need a cubic analogue of Exercise 2.5.
Theorem 5.14. Let x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d be a cubic polynomial with real
coefficients b, c, and d , and suppose its three roots are r1 , r2 , and r3 . Then
b D r1 r2 r3 ;
c D Cr1 r2 C r1 r3 C r2 r3 ;
d D r1 r2 r3 :
Exercise 5.29. Prove Theorem 5.14. (Hint: Use the factorization of x 3 C

bx 2 C cx C d as .x r1 /.x r2 /.x r3 /.)
A cubic polynomial of the form x 3 C bx 2 C cx factors as the product

of x and x 2 C bx C c, so that one of its roots is 0 and the others are roots of
x 2 C bx C c. Thus, we can determine the signs of its roots using Theorem
5.13. We will exclude this case.
Let’s consider cubic polynomials that have non-real roots.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 132 — #148
i i

coefficients b, c, and d whose discriminant is negative. Assume further that
d ¤ 0. Then the real root of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d is positive if d is negative
and negative if d is positive.
Exercise 5.30. Prove Theorem 5.15. (Hint: Use Theorem 5.14 and the fact
that the product of a non-zero complex number and its conjugate is a posi-
tive real number.)
We now turn to cubic polynomials whose roots are all real.
Exercise 5.31. Assume that x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d is a cubic polynomial with

real coefficients b, c, and d . Assume that d ¤ 0 and that the discriminant
of x 3 Cbx 2 Ccx Cd is non-negative, so that the roots of x 3 Cbx 2 Ccx Cd
are all real (whatever their multiplicities).
(i) Show that if b, c, and d are positive, then all the roots are negative.
(Hint: If x > 0, what is the sign of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d ?)
(ii) Conversely, show that if all the roots are negative, then b, c, and d are
positive. (Hint: Examine the expressions for b, c, and d in terms of the
roots given in Theorem 5.14.)
(iii) Show that if b is negative, c is positive, and d is negative, then all the
roots are positive. (Hint: If x < 0, what is the sign of x 3 C bx 2 C cx C
d ?)
(iv) Conversely, show that if all the roots are positive, then b is negative, c
is positive, and d is negative.
(v) Show that d > 0 if there are 0 or 2 positive roots and d < 0 if there
are 1 or 3 positive roots.
(vi) Deduce Theorem 5.16.

coefficients b, c, and d whose discriminant is non-negative. Assume further
that d ¤ 0.
(i) If b, c, and d are positive, then all the roots are negative.
(ii) If b is negative, c is positive, and d is negative, then all the roots are
positive.
(iii) If neither condition holds, then there are both positive and negative
roots. In this case, if d > 0, then there are two positive roots; if d < 0,
then there is one positive root.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 133 — #149
i i
5.8. History 133
In the next exercise, we will apply what we’ve learned.
Exercise 5.32. For the cubic polynomials in (i)-(iv), use Theorems 5.15
and 5.16 to determine from the coefficients how many real roots there are
and how many of them are positive or negative.
(i) x 3 6x 2 C 11x 6.
3 2
(ii) x 5x C 9x 5.
3 2
(iii) x C 6x C 3x C 18.
(iv) x 3 3x 2 10x C 24.
Let’s extract one small piece of Theorems 5.15 and 5.16 that will play
an essential role in our study of quartic polynomials. (See Exercise 6.8.)
Theorem 5.17. Let f .x/ be a cubic polynomial with non-zero constant
coefficient d .
(i) If d > 0, then f .x/ has at least one negative real root.
(ii) If d < 0, then f .x/ has at least one positive real root.
Exercise 5.33. Verify that Theorem 5.17 follows from Theorems 5.15 and
5.16. It is valid regardless of whether f .x/ has one or three real roots.
5.8 History
We concluded Section 5.5 with the observation that we need not despair
when faced with a cubic equation to solve in the irreducible case. How did
Cardano react? Let’s find out, as we continue the historical account of cubic
equations that we began in Section 3.5.
The cubic equations whose solution Cardano learned from Tartaglia
have the special form
x 3 C px D q
with p and q positive. Since p is positive, the discriminant is negative and
the formula of del Ferro and Tartaglia involves cube roots of real numbers.
Cardano, however, extended Tartaglia’s solution to cover cubic equations of
the additional forms
x 3 D px C q
and
x 3 C q D px:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 134 — #150
i i
Again, the coefficients are taken to be positive. But then, rewriting them in
the form x 3 C P x C Q D 0 by moving the appropriate terms to the left
side, we see that P is negative, so the discriminant 4P 3 27Q2 may
be positive. Thus Cardano opened the door to the irreducible case, with its
square roots of negative numbers and cube roots of non-real numbers.
Cardano was aware of the new difficulty. However, uncertain how to
handle it, he omitted examples of cubic equations of this type in Ars Magna
[12]. Thus, the answer to our opening question is that he suppressed the
irreducible case.
In an interesting passage later in Ars Magna, Cardano does make some
calculations with square roots of negative numbers. We know from Section
2.1 that solving a quadratic equation x 2 bx C c D 0 (the minus sign in
front of the b is intentional) is equivalent to finding two numbers whose
sum is b and whose product is c, and that special cases of this problem can
be found on Babylonian clay tablets from over three thousand years ago. In
Chapter 37, titled “On the Rule for Postulating a Negative,” Cardano poses
and solves just such a problem [12, p. 219]:
If it should be said, Divide 10 into two parts the product of which is
30 or 40, it is clear that this case is impossible. Nevertheless, we will
work thus: We divide 10 into two equal parts, making each 5. These we
square, making 25. Subtract 40 if you will, from the 25 thus produced
. . . leaving a remainder of 15, the square root of which added to or
subtracted
p from 5 gives
p parts the product of which is 40. These will be
5C 15 and 5 15.
By competing the square, Cardano has found two numbers that have
sum 10 and product 40. Equivalently, he has solved the quadratic equation
x2 10x C 40 D 0;
despite its discriminant being negative. Next Cardano writes [12, pp. 219–
220],
p
Putting
p aside the mental tortures involved, multiply 5 C 15 by 5
15, making 25 . 15/, which is C15. Hence this product is 40.
. . . This truly is sophisticated . . . . So progresses arithmetic subtlety
the end of which, as is said, is as refined as it is useless.
Recognizing that the problem makes no physical sense, Cardano is content
to label the result useless.
Complex numbers enter into the solving of quadratic equations pre-
cisely when the equations have no real solutions. Though sophisticated, the
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 135 — #151
i i
5.8. History 135
new numbers aren’t needed. What’s different about cubic equations is that
the new numbers appear precisely when the equations have only real (and
distinct) solutions. This was a puzzle Cardano was not prepared to address.
In contrast, Cardano’s near-contemporary Rafael Bombelli (1526–1572)
did not shy away from the irreducible case. In the influential three-volume
work L’Algebra [11], printed in 1572 and again in 1579, Bombelli set out to
present the results of Ars Magna in a manner more accessible to beginners.
Bombelli gives as one example the irreducible cubic equation
x 3 D 15x C 4:
(See the discussion in [66, pp. 60–61].) Using Cardano’s formula, Bombelli
writes the solution
p p
q q
3 3
2C 121 C 2 121:
He describes the imaginary square roots, following Cardano, as “sophistic,”

but he also notes that the cubic equation can be solved, since after all x D
4 is a solution. This motivates finding a way to make the formula work,
and Bombelli proceeds much as we did in Exercise 3.13 when we used
Cardano’s formula topsolve the cubic equation y 3 7y C p 6 D 0.
p Let’s write a C b as a possible cube
p root of 2 C 121 and a
bpas the corresponding
p cube root of 2 121. By setting the cube of
aC b equal to 2 C 121 and collecting terms, we get
a3 3ab D 2:
p p
By setting the product of a C b and a b equal to the product of
p
3 p p3 p
2C 121 and 2 121, we get
a2 C b D 5:
Bombelli foundp the solution

pa D 2 and b D 1 to this pair of equations.
Adding 2 C 1 and 2 1, he obtained x D 4 as the solution to the
cubic equation, prompting him to comment, “At first, the thing seemed to
me to be based more on sophism than on truth, but I searched until I found
the proof.” [66, p. 61]
Bombelli also gave rules for the manipulation of these new numbers,
including the rule that p p
1 1 D 1;
and provided examples of calculations involving them. He didn’t use our
notation, but the essential ideas were all there.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 136 — #152
i i
We have focused on Italian mathematicians, but as the sixteenth-century

neared its end, the work of the French mathematician François Viète came
to the fore. Some of his writings are available in a 1983 translation by T.
Richard Witmer under the title The Analytic Art [68]. In In Artem Ana-
lyticem Isagoge, which appeared in 1591 and is translated by Witmer as
Introduction to the Analytic Art, Viète introduced the idea of using letters
for known and unknown quantities, differentiating between the two by us-
ing vowels for unknown quantities and consonants for the known quantities.
This allowed him to treat algebraic problems in generality rather than de-
scribing general methods implicitly through specific examples.
Another of Viète’s contributions, which we studied in Section 5.6, was
the development of a trigonometric approach to cubic equations in the irre-
ducible case that allows us to avoid complex numbers altogether. With A as
his variable and B and D as constants, he studies ([68, p. 174]) the equation
A3 3B 2 A D B 2 D
under the assumption that “B is greater than half of D.” Taking B and D
to be positive, we can check that the condition B > D=2 is the requirement
that the given cubic’s discriminant is positive. He then describes how to
obtain a solution geometrically in terms of two right triangles, one having
an acute angle three times that of the second. Next, Viète illustrates the
method by solving the cubic equations
x3 300x D 432
and
x3 300x D 432:
In [48, pp. 203–205], R.W.D. Nickalls relates this passage of Viète’s
to our more familiar trigonometric view, explaining that “Viète’s approach
stems from his familiarity with the then equivalent of the trigonometric
triple-angle identities, since he himself had established formulae for chords
of multiple arcs in terms of chords of simple arcs, and hence he was aware
that solving a cubic with three real roots was analogous to trisecting an
angle.”
Before moving on, let us recognize the greater significance of Viète’s
work, as he was the first to write down cubic equations (in the irreducible
case) in general form and solve them.
Another French mathematician, Albert Girard (1595–1632), who would
spend most of his life in the Netherlands as a religious refugee, published In-
vention Nouvelle en l’Algèbre in 1629 [32]. It’s a short work, just 64 pages,
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 137 — #153
i i
5.8. History 137
with a central section on algebra that is full of new ideas. We will discuss
Girard’s contributions further in Sections 7.2 and 7.4. For now, we will be
content with a few words about his account of cubic equations.
Girard doesn’t use letters for constants or variables, yet his text is easy to
understand. For example, he divides cubic equations into a variety of cases,
one of which he describes as the equations with “1.3/ equal to .1/ C .0/.”
The parenthetical numbers should be interpreted as powers of x, so that
this refers to equations in which a cube equals a degree-one term plus a
constant, or x 3 D px C q. For this case, Girard provides a “rule for solving
the equation 1.3/ equal to .1/ C .0/ when the cube of a third of the number
of .1/ is larger than the square of half of .0/ with the aid of a table of
sines.” This is, of course, the irreducible case. Without a general notation,
Girard must describe the rule by way of example. The example he uses is
“1.3/ equal to 13.1/ C 12,” which we would write as x 3 D 13x C 12. He
displays a series of calculations that leads to the solution x D 4, using what
is essentially Viète’s approach.
We mentioned John Wallis in passing in Section 4.9 with regard to his
early effort to provide a geometric description of complex numbers. This is
contained in his wonderfully titled 1685 book, A Treatise of Algebra, both
Historical and Practical: Shewing the original, progress, and advancement
thereof, from time to time, and by what steps it hath attained to the heighth
at which now it is; with some additional treatises, which would have great
influence. J.F. Scott’s The Mathematical Work of John Wallis, written in
1938, is a valuable guide to Wallis’s mathematical work, with a chapter
devoted to the Treatise of Algebra [58, pp. 133–165]. Scott’s concluding
appraisal [58, p. 165] is that Wallis’s book “constituted a reservoir from
which contemporary and later algebraists drew much inspiration. It may
be mentioned that this treatise did a great deal towards popularizing the
notation which was now rapidly becoming current in Europe.”
Of particular significance is Wallis’s unreserved adoption of complex
numbers as solutions to algebraic equations. Scott writes [58, pp. 156–157],
“In his quadratic equations he discusses every type, and the rules he evolves
for determining the nature of the roots by a mere inspection of the equation
would not be out of place in a modern text-book. He was quite at home
with imaginaries, and he knew that such roots always occurred in pairs.
Moreover he would not allow the use of the word Impossible as applied to
an equation with imaginary roots. An equation, for example, such as
aa C 8a D 25;
p p
of which the roots are 4 C 16 25 and 4 16 25, ‘imaginaries’ —
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 138 — #154
i i
had hitherto been styled ‘Impossible’. Yet, avers Wallis” (and now we turn
to Wallis’s own writings [69, p. 174]):
Imaginary quantities, when they occur, have been taught to imply an

impossible case; and algebraists have been wont so to teach. Yet is
not this so to be understood . . . . For it was before thought (and so
delivered by diverse algebraists) that whenever (in pursuance of the
resolution) we are reduced to an impossible construction, (such as the
square root of a negative quantity), the case proposed is to be judged
impossible. Which is yet here discovered to be otherwise.
As for instance, the equation aaa 7a D 6 should have for its root
s r s r
3 100 3 100
3C C 3 ;
27 27
which should therefore be judged an impossible case. Yet hath it a real

root, a D 3, beside which it hath also two negatives, a D 1 and
a D 2. And if we change but the sign of the absolute number (which
is the only even place not vacant), the equation
aaa 7a D 6
will have two affirmative roots, a D 1, a D 2 (and one negative root,

a D 3).
Wallis’s example, the equation aaa 7a D 6, should look familiar. It is

the one we used in Exercise 3.12 to illustrate the appearance of complex
numbers in Cardano’s formula.
Half a century later, in the 1739 paper “On the reduction of p radicals
to simpler
p terms, or the extraction of roots of any binomial a C Cb or
aC b,” de Moivre sets himself the problemp [17], [60, p. 447] “to extract
the cube root of the impossible binomial aC b.” He reduces this problem
to solving a reduced cubic equation, but in a different way from how we
proceeded in Exercises 4.13 and 4.14. Rather than quoting from his entirely
readable text [60, p. 447], let’s reproduce his approach as an exercise.
Exercise 5.34. Let a and b be real numbers with b ¤ 0 and suppose x Cyi
is a cube root of a C bi .
(i) Set .x C yi /3 D a C bi , as in Exercise 4.13, and obtain two equations
in x and y by setting the real and imaginary parts equal to each other.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 139 — #155
i i
5.8. History 139
(ii) Square both equations, take their sum, and obtain the equation
x 6 C 3x 4y 2 C 3x 2 y 4 C y 6 D a2 C b 2:
The left side is .x 2 C y 2 /3 .

(iii) Let m be the real cube root of a2 C b 2 and take cube roots of both sides
to obtain x 2 C y 2 D m.
(iv) Substitute m x 2 for y 2 in one of the equations of the first part to get
a reduced cubic equation in x:
4x 3 3mx a D 0:
(v) Calculate the discriminant of .4x 3 3mx a/=4 and use the fact that
b ¤ 0 to show that it is positive.
(vi) Conclude that cube roots of complex numbers can be calculated by
solving reduced cubic equations in the irreducible case.
Following de Moivre, we have converted the calculation of the cube

root of a complex number to the solving of a reduced cubic equation of
irreducible type. At this point, de Moivre observes that “this will best be
done by means of a table
p of sines,” illustrating the process by determining
the cube roots of 81 C 2700. The cubic equation to be solved is
4x 3 63x 81 D 0:
De Moivre suggests that this be “compared with the equation for the cosines,
namely 4x 3 3r 2x D r 2c.” To understand the sense in which this is an
equation for cosines, we can rewrite it as
x 3 x c
4 3 D :
r r r
Taking x=r to be cos and c=r to be cos 3 for a suitable angle , the
equation becomes the trigonometric identity
4 cos3 3 cos D cos 3
of Theorem 5.12.
Following de Moivre again, we use the comparison
p of 4x 3 63x D 81
3 2 2
to 4x 3r x D r c to obtain the values r D 21 and c D 27=7. To find
x, we use the triple cosine identity and the identifications x=r D cos and
c=r D cos 3. Applying the inverse cosine to c=r , dividing by 3, computing
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 140 — #156
i i
the cosine, and multiplying by r yields x. De Moivre does the equivalent,

thereby obtaining the equation’s
p three solutions. From these, he determines
three cube roots of 81 C 2700. (See [60, pp. 447–449] for the complete
discussion.)
In our approach to solving reduced cubic equations, we have relied on
Cardano’s formula to produce a number whose cube root we need to cal-
culate, and in the irreducible case applied de Moivre’s formula to make
the cube root calculation. In his 1739 paper, de Moivre has reversed the
flow. He starts from a complex number whose cube root we want to calcu-
late, produces a reduced cubic equation we wish to solve that falls under
the irreducible case, then takes Viète’s approach to solving the equation.
De Moivre concludes his discussion with the observation that the use of
trigonometry is essential [60, p. 449]:
There have been several authors, and among them the eminent Wallis,
who have thought that those cubic equations which are referred to the
circle, may be solved p by the extraction of the cube root of an imaginary
quantity, and of 81 C 2700, without regard to the table of sines, but
that is a mere fiction and a begging of the question. For on attempting
it, the result always recurs back again to the same question as that first
proposed. And the thing cannot be done directly, without the help of
the table of sines.
He recognizes that computing cube roots of complex numbers and solving
cubic equations in the irreducible case are essentially the same problem. We
can loop back and forth between the two, but to break the cycle, we must
introduce trigonometry.
Let us close our historical account of the cubic by examining Euler’s
treatment in Elements of Algebra [26]. Euler derives Cardano’s formula in
Chapter XII of Section 4, “Of the Rule of Cardan, or of Scipio Ferreo.” His
approach is simple and elegant, relying on the introduction of an associated
quadratic polynomial. Compare the following excerpt [26, pp. 263–264]
with Theorems 5.2 and 5.3 (ignoring the regrettable clash of notation).
p
Whenever we meet with an equation of the form x 3 D 3x 3 pq C
p p
p C q, we know that one of the roots is 3 p C 3 q. Now, we can
p
determine p and q, in such a manner, that both 3 3 pq and p C q
may be quantities equal to determinate numbers; so that we can always
resolve an equation of the third degree, of the kind which we speak of
[i.e., reduced].
Let, in general, the equation x 3 D f x C g be proposed. Here, it will
p
be necessary to compare f with 3 3 pq and g with p C q; that is, we
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 141 — #157
i i
5.8. History 141
p
must determine p and q in such a manner, that 3 3 pq may become
equal to f , and p C q D g; for we then know that one of the roots of
p p
our equation will be x D 3 3 p C 3 3 q.
Following his derivation, Euler presents a sequence of examples of cu-
bic equations with negative discriminant, starting with two for which the
cube root calculations are trivial. He introduces a third example [26, p 265],
x 3 D 6x C 40, with the immediate comment that “x D 4 is one of the
roots.” Applying Cardano’s formula, he expresses the same surprise we did
after Exercise 3.9 on comparing the complicated answer it produces with
the known simpler answer:
Consequently one of the roots will be . . .
p p
q q
3 3
x D 20 C 14 2 C 20 14 2I
which quantity is really = 4, although,

pupon inspection, we
p should not
suppose it. In fact, the cube of 2 C p2 being 20 C 14 p 2, we have,
reciprocally, the cube root of 20 C 14 2 equal to 2 C 2; in the same
p
3 p p p
manner,
p 20 14 2 D 2 2; wherefore our root x D 2 C 2 C
2 2 D 4.
Next Euler solves a non-reduced cubic, discussing the need (in Hewlett’s
translation) to “destroy” the second term and illustrating how to do so. The
resulting reduced cubic is treated like the example above, after which Euler
observes [26, p 268]:
It was, however, by chance, as we have remarked, that we were able,
in the preceding example, to extract the cube root of the binomials that
we obtained, which is the case only when the equation has a rational
root; : : : But when there is no rational root, it is, on the other hand,
impossible to express the root which we obtain in any other way, than
according to the rule of Cardan; so that it is then impossible to apply
reductions. For example, in the equation x 3 D 6x C4, we have : : : x D
p3 p p3 p
2C2 1C 2 2 1, which cannot be otherwise expressed.
Thus, on arriving at the irreducible case, Euler declares that we can go no
further than to leave the solution in such a complicated form.
In contrast to Cardano, Euler was comfortable with the use of complex
numbers. We already quoted a passage from earlier in his book [26, p. 43]
in which he wrote that “nothing prevents us from making use of these imag-
inary numbers, and employing them in calculation.” Perhaps he chose not
to pursue the example further because he preferred to avoid trigonometry as
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 142 — #158
i i
a tool. In a footnote [26, p 268] to Euler’s passage, Bernoulli explains that

the cubic is an example of
the well-known irreducible case; a case which is so much the more
remarkable, as the three roots are then always real. We cannot here
make use of Cardan’s formula, except by applying the methods of ap-
proximation. . . . In the present work of Euler, we are not to look for
all that might have been said on the direct and approximate resolutions
of equations. He had too many curious and important objects, to dwell
long upon this.
We have dwelled long upon this indeed. It is time to move beyond cubics.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 143 — #159
i i
6
Quartic Polynomials
We learned in Section 3.5 that Lodovicio Ferrari discovered a way to solve

quartic equations not long after Cardano’s work on cubic equations, and that
Cardano presented Ferrari’s method in Ars Magna [12]. We will take a brief
look at Ferrari’s approach, then turn to the approach of René Descartes.
Both reduce the solving of a reduced quartic equation to the determination
of the roots of an auxiliary cubic polynomial. A closer look at Descartes’
solution will allow us to obtain a formula due to Euler that expresses the
roots of the reduced quartic in terms of the roots of the auxiliary cubic. In
turn, Euler’s solution leads to a formula for the discriminant of a quartic
polynomial. We will then have our final look at the effectiveness of coeffi-
cients as a tool to glean information about a polynomial’s roots.
6.1 Reduced Quartics

From our study of graphs of polynomials in Section 1.6, we have an idea of
what the graph of a quartic polynomial looks like and the number of roots
it may have. Assuming the quartic is monic, its graph will fall from infinity,
turn one or three times, then rise to infinity. The number of real roots will
depend on the number of turning points and their location above, on, or
below the x-axis. For instance, if there is one turning point, then we are in a
situation similar to that of quadratic polynomials, with two, one, or no real
roots depending on whether the turning point is below, on, or above the x-
axis. If there are three turning points, there are many possibilities. We will
not discuss them all, satisfying ourselves with those that can be illustrated
through one family of examples. The interested reader can use them as a
starting point and complete a survey of the options.
143
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 144 — #160
i i
144 6. Quartic Polynomials
Figure 6.1. Graph of y D x 4 x3 4x 2 C 4x
Consider the infinite family of quartic polynomials x 4 x 3 4x 2 C4x C

e, where e takes on all real number values. Figure 6.1 depicts the graph of
y D x 4 x 3 4x 2 C 4x, corresponding to e D 0. We see from the graph
that this polynomial has four distinct real roots. Or, we see it directly from
x4 x3 4x 2 C 4x D x.x C 2/.x 1/.x 2/:
Imagine allowing e to increase from negative values of e with large ab-
solute value to 0 and on through positive values of e. As e grows, the graph
moves upward in the plane. For a negative value of e that is large in absolute
value, the graph will meet the x-axis in two points and the quartic has two
real roots. As e increases, it assumes the value for which the graph’s one
local maximum is on the x-axis, the case of three real roots. As e increases
further, the local maximum rises above the x-axis, which then intersects the
graph in four points, as illustrated in Figure 6.1. This corresponds to the ex-
istence of four real roots. Then e assumes the value at which the higher of
the two local minima makes contact with the x-axis, giving us once again
a quartic with three real roots. As e continues to increase, the higher local
minimum rises above the x-axis and we have just two real roots. This re-
mains the case until e assumes the value at which the lower local minimum
makes contact with the x-axis. In this case, the quartic has one real root. For
larger e the graph lies entirely above the x-axis and the quartic has no real
roots.
Before analyzing quartic polynomials in general, we need some ele-
mentary facts that are similar to those we obtained to begin our treatment of
cubics.
Exercise 6.1. Given A and B, we know that

.A C B/2 D A2 C 2AB C B 2
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 145 — #161
i i
6.1. Reduced Quartics 145
and
.A C B/3 D A3 C 3A2 B C 3AB 2 C B 3 :
Show that
.A C B/4 D A4 C 4A3B C 6A2B 2 C 4AB 3 C B 4 :
A quartic polynomial of the form

z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s
is called a reduced quartic.
Exercise 6.2. Let

f .x/ D x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e;
for real numbers b, c, d , and e. Given another real number a, let’s see what
happens under the change of variable x D z C a, or z D x a.
(i) Substitute z Ca for x and obtain a polynomial g.z/ in the new variable
z. Write it as
z 4 C Bz 3 C C z 2 C Dz C E
and obtain formulas for the coefficients B, C , D, and E in terms of a
and the coefficients b, c, d , and e.
(ii) There is a choice of a for which B D 0, giving a new polynomial g.z/
that is reduced. Verify that g.z/ is the reduced polynomial described
in Theorem 6.1.
(iii) What is the relation between a root of f .x/ and a root of g.z/?
(iv) Conclude that solving g.z/ D 0 gives solutions of f .x/ D 0.
Theorem 6.1. Let b, c, d , and e be real numbers. Given a quartic polyno-

mial x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e, the change of variable x D z b=4 yields
the reduced quartic polynomial
3b 2
3
3b 4 b 2 c bd

4 2 b bc
z C Cc z C C d zC C Ce :
8 8 2 256 16 4
Exercise 6.3. What is the reduced quartic equation associated to the quar-
tic equation
x 4 C 4x 3 2x C 4 D 0‹
How are the solutions of the reduced quartic equation related to the solu-
tions of the original quartic equation?
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 146 — #162
i i
6.2 Ferrari’s Method

A method for solving quartic equations was first discovered Lodovico Fer-
rari. In recognition of the historical importance of Ferrari’s approach, we
devote this section to it. However, we will not use his approach in the re-
mainder of the chapter. Thus, this section can be omitted.
Suppose that we wish to solve the reduced quartic equation
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s D 0
with real coefficients q, r , and s. Moving the lower-degree terms to the right
to obtain
z 4 C qz 2 D r z s;
we can regard the left side as a quadratic polynomial in z 2 and complete the
square by adding qz 2 C q 2 to both sides. This yields
.z 2 C q/2 D qz 2 C q 2 rz s:
Ferrari’s idea is to introduce an auxiliary term t, which is best thought

of not as a variable but as a to-be-determined real number, and use it to
change the left side from .z 2 C q/2 to .z 2 C q C t/2 . The goal then becomes
to find a value of t that makes the right side a square as well, allowing us
to take square roots of both sides and reduce to a simpler problem. Let’s do
this.
To begin, we add 2.z 2 C q/t C t 2 to both sides of .z 2 C q/2 D qz 2 C
2
q r z s. The left side becomes a square and we obtain the equation
.z 2 C q C t/2 D qz 2 C q 2 rz s C 2.z 2 C q/t C t 2 :
Keep in mind that q, r , and s are specific real numbers, as is t, although

we don’t yet know what t is. The only variable is z. It is natural, then, to
collect terms on the right side of the equation so that it is exhibited as a
quadratic polynomial in z with coefficients involving the constants q, r , s,
and t:
.z 2 C q C t/2 D .q C 2t/z 2 r z C .q 2 s C 2qt C t 2 /:
Our goal is to find a value of t for which the right side becomes the square
of a linear polynomial in z.
We know that a monic quadratic polynomial z 2 C bz C c is the square
of a linear polynomial precisely when it has a real root of multiplicity 2, or
equivalently, when its discriminant b 2 4c is 0. A polynomial of the form
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 147 — #163
i i
6.2. Ferrari’s Method 147
az 2 C bz C c, with a ¤ 0, will factor in the same way as z 2 C .b=a/z C c=a.

Thus, it will be the square of a linear polynomial precisely when .b=a/2
4.c=a/ D 0, or b 2 4ac D 0.
We can apply this to
.q C 2t/z 2 r z C .q 2 s C 2qt C t 2 /
viewed as a quadratic polynomial in z. It will be the square of a linear

polynomial in z if t is chosen so that
. r /2 4.q C 2t/.q 2 s C 2qt C t 2 / D 0:
Rewriting the expression on the left side as a cubic polynomial in the un-
known constant t and multiplying by 1, we find that t must satisfy
8t 3 C .20q/t 2 C .16q 2 8s/t C .4q 3 4qs r 2 / D 0:
Choosing such a t ensures that the quadratic polynomial in z is the square

of a degree-one polynomial, so that both sides of the earlier equation
.z 2 C q C t/2 D .q C 2t/z 2 r z C .q 2 s C 2qt C t 2 /
are squares.
Using the techniques we have learned for solving cubic equations, we
can find t, then factor the quadratic in z as the square of a degree-one poly-
nomial dz C e. In this way, we obtain the quartic equation
.z 2 C q C t/2 D .dz C e/2 :
Taking square roots on both sides, we obtain quadratic equations
z 2 C q C t D dz C e
and
z 2 C q C t D dz e:
Solving for z yields four solutions to the original quartic equation. We (and
Ferrari) have reduced the problem of solving the original quartic equation
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s D 0 to that of solving the cubic equation in t.
Let’s try Ferrari’s approach in an example, one we will pursue only to
the point of obtaining the reduced cubic equation that needs solving.
z 4 C 6z 2 60z C 36 D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 148 — #164
i i
(i) Use Ferrari’s method to show this can be done by finding t satisfying
t 3 C 15t 2 C 36t 450 D 0:
(ii) Change variables to transform the cubic equation to a reduced cubic

equation,
u3 39u 380 D 0:
(iii) Find a solution using Cardano’s formula.

(iv) Explain how to obtain a solution to the original quartic equation.
Let’s work out the next example to conclusion. It is missing both degree
three and degree two terms, so that the cubic equation to solve is already
reduced.
Exercise 6.5. Solve the quartic equation
z4 12z C 3 D 0:
(i) Following Ferrari’s procedure with q D 0, r D 12, and s D 3,

introduce a new variable t and show that the equation takes the form
.z 2 C t/2 D 2tz 2 C 12z C .t 2 3/:
(ii) Show that the right side of this equation will be the square of a degree-
one polynomial in z if t is a solution of the cubic equation
8t 3 24t 144 D 0;
or
t3 3t 18 D 0:
(iii) Use Cardano’s formula to show that one solution is

p p
q q
3 3
t D 9 C 4 5 C 9 4 5:
p
(iv) Use the method of Exercise
p 3.10 to guess that a cube root of 9 C 4 5
has the form a C b 5, obtain two equations in a and b, and guess
values of a and p
b, leading to the p
discovery that the two cube roots we
want are 3=2 C 5=2 and 3=2 5=2. Alternatively, guess that there
is some small positive integer solution to the cubic equation, without
reference to Cardano’s formula, and find it.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 149 — #165
i i
6.3. Descartes’ Method 149
(v) Substitute t into the equation in z and t at the start of the exercise to
obtain
.z 2 C 3/2 D 6z 2 C 12z C 6:
(vi) As Ferrari’s method ensures, the right side of this equation is the square
of a degree-one polynomial in z:
6z 2 C 12z C 6 D 6.z C 1/2 :
(vii) Using this, write the equation as
.z 2 C 3/2 D 6.z C 1/2 :
(viii) Take square roots on both sides to get

p p
z2 6z C .3 6/ D 0
and
p p
z2 C 6z C .3 C 6/ D 0:
(ix) Solve them for z, thereby obtaining four solutions to
z4 12z C 3 D 0:
6.3 Descartes’ Method

We turn in this section to an approach to solving reduced quartic equations
introduced by René Descartes. The idea is to factor a reduced quartic poly-
nomial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s as a product of quadratic polynomials with real
coefficients. If we can do this, then we can find the quartic’s roots by apply-
ing the quadratic formula to its quadratic factors.
Let’s first treat a special case, one for which we will find the desired
factorization, although the case is sufficiently simple that we could find the
roots directly.
Exercise 6.6. Let q and s be real numbers and consider the polynomial
z 4 C qz 2 C s.
(i) Assume that q 2 4s 0. Show that z 4 C qz 2 C s factors as .z 2 C
l /.z 2 C m/.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 150 — #166
i i
(ii) Assume that q 2 4s < 0 and observe that this implies s > 0. Verify
that a factorization of the form .z 2 C l /.z 2 C m/ can’t exist. Therefore,
to show that z 4 C qz 2 C s factors as a product of quadratic polynomials
with real coefficients, we will instead seek a factorization of the more
general form
z 4 C qz 2 C s D .z 2 C kz C l /.z 2 C k 0 z C m/;
where the coefficients k, k 0 , l , and m are real and k and k 0 are non-
zero. Our search will occupy the remainder of the exercise.
(iii) Multiply the two quadratic polynomials, obtain expressions for the co-
efficients of each power of z, and show that for equality to hold, we
must have k 0 D k and l D m. Thus, we can simplify our task and
look for a factorization of the form
z 4 C qz 2 C s D .z 2 C kz C l /.z 2 kz C l /:
(iv) Show next that for equality to hold, k and l must satisfy l 2 D s and
2l D k 2 C q. We view these as equations in the unknowns k and l ,
with q and s regarded as known constants.
(v) Square both sides of 2l D k 2 C q, substitute s for l 2, and show that k

must satisfy
k 4 C 2qk 2 C .q 2 4s/ D 0:
(vi) This is a quadratic equation in k 2 . Set j D k 2 and write it as
j 2 C 2qj C .q 2 4s/ D 0:
(vii) Check that the discriminant of j 2 C 2qj C .q 2 4s/ as a quadratic

polynomial in j is 16s, which is positive. Deduce that the quadratic
polynomial’s roots are real and distinct. Using the assumption that q 2
4s < 0, deduce that there is a positive real root. (Recall Theorem 5.13.)
(viii) Let k and k represent the square roots of the positive root. Conclude
that k and k give a value for l and allow us to factor z 4 C qz 2 C s as
a product of quadratic polynomials with real coefficients.
Exercise 6.6 shows that a quartic polynomial of the form z 4 C qz 2 C s

factors as a product of quadratic polynomials. We can use the factorization
to find the roots of z 4 C qz 2 C s. Alternatively, we can find them directly.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 151 — #167
i i
Exercise 6.7. Use the quadratic formula to show that the roots of z 4 C
qz 2 C s are s p
q q 2 4s
˙ ˙ :
2 2
The argument in Exercise 6.6 showing when q 2 4s < 0 that z 4 C

2
qz C s can be factored as a product of quadratic polynomials with real
coefficients can be extended to quartic polynomials with non-zero linear
term.
Exercise 6.8. Let q, r , and s be real numbers, with r ¤ 0, and consider

the polynomial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s.
(i) We wish to find real numbers k, k 0 , l , and m for which z 4 C qz 2 C
r z C s factors as
.z 2 C kz C l /.z 2 C k 0 z C m/:
Show that for this to hold, we must have k 0 D k. Thus we can look
for a factorization of the form
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s D .z 2 C kz C l /.z 2 kz C m/:
Check also, since r ¤ 0, that k must be non-zero.

(ii) Multiply the two quadratic polynomials and show that for equality to
hold, k, l , and m must satisfy
l Cm k 2 D qI k.m l / D r I l m D s:
(iii) Since k can’t be zero, we are free to divide by it. Do so in the second
equation and obtain from the first two equations the new equations
r
m C l D q C k2I m lD :
k
Using these, obtain
r r
2m D q C k 2 C I 2l D q C k 2 :
k k
Conclude that l and m are determined once k is known.
(iv) We can multiply both sides of the equation l m D s by 4 to obtain
.2l /.2m/ D 4s. Substitute the expressions for 2l and 2m and obtain
k 6 C 2qk 4 C .q 2 4s/k 2 r 2 D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 152 — #168
i i
(v) This is a cubic equation in k 2 . Set j D k 2 and write it as
j 3 C 2qj 2 C .q 2 4s/j r 2 D 0:
(vi) Deduce from Theorem 5.17 that the cubic equation in j has a positive
real solution.
(vii) Let k and k represent the square roots of this solution. Conclude that
k and k give values for l and m and allow us to factor z 4 C qz 2 C
r zCs as a product of quadratic polynomials with real coefficients. The
roots of the quadratic polynomials yield the solutions of the original
quartic equation.
(viii) If s D 0, then solving the original quartic equation reduces to solving

z 3 C qz C r D 0. The degree-six polynomial in k becomes k 6 C
2qk 4 C q 2 k 2 r 2 , which factors as .k 3 C qk C r /.k 3 C qk r /.
Hence, setting it equal to 0 and solving for k is essentially the same as
solving the original equation.
We have obtained a procedure for finding roots of quartic polynomials.

First we pass from a quartic polynomial
x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e
to its associated reduced quartic polynomial
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s:
If r ¤ 0, we write the cubic polynomial
j 3 C 2qj 2 C .q 2 4s/j r 2;
which is called the resolvent cubic of the quartic z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s. If r D 0

and q 2 4s < 0, we can work with the same cubic, or its quadratic factor
j 2 C 2qj C .q 2 4s/. We find a positive real root of the resolvent cubic,
take its square roots, use them to factor the reduced quartic as a product
of quadratic polynomials with real coefficients, find their roots, and thereby
obtain the roots of the original quartic polynomial. If r D 0 and q 2 4s 0,
we obtain a factorization of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s directly as a product of
quadratics, using the quadratic formula.
We restate some of this discussion in the next theorem.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 153 — #169
i i
Theorem 6.2. Let z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s be a reduced quartic polynomial with

real coefficients. Assume that r ¤ 0 or that r D 0 and q 2 4s < 0. Let
j 3 C 2qj 2 C .q 2 4s/j r2
be the given quartic’s associated resolvent cubic polynomial and let k and
k be square roots of a positive real root of the resolvent cubic. Then z 4 C
qz 2 C r z C s factors as

1 r 1 r
z 2 C kz C q C k2 z 2 kz C q C k2 C :
2 k 2 k
The roots of z 4 Cqz 2 Cr zCs are the roots of the two quadratic polynomials
in the factorization.
The procedure for finding roots of quartic polynomials can be long and
complicated, but in principle it works. The hardest part is likely to be the
calculation of roots of the resolvent cubic, a problem we already understand.
Let’s try the procedure on some examples. They are designed so that
the polynomials arising as resolvent cubics have positive real roots that are
easy to find. Thus, in solving the quartic equations, we can focus on the
new features of the procedure and not get distracted by the now-familiar
difficulties of the cubic.
Exercise 6.9. Find the four solutions of
z4 3z 2 C 6z 2 D 0:
To do so, write the resolvent cubic, find a real root by guessing (squares of
integers are good guesses), take its two square roots, factor z 4 3z 2 C6z 2
as a product of two quadratic polynomials, and find their roots.
z4 2z 2 8z 3D0
by following the procedure outlined in Exercise 6.9.
Our third example is the quartic equation of Exercise 6.5. We will solve
it using Descartes’ method.
z4 12z C 3 D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 154 — #170
i i
In this case, since there is no square term, the resolvent cubic will be a
reduced cubic, so that Cardano’s formula can be applied directly. Find a
real root by using Cardano’s formula or by guessing. (Guessing may not
lead to a root that is the square of an integer, but it may lead to a positive
integer.) Then proceed as in the preceding exercises. Compare the solutions
to the result in Exercise 6.5 to make sure they are the same.
We have found that a reduced quartic polynomial
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s
with real coefficients factors as a product of quadratic polynomials with real

coefficients. From this, we can obtain information on the nature of the roots
of any quartic polynomial.
Theorem 6.3. Any quartic polynomial f .x/ with real coefficients factors
as a product of quadratic polynomials with real coefficients. Exactly one of
the following possibilities occurs for the roots of f .x/:
(i) f .x/ has four distinct real roots.
(ii) f .x/ has two distinct real roots and a pair of non-real complex conju-
gate roots.
(iii) f .x/ has no real roots, but two pairs of distinct non-real complex con-
jugate roots.
(iv) f .x/ has repeated roots.
Exercise 6.12. Deduce Theorem 6.3 for reduced quartic polynomials from
Exercise 6.6 and Theorem 6.2. Then explain why it holds for quartic poly-
nomials in general.
6.4 Euler’s Formula

We can refine Descartes’ method of solving a reduced quartic equation (Ex-
ercise 6.8 and Theorem 6.2) to obtain a formula for its solutions in terms of
the solutions of the associated resolvent cubic equation. The formula is due
to Euler, who obtained it directly rather than as a consequence of Descartes’
result. We will be content to derive it from Descartes’ factorization. Euler’s
approach will be discussed at the end of Section 6.8.
We consider once again the reduced quartic equation
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s D 0:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 155 — #171
i i
6.4. Euler’s Formula 155
In light of the explicit description of its solutions in Exercise 6.7 when r D

0, let’s assume that r ¤ 0. Suppose the three solutions of the resolvent cubic
equation
j 3 C 2qj 2 C .q 2 4s/j r 2 D 0:
are j1, j2 , and j3 . Our goal is to describe the roots of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s in

terms of j1, j2 , and j3 .
We have already shown that at least one of the resolvent cubic’s roots
is positive and real. Let’s assume it is j1 , and let k1 and k1 be its square
roots. Because j1 is positive, k1 and k1 are real. The other two roots of
the resolvent cubic, j2 and j3 , may be real or may be complex conjugates.
Whether or not j2 and j3 are real, their square roots are opposites of
each other. Thus we can write k2 and k2 for the square roots of j2 and k3
and k3 for the square roots of j3 .
Do not be fooled by the notation. Seeing the pair ki and ki , you should
not assume that ki is positive or that ki is negative. In fact, they may not
even be real. The notation should convey only that whatever they are, each
is the opposite of the other.
Exercise 6.13. Use the notation and assumptions of the preceding discus-
sion.
(i) Explain why there are eight possible choices for the triple of numbers
.k1 ; k2; k3 /, depending on choice of signs.
(ii) Show that

j1 C j2 C j3 D 2q; j1 j2j3 D r 2 :
(Hint: Use Theorem 5.14 on how the roots and coefficients of a cubic
polynomial are related.)
(iii) Deduce that the product k1 k2 k3 equals either r or r , depending on

which square roots of the ji ’s are chosen as the ki ’s. More precisely,
deduce that four of the eight choices of .k1 ; k2 ; k3/ result in k1 k2 k3 D
r and that the other four choices result in k1 k2 k3 D r .
Exercise 6.14. Continue within the setting of Exercise 6.13. For definite-
ness, let’s fix the choice of triple of square roots .k1 ; k2 ; k3 / to be one of
the four satisfying k1 k2 k3 D r .
(i) Given our choice of k1 as one of the square roots of the positive real
number j1 , we obtain from Theorem 6.2 the factorization of z 4 Cqz 2 C
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 156 — #172
i i
r z C s as

2 1 r 1 r
z C k1 z C q C k12 z2 k1 z C 2
q C k1 C :
2 k1 2 k1
Use the quadratic formula to obtain expressions for the roots of

1 r
z 2 C k1 z C q C k12 :
2 k1
Show that
s
k1 1 r
zD ˙ k12 2 q C k12 :
2 2 k1
(ii) Use the formulas from Exercise 6.13 for 2q and r in terms of the ki ’s
as well as the choice of the triple .k1 ; k2; k3 / to satisfy k1 k2 k3 D r
to write this equality as
k1 1p
zD ˙ .k2 k3 /2 :
2 2
(iii) Conclude that the roots of the quadratic factor are
1 1
zD . k1 C k2 k3 / and z D . k1 k2 C k3 /:
2 2
(iv) Follow the same procedure to find the roots of

2 1 2 r
z k1 z C q C k1 C
2 k1
and show that you get
1 1
zD .k1 C k2 C k3 / and zD .k1 k2 k3 /:
2 2
(v) Conclude that once the three roots j1, j2 , j3 of the resolvent cubic
polynomial are found, the roots of the quartic polynomial can be ex-
pressed in terms of square roots of j1 , j2 , and j3 , as described in The-
orem 6.4.
Theorem 6.4. Let q, r , and s be real numbers with r ¤ 0. Let j1 , j2 , and

j3 be the roots of the resolvent cubic polynomial
j 3 C 2qj 2 C .q 2 4s/j r2
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 157 — #173
i i
associated with the quartic polynomial
Then the roots of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s are the four sums

1 p p p
j1 C j2 C j3
2
p p p
arising from the choices of square roots j1 , j2 , j3 that satisfy
p p p
j1 j2 j3 D r:
Let’s solve two quartic equations using Theorem 6.4. The equations
have been chosen so that the roots of the resolvent cubic polynomials are
easily found by trial and error.
Exercise 6.15. Find all four solutions of

p 1
z 4 3z 2 C 6z D0
2
and all four solutions of
p 1
z4 3z 2 6z D 0:
2
In the last exercise, the two quartic equations have the same resolvent
cubic equation. This is a special case of a general phenomenon.
Exercise 6.16. Explain why the quartic equations
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s D 0
and
z 4 C qz 2 rz C s D 0
have the same resolvent cubic equation. Describe how the solutions of the
first are related to the solutions of the second.
6.5 The Discriminant

The discriminant of a quadratic or cubic polynomial is defined as the square
of the product of differences of the roots. The discriminant of a quartic
polynomial
x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 158 — #174
i i
is defined in the same way. Suppose its roots are r1 , r2 , r3 , and r4 . Then its
discriminant is the product
.r1 r2 /2 .r1 r3 /2 .r1 r4 /2 .r2 r3 /2 .r2 r4/2 .r3 r4 /2 :
Because the root differences are squared, we get the same result regardless
of how the roots are ordered.
For quadratic and cubic polynomials, the discriminant is important for
two reasons. First, its sign gives us information on the nature of the roots:
how many are real numbers and how many are non-real complex numbers.
Second, there is a formula expressing the discriminant in terms of the co-
efficients of the polynomial, allowing us to calculate the discriminant from
the coefficients and thereby obtain information about the roots from the co-
efficients alone.
We will show for a quartic polynomial that the discriminant gives in-
formation on the nature of the roots, although not as complete as in the
quadratic and cubic cases, and that it can be calculated from the coefficients.
Exercise 6.17. In this exercise, we will find out what the discriminant of
a quartic polynomial tells us about the nature of its roots. Let f .x/ be the
polynomial, with discriminant , and let r1, r2 , r3 , and r4 be its roots.
(i) Check that D 0 precisely when at least two of the roots coincide.
(ii) Assume in the remainder of the exercise that the four roots are dis-
tinct, so that ¤ 0. From Theorem 6.3, there are three possibilities
for the roots: all are real, two are real and two are non-real complex
conjugates, or there are two pairs of non-real complex conjugates.
(iii) Show that if all four roots are real, then > 0.
(iv) Suppose two roots are real and two are complex conjugates. Show that
< 0. (Hint: The product of a non-zero complex number and its
conjugate is a positive real number. Name the four roots r , s, a C
bi , and a bi , where r , s, a, and b are real numbers. There are six
root differences. Four of the six differences occur as pairs of conjugate
complex numbers, so that their products are real. One of the remaining
root differences is real and the other is pure imaginary. From this it
follows that is negative.)
(v) Suppose that the four roots occur in two pairs of non-real complex
conjugates. Show that > 0. (Hint: Pair four of the differences so
that they are conjugates and their products are real. The other two root
differences should be pure imaginary.)
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 159 — #175
i i
(vi) Show that the converses of the statements in (iii)–(v) hold; that is,
prove Theorem 6.5. (Hint: As in Exercises 4.7 and 5.7, these follow
from the statements themselves by an elementary logical argument.)
Theorem 6.5. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of degree 4 with discriminant .

(i) If is positive, then f .x/ has four distinct roots. Either they are all
real or they are all non-real, in which case they form two complex
conjugate pairs.
(ii) If D 0, then f .x/ has a root occurring with multiplicity at least 2.
(iii) If is negative, then f .x/ has four distinct roots. Two are real and
two form a complex conjugate pair.
When the discriminant is positive, Theorem 6.5 does not completely

settle the nature of the roots. Theorem 6.9 will describe how to make further
use of the coefficients to determine whether the roots are all real or all non-
real.
We wish to calculate in terms of the coefficients of the polynomial.
We begin with the special case of a reduced quartic with no linear term.
Exercise 6.18. Let q and s be real numbers. Use the description of the
roots of
z 4 C qz 2 C s
in Exercise 6.7 to calculate the discriminant, obtaining Theorem 6.6.
Theorem 6.6. Let q and s be real numbers. The discriminant of z 4 Cqz 2 Cs

is given by
D 16s.q 2 4s/2 D 128q 2s 2 C 16q 4 s C 256s 3:
The key to computing the discriminant of a general reduced quartic

polynomial is to relate it to the discriminant of the quartic’s resolvent cubic.
Exercise 6.19. Let q, r , and s be real numbers, with r ¤ 0.

(i) Using the notation we employed in Exercise 6.14, write the roots r1 ,
r2 , r3 , and r4 of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s as halves of sums of ˙ki . Show
that the six root differences, up to sign, are
k1 C k2 ; k1 C k3 ; k2 C k3 ;
k1 k2 ; k1 k3 ; k2 k3 :
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 160 — #176
i i
(ii) Deduce that

D .k12 k22 /2 .k12 k32 /2 .k22 k32 /2 :
(iii) The ki ’s are the square roots of the solutions j1, j2 , j3 of the resolvent
cubic equation. Using the ji ’s, write the equation for as
D .j1 j2 /2 .j1 j3 /2 .j2 j3 /2 :
Since the ji ’s are by definition the roots of the resolvent cubic poly-
nomial, the product on the right side is in fact the discriminant of the
resolvent cubic.
Since the discriminant of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s (r ¤ 0) coincides with the

discriminant of its resolvent cubic, we can compute it using our results on
discriminants of cubics. Let’s do this in a simple special case first.
Exercise 6.20. Let r and s be real numbers with r ¤ 0.

(i) Check that the resolvent cubic of z 4 C r z C s is the reduced cubic
j3 4sj r 2:
(ii) Use the formula for the discriminant of a reduced cubic polynomial
y 3 C py C q in terms of p and q to show that its discriminant is
256s 3 27r 4 :
(iii) Deduce that 256s 3 27r 4 is the discriminant of z 4 C r z C s also.
Exercise 6.21. Compute the discriminants of the quartic polynomials be-

low and say what you can about their number of real roots.
(i) z 4 C z C 1.
(ii) z 4 C z 1.
4
(iii) z C z C s. (The answer depends on s.)
We now obtain a formula for the discriminant of a general reduced quar-

tic polynomial.
Exercise 6.22. Let q, r , and s be real numbers, with r ¤ 0.

(i) The resolvent cubic of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s has coefficients 2q, q 2 4s,
and r 2. Use the formula in Theorem 5.6 for the discriminant of x 3 C
bx 2 C cx C d , substitute for b, c, and d , and obtain a complicated
expression in q, r , and s for the discriminant of the resolvent cubic.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 161 — #177
i i
(ii) Conclude that it is also the discriminant of the reduced quartic polyno-
mial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s with which we began.
(iii) Expand and simplify the expression in q, r , and s. Combine with The-
orem 6.6 to conclude that Theorem 6.7 holds.
Theorem 6.7. The discriminant of the reduced quartic polynomial z 4 C

qz 2 C r z C s is given by
D 144qr 2s 128q 2s 2 4q 3 r 2 C 16q 4 s 27r 4 C 256s 3:
Exercise 6.23. Compute the discriminants of the cubic polynomials below.

What can be said about their number of real roots?
(i) z 4 3z 2 C 6z 2.
(ii) z 4 2z 28z 3.
p
(iii) z 4
3z C 6z 12 .
2
The discriminant of an arbitrary quartic polynomial can be computed,

although the process is laborious.
Exercise 6.24. Consider the quartic polynomial
x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e:
From Exercise 6.2 and Theorem 6.1, the change of variable x D y .b=4/
transforms x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e into a polynomial of the form z 4 C
qz 2 C r z C s.
(i) Verify, as in Exercise 5.10, that although the roots of x 4 C bx 3 C
cx 2 C dx C e and the roots of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s are not the same,
their differences are.
(ii) Deduce that the discriminant of x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e is the same
as the discriminant of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s.
(iii) Conclude that a formula for the discriminant of x 4 Cbx 3 Ccx 2 CdxCe
in terms of b, c, d , and e can be found by substituting into the formula
for the discriminant of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s the expressions given by
Theorem 6.1 for q, r , and s in terms of b, c, d , and e.
(iv) Carry out this calculation, simplify, and conclude that Theorem 6.8
holds.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 162 — #178
i i
Theorem 6.8. The discriminant of the quartic polynomial x 4 C bx 3 C

cx 2 C dx C e is given by
D 18bcd 3 C 18b 3cde 80bc 2de 6b 2 d 2 e C 144cd 2e

C 144b 2ce 2 128c 2 e 2 192bde 2 C b 2 c 2 d 2 4b 3 d 3
4c 3d 2 4b 2c 3 e C 16c 4e 27d 4 27b 4e 2 C 256e 3:
6.6 The Nature of the Roots

We saw in Theorem 6.5 that the discriminant of a quartic polynomial gives
us partial information on the nature of its roots. In this section, we will
do better by supplementing the discriminant with other expressions in the
coefficients. We know for example that a quartic with positive discriminant
has either four distinct real roots or four distinct non-real roots occurring in
complex conjugate pairs. We will refine this, then turn to a closer analysis
of quartic polynomials with zero discriminant.
z 4 C qz 2 C s
and assume its discriminant is positive. We wish to determine, in terms

of q and s, whether the roots are all real or all non-real.
(i) Use the fact that > 0 and the formula for (Theorem 6.6) to deduce
that s > 0.
(ii) Deduce that the roots of z 4 C qz 2 C s are non-zero, and that they
will all be real precisely when the roots of the quadratic polynomial
t 2 C qt C s are real and positive.
(iii) Using Theorem 5.13 and the fact that s > 0, deduce that this occurs
precisely when q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0.
Next we examine reduced quartic polynomials with non-zero linear term.
Assume that its discriminant is positive and that r ¤ 0.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 163 — #179
i i
6.6. The Nature of the Roots 163
(i) Deduce, since is also the discriminant of the resolvent cubic poly-
nomial
j 3 C 2qj 2 C .q 2 4s/j r 2 ;
that its roots j1, j2 , and j3 are real and distinct.
(ii) From Theorem 5.14, deduce that
j1 j2 j3 D r 2 :
(iii) Conclude that either all the roots ji are positive or one is positive and
the other two are negative.
(iv) From Theorem 5.16, deduce that the ji are all positive precisely when
q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0:
(v) If the ji are all positive, then their square roots ˙ki are all real num-
bers. Conclude from Theorem 6.4 that the four roots of the quartic
z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s are all real.
(vi) Suppose j1 is positive and j2 and j3 are negative. Conclude that the
two square roots ˙k1 are real while ˙k2 and ˙k3 are pure imaginary.
Show in this case that the four roots of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s are all
non-real complex numbers.
(vii) Conclude that the roots of z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s are all real precisely when
q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0.
Combining the results of Exercises 6.25 and 6.26, we obtain:
Theorem 6.9. The roots of a reduced quartic polynomial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s

with positive discriminant are all real if q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0, and all
non-real otherwise.
This result is due to Lagrange, who stated it in his Traité de la Résolution

des Équations Numériques de Tous les Degrés [39, p. 68], which first ap-
peared in 1798.
Exercise 6.27. For each of the quartic polynomials, use the discriminant
and the coefficients to decide how many roots are real.
(i) z 4 C z C 1.
(ii) z 4 C z 1.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 164 — #180
i i
(iii) z 4 C z C s. (The answer depends on s.)

(iv) z 4 3z 2 C 6z 2.
4 2
(v) z 2z 8z 3.
p
(vi) z 4 3z 2 C 6z 12 .
A version of Theorem 6.9 for arbitrary quartic polynomials is easily

derived. A polynomial x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e has the same discriminant
as its associated reduced quartic polynomial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s. Moreover,
the two are related through a change of variable by the real number b=4,
as described in Theorem 6.1. Hence, if their shared discriminant is positive,
then both have all real roots or all non-real roots. Which of the two occurs,
according to Theorem 6.9, is determined by the signs of q and q 2 4s, and
these can be expressed in terms of b, c, d , and e, as in Theorem 6.1. This
yields a theorem describing whether the roots of x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e
are all real or all non-real in terms of b, c, d , and e.
Combining this with Theorem 6.5, we can decide from a quartic polyno-
mial’s coefficients when it has roots that are real and distinct, non-real and
distinct, or a mix of real and non-real but distinct. The remaining possibility,
which occurs when the quartic has zero discriminant, is that of a repeated
root. We conclude our development of the quartic with an examination of
this case, leaving many of the details for the reader to work out.
Once again, we look first at quartics whose linear term is zero, recalling
from Theorem 6.6 that z 4 C qz 2 C s has discriminant 16s.q 2 4s/2 . Hence,
for the discriminant to be 0, either s D 0 or q 2 4s D 0.
Theorem 6.10. Let z 4 C qz 2 C s be a quartic polynomial with zero dis-

criminant.
(i) Assume s D 0. Then z 4 C qz 2 factors as z 2 .z 2 C q/.
(a) If q D 0, then 0 is a root of multiplicity 4.
(b) If q ¤ 0, then 0 is a root of multiplicity 2 and the square roots of
q are roots of multiplicity 1, real if q < 0 and pure imaginary if
q > 0.
(ii) Assume s ¤ 0, so that q 2 4s D 0 and q ¤ 0. Then z 4 C qz 2 C s
factors as .z 2 C q=2/2 .
(a) If q < 0, then z 4 C qz 2 C s has two real roots of multiplicity 2,
each the other’s opposite.
(b) If q > 0, then z 4 C qz 2 C s has two pure imaginary roots of
multiplicity 2, each the other’s opposite.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 165 — #181
i i
6.6. The Nature of the Roots 165
Exercise 6.28. Prove Theorem 6.10
To continue, we need the quartic analogue of Theorem 5.14, which de-

scribes the coefficients of a cubic polynomial in terms of its roots.
Theorem 6.11. Let x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e be a quartic polynomial with

real coefficients b, c, d , and e, and suppose its roots are r1 , r2 , r3 , and r4 .
Then
b D r1 r2 r3 r4 ;
c D Cr1 r2 C r1 r3 C r1 r4 C r2 r3 C r2r4 C r3r4 ;
d D r1 r2 r3 r1 r2 r4 r1 r3 r4 r2 r3 r4 ;
e D Cr1 r2r3 r4 :
Exercise 6.29. Prove Theorem 6.11. (Hint: Use the factorization of x 4 C

bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e as .x r1 /.x r2 /.x r3 /.x r4/.)
Theorem 6.11 tells us in particular that the sum of the roots of a reduced
quartic polynomial is 0. We can now complete our analysis of the roots of a
such a polynomial when it has zero discriminant.
Theorem 6.12. Let z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s be a reduced quartic polynomial

with zero discriminant.
(i) If z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s has a root of multiplicity 4, or two roots of
multiplicity 2, or 0 as a root of multiplicity 2, then r D 0 and the roots
are as described in Theorem 6.10.
(ii) Assume r ¤ 0. Then z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s has either a non-zero real root

of multiplicity 3 and a real root of multiplicity 1 or a non-zero real root
of multiplicity 2 and two roots of multiplicity 1.
(a) If q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0, the roots are all real. If q 2 C 12s D 0,
there is a non-zero real root a of multiplicity 3 and 3a is a root
of multiplicity 1. If q 2 C 12s ¤ 0, there is a non-zero real root a
of multiplicity 2 and there are two real roots of the form a C c
and a c for some non-zero real number c with c ¤ ˙2a.
(b) If it is not the case that q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0, then there is a
non-zero real root a of multiplicity 2 and there are two complex
conjugate roots of the form a C bi and a bi , for some non-
zero real number b.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 166 — #182
i i

(i) From Theorem 6.3, if a non-real complex number occurs as a quartic’s
root, so does its conjugate. Using this and Theorem 6.11, prove (i) by
calculating r in terms of the roots. (Remember, the roots add to 0.)
(ii) Assume r ¤ 0. Show that there is a non-zero real root a of multiplicity

2 or 3.
(iii) Show that if all the roots are real, they have the form a; a; aCc; a
c for some non-zero real number c, but if they are not all real, they have
the form a; a; a C bi; a bi for some non-zero real number b.
(iv) Use Theorem 6.11 to calculate q, r and s in terms of the roots. Verify
that q < 0 and q 2 4s > 0 if the roots are all real, but not otherwise.
(v) Compute q 2 C 12s in terms of the roots and show that it is the square
of a simple expression. Check that it can’t be 0 unless the roots are all
real, in which case it is 0 precisely when c D ˙2a. This is exactly the
case of a multiplicity 3 root.
In the case of a quartic polynomial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s with zero discrim-

inant and r ¤ 0, Theorem 6.12 focuses attention on the quantity q 2 C 12s.
Whether it is zero or not determines whether the polynomial has a triple
root or not. A similar result holds for z 4 C qz 2 C s: for its discriminant to
be zero, either s D 0 or q 2 4s D 0. Either way, if q 2 C 12s D 0, then
q D s D 0, and conversely. Thus, q 2 C12s D 0 precisely when z 4 Cqz 2 Cs
has a quadruple root. This yields the following theorem.
Theorem 6.13. The polynomial z 4 C qz 2 C r z C s has a root of multiplicity

3 or 4 precisely when D 0 and q 2 C 12s D 0.
We can use Theorem 6.1 on change of variable to extend our results

on reduced quartic polynomials with zero discriminant to arbitrary quartic
polynomials with zero discriminant. As one example, we obtain:
Theorem 6.14. The polynomial x 4 C bx 3 C cx 2 C dx C e has a root of

multiplicity 3 or 4 precisely when D 0 and c 2 3bd C 12e D 0.
These theorems provide our final illustration of the theme that a poly-
nomial’s coefficients encode rich information on its roots.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 167 — #183
i i
6.7. Cubic and Quartic Reprise 167
6.7 Cubic and Quartic Reprise

We close our treatment of cubic and quartic polynomials with three exer-
cises that provide an opportunity to review what we have learned. In each
exercise, the reader is given a list of items to address and asked to write
an essay. The essay should be seamless, treating the items in an integrated
manner rather than separately and in isolation.
Exercise 6.32. Write an essay on solving cubic equations. Illustrate by

computing solutions to
x 3 C 6x 2 C 3x C 18 D 0
and
x3 3x 2 10x C 24 D 0:
Interweave a concrete treatment of the equations with the general discus-
sion, including the following points.
(i) The reduction of arbitrary cubic equations to reduced cubic equations,
so that Cardano’s formula can be applied.
(ii) How Cardano’s formula can be used to obtain not just one but three
solutions to the reduced cubic equation. In particular, explain which
cube roots to pair in the formula in order to obtain the three solutions.
(iii) How to compute cube roots of non-real complex numbers.
(iv) How to sidestep such computations by relying instead on trigonometric
and inverse trigonometric functions.
Exercise 6.33. Write an essay on solving quartic equations. Illustrate by

computing solutions to the quartic equations
x4 4x 3 C 3x 2 C 8x 10 D 0
and
x4 42x 2 C 64x C 105 D 0:
Interweave a concrete treatment of the equations with the general discus-
sion, including the following points.
(i) The reduction of arbitrary quartic equations to reduced quartic equa-
tions, and its application to the first quartic.
(ii) The solving of a reduced quartic equation, such as the one obtained,
by writing the reduced quartic polynomial in it as a product of two
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 168 — #184
i i
quadratic polynomials with unknown coefficients, obtaining equations

that the coefficients must satisfy, and reducing the solution of the equa-
tions to the problem of solving a cubic equation.
(iii) Solving the cubic equation in the example by guessing, using the so-
lution to obtain a factorization of the quartic polynomial as a product
of quadratic polynomials, obtaining solutions to the reduced quartic
equation, and then finding solutions to the original quartic equation.
(iv) A description of the general form of the cubic equation to solve in
studying a reduced quartic polynomial, illustrating this with the second
example and obtaining
j3 84j 2 C 1344j 4096 D 0:
(v) The observation, after guessing a solution to this cubic equation, that
we can use the procedure described for the first quartic to factor the
second one as a product of two quadratic polynomials, followed by
an explanation that we can instead describe the roots of the reduced
quartic in terms of the three solutions of the cubic equation.
(vi) A list of eight candidates for solutions to the original quartic equation
in terms of the three solutions to the cubic equation, and an explanation
of which four to choose. (Provide an explanation that does not depend
on substituting all eight candidates in the original equation.)
(vii) A description of a quartic equation whose solutions are the other four
candidates, and an explanation of why they are solutions.
(viii) A discussion of how these ideas can be used to solve any quartic equa-
tion, once a method is available for solving cubic equations.
Exercise 6.34. Write an essay about the role the discriminant plays in un-
derstanding the solutions of quadratic, cubic, and quartic equations. Ad-
dress the following issues.
(i) The definition of the discriminant of a polynomial of degree 2, 3, or 4
in terms of its roots, and the information it gives about the roots.
(ii) The formula for the discriminant of a polynomial of degree 2, 3, or 4
in terms of its coefficients, and how the formulas make it possible to
obtain information about the roots from the coefficients.
(iii) The quadratic formula for the roots of a quadratic polynomial and the
appearance of the discriminant within the formula.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 169 — #185
i i
6.8. History 169
(iv) Cardano’s formula for the roots of a reduced cubic polynomial and the
appearance of the discriminant within the formula.
(v) The way in which the sign of the discriminant of a cubic polynomial
affects the calculations in Cardano’s formula, with the need to compute
cube roots of non-real complex numbers in certain cases.
(vi) How to combine information from the discriminant of a quartic poly-
nomial with information from the quartic’s coefficients to refine our
understanding of the nature of the quartic’s roots.
6.8 History
Lodovico Ferrari was the first person to develop a method for solving quar-
tic equations. We already introduced him in Section 3.5, learning that he
was Cardano’s assistant, that Cardano described his quartic solution in Ars
Magna, and that he participated in the famous dispute in 1548 with Tartaglia.
Let us look at Cardano’s presentation of Ferrari’s work before moving on to
contributions of two intellectual giants from the following centuries, René
Descartes and Leonhard Euler.
Cardano presents the quartic solution in the penultimate chapter of Ars
Magna, making the following transition [12, p. 237]:
There is another rule, more noble than the preceding. It is Lodovico
Ferrari’s, who gave it to me on my request. Through it we have all the
solutions for equations of the fourth power, square, first power, and
number, or of the fourth power, cube, square, and number, and I set
them out here in order.
What Cardano sets out are twenty families of quartic equations, depending
on the signs of the coefficients.
After describing a procedure for handling the equations, Cardano works
nine examples. The first example is introduced by [12, p. 239]:
For example, divide 10 into three proportional parts, the product of the
first and second of which is 6. This was proposed by Zuanne de Tonini
de Coi, who said it would not be solved. I said it could, though I did not
yet know the method [for doing so]. This was discovered by Ferrari.
Let the mean be x. The first, then, will be 6=x and the third will be
x 3=6. These equal 10. Multiplying all terms by 6x, we will have
60x D x 4 C 6x 2 C 36:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 170 — #186
i i
Cardano spends several pages on the details of this example’s solution.

It is the equation of Exercise 6.4. More examples follow, until he comes to
z 4 C 3 D 12z;
which we encountered in Exercise 6.5, and to an example of a non-reduced
quartic. He concludes, “By this you know the methods for these rules if you
have paid careful attention to the examples and the operations.”
Let us turn to Descartes. He is one of the founders of both modern phi-
losophy and modern mathematics. It is impossible to do justice to his life,
his work, and his impact in a short space. We will have to be content with a
brief survey of his contributions to algebra. But first, a few words about the
broader context of his work and how algebra fit into it.
Descartes was born in 1596 in La Haye, France. In 1619 he had the now-
famous dreams that inspired him to find a new basis for scientific inquiry.
He moved to the Netherlands in 1628 and published Discours de la méthode
pour bien conduire sa raison et chercher la vérité dans les sciences, or A
Discourse on the Method of Correctly Conducting One’s Reason and Seek-
ing Truth in the Sciences [18], in 1637. Ian Maclean opens the introduc-
tion to his translation [18, p. vii] with the observation that it “marks one
of the pivotal moments of Western European thought; it was the work of
a formidably clever, radical, rigorous thinker, who in this short, informally
presented introduction to his work threatened the very foundations of many
prevailing philosophical beliefs, and set an agenda for enquiry into man and
nature whose effects have lasted up to the present day.”
The work consists of a preface and three essays. The preface, “A Dis-
course on the Method,” is the most famous part, for it is here that Descartes
seeks to “reform my own thoughts and build on a foundation which is mine
alone.” [18, p. 15]. Algebra is one of the areas to which he intends to apply
his new foundation [18, p. 17]:
As for ancient geometrical analysis and modern algebra, even apart
from the fact that they deal only in highly abstract matters that seem to
have no practical application, the former is so closely tied to the con-
sideration of figures that it is unable to exercise the intellect without
greatly tiring the imagination, while in the latter case one is so much
a slave to certain rules and symbols that it has been turned into a con-
fused and obscure art that bewilders the mind instead of being a form
of knowledge that cultivates it. This was why I thought that another
method had to be found.
In the next paragraph, he proposes his first precept, “never to accept
anything as true that I did not incontrovertibly know to be so.” This is a stiff
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 171 — #187
i i
6.8. History 171
challenge. Some pages later, in one of the most historic passages of western
literature, Descartes arrives at his first item of knowledge [18, p. 28]:
Because our senses sometimes deceive us, I decided to suppose that

nothing was such as they lead us to imagine it to be. And because
there are men who make mistakes in reasoning, even about the sim-
plest elements of geometry, and commit logical fallacies, I judged that
I was as prone to error as anyone else, and I rejected as false all the
reasoning I had hitherto accepted as valid proof. Finally, considering
that all the same thoughts which we have while awake can come to us
while asleep without any one of them being true, I resolved to pretend
that everything that had ever entered my head was no more true than
the illusions of my dreams. But immediately afterwards I noted that,
while I was trying to think of all things being false in this way, it was
necessarily the case that I, who was thinking them, had to be some-
thing; and observing this truth: I am thinking therefore I exist, was so
secure and certain that it could not be shaken by any of the most ex-
travagant suppositions of the skeptics, I judged that I could accept it
without scruple, as the first principle of the philosophy I was seeking.
This is Descartes’ famed statement of certainty, “Cogito, ergo sum,” tradi-

tionally translated as, “I think, therefore I am.”
Having developed a method for obtaining knowledge from secure foun-
dations, Descartes illustrates its effectiveness in three essays: La Dioptrique
(treating optics), Les Météores (treating meteorology), and La Géométrie
(treating, yes, geometry, but also algebra). Our interest is in La Géométrie.
There is much more to be said about Descartes’ philosophical work and his
life, but let us leave it at that, adding only that in 1649, he moved from the
Netherlands to Sweden to tutor Queen Christina, becoming ill a few months
later and dying in 1650.
We turn to La Géométrie. (An English translation by David Eugene
Smith and Marcia L. Latham with the title The Geometry of René Descartes
was published in 1925, the translated pages interleaved with a facsimile of
the original edition. It remains available in a reprinted version [19].) La
Géométrie has three parts. One might not guess from the third part’s title,
“On the Construction of Solid or Supersolid Problems,” that it is devoted
to algebra. This makes sense once one learns that in Descartes’ terminol-
ogy, solid refers to equations of degree 3 and supersolid to equations of
higher degree. This third part contains the first treatment of algebra written
with language and algebraic notation that we would recognize. Let’s survey
some of its highlights.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 172 — #188
i i
In the fifth paragraph [19, p. 156], Descartes begins a sequence of “gen-

eral statements . . . concerning the nature of equations.” The next sentence
introduces a radical change in perspective: “An equation consists of several
terms, some known and some unknown, some of which are together equal
to the rest; or rather, all of which taken together are equal to nothing; for
this is often the best form to consider.”
What Descartes is proposing, and what we now take for granted, is that
polynomial equations are best written in the form of a polynomial on one
side of the equal sign and 0 on the other. Until this point equations would
be written with the restriction that coefficients are positive and terms should
be added, not subtracted, forcing the consideration of multiple forms of
quadratic and cubic equations, as we have seen.
Another of Descartes’ innovations is the use of letters near the end of the
alphabet for variables and letters near the beginning or middle as constants,
a notational convention that we take for granted. (Just before Descartes’
birth, Viète had taken the first step in this direction, using vowels for vari-
ables and consonants for constants.)
In the ensuing pages, Descartes makes the first-ever statements of a se-
ries of now-standard results about polynomials, and in language we would
find largely familiar. He speaks of the “dimension” of a polynomial or equa-
tion where we say “degree”. He distinguishes between positive and nega-
tive roots of a polynomial, calling the positive ones “true,” the negative ones
“false.” And, as we have seen, Descartes uses the word “nothing” in place
of “zero.” Given this terminology, the passage that comes after the sentence
about setting polynomials equal to nothing is completely understandable
[19, pp. 159–160]:
Every equation can have as many distinct roots (values of the unknown
quantity) as the number of dimensions of the unknown quantity in the
equation. . . . It often happens, however, that some of the roots are false
or less than nothing. . . . It is evident from the above that the sum of
an equation having several roots is always divisible by a binomial con-
sisting of the unknown quantity diminished by the value of one of the
true roots, or plus the value of one of the false roots. In this way, the di-
mension of an equation can be lowered. On the other hand, if the sum
of the terms of an equation is not divisible by a binomial consisting
of the unknown quantity plus or minus some other quantity, then this
latter quantity is not a root of the equation.
We find here the first statements of two of our theorems: Theorem 1.6, that
the number of roots of a polynomial is bounded by its degree, and Theorem
1.4, that if a is a root of the polynomial f .x/, then x a divides f .x/.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 173 — #189
i i
6.8. History 173
A few paragraphs later, Descartes explains how to pass from a polyno-

mial equation with a given set of roots to a new one with roots shifted by a
fixed quantity through a change of variable [19, pp. 163–164]:
If the roots of an equation are unknown and it be desired to increase or

diminish each of these roots by some known number, we must substi-
tute for the unknown quantity throughout the equation, another quan-
tity greater or less by the given number. Thus, if it be desired to in-
crease by 3 the value of each root of the equation
x 4 C 4x 3 19x 2 106x 120 D 0
put y in place of x, and let y exceed x by 3, so that y 3 D x.

Then for x 2 put the square of y 3, or y 2 6y C 9; for x 3 put its
cube, y 3 9y 2 C 27y 27; and for x 4 put its fourth power, or y 4
12y 3 C 54y 2 108y C 81: Substituting these values in the above
equation, and combining, we have . . . y 4 8y 3 y 2 C 8y D 0, or
y 3 8y 2 y C 8 D 0, whose true root is now 8 instead of 5 since it
has been increased by 3.
New in this discussion is the abstract idea of transforming an equation

with one set of roots to an equation with a different set of roots without
knowing what the roots are. Descartes applies this procedure to pass from
an arbitrary polynomial equation to a reduced one [19, p. 167]:
Now this method of transforming the roots of an equation without de-

termining their values yields two results which will prove useful: First,
we can always remove the second term of an equation by diminishing
its true roots by the known quantity of the second term divided by the
number of dimensions of the first term, if these two terms have oppo-
site signs; or, if they have the same signs, by increasing the roots by
the same quantity.
Descartes works out some examples of this method, then explains how
to transform a polynomial equation to a new one whose roots are all mul-
tiplied or divided by a given quantity. It is exciting to read these pages and
see now-familiar algebraic notions and formulations coming to life for the
first time.
Just a few pages later [19, pp. 180–183], before discussing cubic equa-
tions, Descartes turns to factoring quartic polynomials as products of quadrat-
ics. He passes to a reduced quartic (with p, q, and r as coefficients rather
than our q, r , and s), then introduces the resolvent cubic without ado:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 174 — #190
i i
Again, given an equation in which the unknown quantity has four di-
mensions . . . we must increase or diminish the roots so as to remove
the second term, in the way already explained, and then reduce it to
another of the third degree, in the following manner: Instead of
x 4 ˙ px 2 ˙ qx ˙ r D 0
write
y 6 ˙ 2py 4 C .p 2 ˙ 4r /y 2 q 2 D 0:
For the ambiguous sign put C2p in the second expression if Cp occurs
in the first; but if p occurs in the first, write 2p in the second . . . .
For example, given
x4 4x 2 8x C 35 D 0
replace it by
y6 8y 4 124y 2 64 D 0:
For since p D 4, we replace 2py by 8y 4 ; . . . .
4
Similarly, instead of
x4 17x 2 20x 6D0
we must write
y6 34y 4 C 313y 2 400 D 0;
for 34 is twice 17, and 313 is the square of 17 increased by four times
6, and 400 is the square of 20.
We do not bother with the distinction Descartes maintains between positive
and negative coefficients, and therefore would dispense with his clarifica-
tions on how to choose signs in writing the resolvent cubic equation.
Descartes presents a third example of a quartic and its resolvent cu-
bic, one with coefficients that are algebraic expressions rather than specific
numbers, then explains how to use the resolvent cubic to factor a quartic
[19, p. 184]:
If, however, the value of y 2 can be found, we can by means of it sepa-
rate the preceding equation into two others, each of the second dimen-
sion, whose roots will be the same as those of the original equation.
Instead of x 4 ˙ px 2 ˙ qx ˙ r D 0, write the two equations
1 1 q
Cx 2 yx C y 2 ˙ p ˙ D0
2 2 2y
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 175 — #191
i i
6.8. History 175
and
1 1 q
Cx 2 C yx C y 2 ˙ p ˙ D 0:
2 2 2y
. . . It is then easy to determine all the roots of the proposed equation.
This is our Theorem 6.2.

Up to this point, Descartes has yet to discuss Cardano’s formula. It has
not been needed, as the values of y in his examples can be found directly
and the quartics then factored as products of quadratics, as he illustrates in
the sentences that immediately follow. Rather than continuing to read his
discussion, let’s do the work ourselves:
Exercise 6.35. Solve two quartic equations from La Géométrie. In both

cases, a root of the the resolvent cubic can be found by guessing. (Try
squares of small positive integers.)
(i) x 4 4x 2 8x C 35 D 0.
(ii) x 4 17x 2 20x 6 D 0.
Descartes closes La Géométrie with a wish [19, p. 240]: “I hope that

posterity will judge me kindly, not only as to the things which I have ex-
plained, but also as to those which I have intentionally omitted so as to leave
to others the pleasure of discovery.”
A little over a century later, Euler gave his own account of quartic equa-
tions in Elements of Algebra [26]. In Section 5.8 we discussed his treat-
ment of Cardano’s formula, which appears in Chapter XII of Section 4. The
next three chapters treat the quartic. In Chapter XIII, Euler deals with some
special families of quartics, then in Chapter XIV he presents the “rule of
Bombelli,” which is actually Ferrari’s approach, misattributed by Euler. It
is in Chapter XV, “Of a new method of resolving equations of the fourth
degree,” that Euler obtains the result that constitutes our Theorem 6.4.
Rather than using Descartes’ approach, as given in Theorem 6.2, Euler
hypothesizes from the start [26, p. 283] that a reduced quartic equation has
a root that can be expressed as the sum of three square roots, then searches
for an expression for the cubic polynomial whose roots these would be:
We will suppose that the root of an equation of the fourth degree has
p p p
the form, x D p C q C r, in which the letters p, q, r express the
roots of an equation of the third degree, such as z 3 f z 2 Cgz h D 0;
so that p C q C r D f ; pq C pr C qr D g; and pqr D h.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 176 — #192
i i
We based our treatment of the quartic on Descartes’ resolvent cubic,

which led to the expression in Theorem 6.4 that is one-half the sum of
three square roots. We could instead have absorbed those pesky 2s into
the square root signs, obtaining three numbers that are one-fourth the roots
of Descartes’ resolvent. This would lead to a new resolvent cubic that is
slightly different, and that is the cubic that Euler obtains.
Euler proceeds much as we did in Section 5.2 when we derived Car-
dano’s formula for the roots of a reduced cubic polynomial from its resol-
vent quadratic. (See Theorems 5.2 and 5.3.) After a half-page of elementary
calculations [26, p. 283], which can be done as an exercise, Euler arrives at
the conclusion [26, p. 284]:
Since, therefore, the equation
x4 ax 2 bx c D 0;
gives the values of the letters f , g, and h, so that
1 1 2 1 1 2 p 1
f D a; g D a C c; and h D b ; or h D b;
2 16 4 64 8
we form from these values the equation of the third degree z 3 f z 2 C

gz h D 0, in order to obtain its roots by the known [Cardano’s] rule.
And if we suppose those roots, 1. z D p, 2. z D q, 3. z D r , one of the
roots of our equation of the fourth degree must be, by the supposition,
p p p
xD p C q C r:
This method appears at first to furnish only one root of the given equa-
p
tion; but if we consider that every sign may be taken negatively, as
well as positively, we immediately perceive that this formula contains
all the four roots.
A short discussion follows, like the last part of Exercise 6.14 and of Ex-
ercise 6.16. Euler explains that there are eight possibilities for the sum of
the three square roots, but the correct four are chosen by using the rule that
the square roots’ product must equal b=8. Euler’s notation doesn’t match
ours, nor does his resolvent cubic, but it is easy to check that with the ap-
propriate change in the coefficient labels and signs and a change of variable
by a factor of 4, his result coincides with Theorem 6.4.
Procedure in hand, Euler solves the equation x 4 25x 2 C 60x 36 D 0
[26, pp. 284–285]. Let’s do so too.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 177 — #193
i i
6.8. History 177
Exercise 6.36. Solve
x4 25x 2 C 60x 36 D 0
using the version of Euler’s approach given in Theorem 6.4. One root of
its resolvent cubic can be found by testing various integer squares. Using
it, factor the cubic and find the other two roots. Euler constructed a very
simple example indeed.
After that example, Euler demonstrates how a general quartic equation

can be converted to a reduced quartic equation, thereby showing that his
new rule is applicable to all quartics. Next comes the following observation
[26, p. 286]:
This is the greatest length to which we have yet arrived in the res-
olution of algebraic equations. All the pains that have been taken in
order to resolve equations of the fifth degree, and those of higher di-
mensions, in the same manner, or, at least, to reduce them to inferior
degrees, have been unsuccessful: so that we cannot give any general
rule for finding the roots of equations, which exceed the fourth degree.
We will take up the story of the quintic next.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 178 — #194
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 179 — #195
i i
7
Higher-Degree
Polynomials
We have devoted chapters to quadratic, cubic, and quartic polynomials. This

pattern cannot continue through all degrees, and not just because the re-
sulting book would be infinitely long. It turns out that results of the sort
we have obtained do not exist for polynomials in degree greater than four.
Therefore, we will content ourselves with a survey of some central results
about higher-degree polynomials, combining proof sketches (or no proofs
at all) with historical discussions. The chapter ends with a proof of the fun-
damental theorem of algebra.
7.1 Quintic Polynomials

We have obtained the quadratic formula, Cardano’s formula, and Euler’s
formula for solutions of polynomial equations up through degree four. What
about quintic polynomials? By Theorem 1.14, quintics have real roots. It is
natural to seek a formula for a root like our other formulas, one involving
the polynomial’s coefficients and the operations of sum, product, quotient,
and nth root extraction. If we had such an expression, we could solve quintic
equations by radicals, the word “radical” referring to an nth root. Through
the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, progress was made in simplifying
the problem of solving quintic equations, but no solution by radicals was
found. Mathematicians began to suspect that a solution may not exist, and
this was shown to be true in the nineteenth century. In this section, we will
describe some of the highlights of the quintic’s history, sketching results but
providing no proofs.
Our first step in dealing with a cubic or quartic equation was to change
179
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 180 — #196
i i
180 7. Higher-Degree Polynomials
variables to pass to a reduced equation, one in which the term of second

highest degree drops out. This can be done for quintics as well. In fact, it
can be done in general: Given
x n C an 1x
n 1
C C a1 x C a0 D 0;
we can replace x by y D x .an 1 =n/ to obtain
y n C bn 2y
n 2
C C b1 y C b0 D 0;
which has no y n 1 term. It is called a reduced equation of degree n. The

coefficients bi are expressible in terms of the ai . If we can solve the reduced
equation, we can add an 1 =n to each solution to obtain the solutions of the
original equation.
The reduction of the problem of solving a quintic equation to that of
solving a reduced quintic equation is straightforward, relying on an obvi-
ous linear change of variable. Ehrenfried Walter von Tschirnhausen (1651–
1708) introduced the idea of using non-linear changes of variable to elimi-
nate additional terms in an equation. He showed how to pass from a reduced
equation of degree n to an equation of the form
z n C cn 3z
n 3
C C c1z C c0 D 0;
where the new coefficients are expressible in terms of the old ones. The
equation has no terms of degrees n 1 or n 2 and is called a principal equa-
tion. If we can solve a principal equation, then Tschirnhausen’s change of
variable process allows us to pass back to solutions of the reduced equation,
perhaps having to calculate some square roots to do so. From the solutions
to the reduced equation, we get solutions of the original equation.
Applying Tschirnhausen’s idea to a reduced equation of degree 3, we
obtain a cubic equation of the form z 3 C c D 0, which can be solved by
computing cube roots. Square root calculations lead to the roots of the re-
duced equation and adding a suitable constant leads to the roots of a general
cubic. Cardano’s formula can be derived in this way.
The process of passing from a reduced equation to a principal equation
is an example of a general process called a Tschirnhausen transformation.
Applying it to quintic polynomials, we are led to quintic equations of the
form
z 5 C cz 2 C dz C e D 0:
Erland Bring (1736–1798) used more complicated Tschirnhausen transfor-
mations to go one step further. He showed in 1786 that the problem of solv-
ing a quintic equation can be reduced to that of solving a quintic equation
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 181 — #197
i i
7.1. Quintic Polynomials 181
of the form
w 5 C dw C e D 0:
Such equations are now called quintic equations in Bring-Jerrard form, in
honor of Bring and of George Jerrard (1804–1863), who used the same idea
to study equations of higher degree.
Several eighteenth-century mathematicians tried to solve the general
quintic equation, including Bring, Etienne Bézout, Edward Waring, La-
grange, and—no surprise—Euler. We saw in Section 5.2 that Euler solved
reduced cubic equations in Elements of Algebra [26] by determining, for a
quadratic polynomial with roots U and p V , the
p coefficients of a cubic poly-
nomial whose roots have the form 3 U C 3 V . Going backwards, he as-
sociated to a reduced cubic polynomial its resolvent quadratic polynomial
and found the roots of the cubic as sums of cube roots of the roots of the
quadratic. He had a similar approach to solving reduced quartic equations
using resolvent cubics, as we discussed in Section 6.8. We concluded that
section with his remark that efforts (up to 1770) to resolve equations of the
fifth degree had been unsuccessful.
Earlier, in a 1732 paper, Euler had conjectured that the roots of a quintic
polynomial take the form
p5
p p p
A1 C 5 A2 C 5 A3 C 5 A4 ;
where A1 , A2 , A3 , and A4 are roots of a quartic polynomial associated to

the quintic. More generally, he conjectured such a result for polynomials
of degree n, each root being the sum of nth roots of n 1 quantities that
would themselves be roots of an associated resolvent polynomial of degree
n 1. This would be a powerful extension of his approach to cubic and
quartic polynomials. However, he was unable to make any progress on the
conjecture, except for special families of polynomials.
The Italian mathematician Paolo Ruffini (1765–1822) was the first to
put aside efforts to solve quintic equations and instead attempt to prove that
there is no general solution by radicals. The title of his 1799 work says it all:
General theory of equations in which it is shown that the algebraic solution
of the general equation of degree greater than 4 is impossible [57]. In the
introduction, Ruffini wrote [5, p.263]:
The algebraic solution of general equations of degree greater than 4 is
always impossible. Behold a very important theorem which I believe I
am able to assert (if I do not err); to present the proof of it is the main
reason for publishing this volume. The immortal Lagrange, with his
sublime reflections, has provided the basis of my proof.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 182 — #198
i i
Ruffini sent Lagrange a copy of the book, but received no reply. In 1803,
Ruffini published a paper with another proof. In 1806, he published yet
another proof, and in 1813 he published a paper in which he expressed his
disappointment at the poor reception his work received. As it turns out,
Lagrange had read his work, but did not think the proof was complete and
chose not to express his approval. Other contemporaries also did not find
the proof complete or correct.
Raymond Ayoub has given an excellent appraisal of Ruffini’s work in
“Paolo Ruffini’s Contributions to the Quintic” [5], along with an account
of the work of Lagrange, Gauss, and others. It is clear in retrospect, as
emerges from Ayoub’s account, that Ruffini did not receive proper credit
for his contributions. One exception was the response of the great French
mathematician Augustin-Louis Cauchy, who wrote to Ruffini in 1821 [5,
p. 271] that “your memoir on the general resolution of equations is a work
which has always seemed to me worthy of the attention of mathematicians
and which, in my judgement, proves completely the insolvability of the
general equation of degree > 4.”
It fell to the Norwegian mathematician Niels Abel (1802–1829) to pro-
vide the first widely recognized proof that there can be no general solu-
tion of quintic equations by radicals. His result was published in 1824 [1].
A few years later, the French mathematician Évariste Galois (1811–1832)
provided another approach, one that would revolutionize algebra [31]. His
proof can be found in every graduate-level text on algebra (such as Abstract
Algebra, by David S. Dummit and Richard M. Foote [22, p. 629]) and some
undergraduate texts as well, and his ideas continue to influence mathematics
today.
The lives of Abel and Galois are of great interest. Both were mathemat-
ical geniuses of the first rank. Both died young. Galois is notorious for his
dramatic death at 20 from wounds incurred in a duel, and for the image of
him feverishly writing out his mathematical ideas in a letter on the eve of
the duel. In both cases, we can only dream of the glorious discoveries they
would have made had they lived longer, and reflect on the unfairness of life.
Since their stories are well told elsewhere, we will move on. Especially rec-
ommended for further reading is Peter Pesic’s Abel’s Proof: An Essay on
the Sources and Meaning of Mathematical Unsolvability [52].
There is one more twist to the tale. Ruffini deserves credit as the first
mathematician to focus attention on proving that the quintic cannot be solved
by radicals rather than searching for such a solution. But Gauss had similar
inklings. In his 1799 doctoral dissertation, Gauss wrote [5, pp. 262–263]:
After the labors of many geometers left little hope of ever arriving at
the resolution of the general equation algebraically, it appears more
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 183 — #199
i i
7.1. Quintic Polynomials 183
and more likely that this resolution is impossible and contradictory. . . .

Perhaps it will not be so difficult to prove, with all rigor, the impossi-
bility for the fifth degree. I shall set forth my investigations of this at
greater length in another place. Here it is enough to say that the general
solution of equations understood in this sense [i.e., by radicals] is far
from certain and this assumption [i.e., that any equation is solvable by
radicals] has no validity at the present time.
Gauss never pursued the matter. Ayoub speculates that Gauss “did not
attach very much importance to solvability by radicals,” referring again to
Gauss’s dissertation, in which he wrote [5, p. 275]:
what is called a solution to an equation is, in reality, nothing but the
reduction of the equation to prime equations — the solution is not
exhibited but symbolized
p — and if you express a root of the equation
x n D H by n H , you have not solved it nor done anything more
than if you devise some symbol to denote a root of the equation x n C
Ax n 1 C D 0 and place the root equal to this symbol . . . .
We made much the same point for quadratic equations at the end of Sec-
tion 2.1, describing the quadratic formula as providing not a solution to a
quadratic equation but a reduction of the solution to the problem of calculat-
ing square roots. Gauss dismisses the entire enterprise. His youthful views
notwithstanding, the work of Abel and Galois has been justly celebrated.
The story of quintic equations does not end with Abel and Galois. As
Gauss reminded us, a solution by radicals requires the extraction of nth
roots, a process that is a problem of analysis, not algebra. Using standard
functions of analysis, such as the exponential and logarithm, or cosine and
inverse cosine, we can calculate nth roots of real and complex numbers.
Perhaps by allowing an enlarged stock of functions from analysis, we can
use algebra to reduce the solution of quintic equations to a form that can be
handled. In the decades after the deaths of Abel and Galois, several mathe-
maticians did this.
The first was Gotthold Eisenstein (1823–1852), in 1844. We have seen
that the problem of solving the general quintic equation can be reduced by
Tschirnhausen transformations to that of solving the Bring-Jerrard equation
w 5 C dw C e D 0:
One can reduce further to the problem of solving the quintic equation
v5 C v f D 0;
where f is a constant.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 184 — #200
i i
In a short note on solutions of equations of degree up to 4 [24], Eisen-

stein introduces functions and that satisfy ./2 D and ./3 D ,
observing that is defined up to multiples of ˙1 and is defined up to
multiples of the powers of !. These are the square root and cube root func-
tions. He expresses solutions of general cubic and quartic equations in terms
of and . He then concludes his paper with the remark that the roots of a
general equation of degree 5 have a similar form, using in place of and
a function satisfying
./5 C ./ D :
In a footnote, he offers a power series formula for :
9 13 17
./ D 5 C 10 15 14 C 20 19 18 :
2Š 3Š 4Š
We can think of as a generalized fifth-root function. Given a real num-
ber f , we can apply to obtain a new number .f / that is not quite a fifth-
root of f : rather than satisfying .f /5 D f , it satisfies .f /5 C.f / D f .
But this means that .f / is a solution to our equation v 5 C v D f , and with
such a solution available, we can solve any quintic equation.
Although quintic equations can’t be solved by radicals, Eisenstein has
demonstrated that we can come close. We simply need his power series,
which lets us calculate a slight extension of fifth roots: the numbers v satis-
fying v 5 C v D f .
Papers by S.J. Patterson [51] and John Stillwell [62] contain illuminat-
ing discussions of Tschirnhausen transformations, the Bring-Jerrard form
of the quintic, and Eisenstein’s solution of the quintic. Stillwell comments
[62, p 61] that Eisenstein added his solution to v 5 C v D f “only as an
afterthought,” speculating that “Eisenstein may well have have considered
this solution to be child’s play, because it is based on a method he discov-
ered for himself at age 14.” (In another of Eisenstein’s 1844 papers [25], he
had described how a certain power series arose from his first mathematical
research, in his fifteenth year.)
In 1858, Charles Hermite (1822–1901) used the Bring-Jerrard reduc-
tion to solve quintic equations, but in terms of a type of function known
as a modular function [34]. Felix Klein (1849–1925) described another ap-
proach in his famous 1884 book Lectures on the Icosahedron [37].
A century later, Peter Doyle and Curt McMullen published a paper,
“Solving the quintic by iteration” [21], in which they showed that quin-
tic equations can be solved by a special iteration process involving “gen-
erally convergent” algorithms based on rational functions. (Rational func-
tions are quotients of polynomial functions.) This is a result in the relatively
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 185 — #201
i i
7.2. The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra 185
new theory of complex dynamics, a subject of great contemporary interest.

They also proved a modern analogue of the Abel-Galois unsolvability re-
sult, stating that polynomial equations of higher degree cannot be solved by
their iteration process. In 1998, McMullen was one of four recipients of the
Fields Medal at the International Congress of Mathematicians. The Fields
Medal is the highest honor a mathematician can receive and is regarded as
the equivalent in mathematics of the Nobel Prize.
7.2 The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra

The discovery of solutions to cubic equations in the sixteenth century led
to the introduction of complex numbers, which in turn led to the realiza-
tion that we can find solutions to all equations of degree four or less. What
happens for higher degrees? That’s the subject of this section.
The relevant mathematical result is known as the fundamental theorem
of algebra. It has several formulations, which we will discuss without pro-
viding proofs. What we do discuss, in place of proofs, is the need to bring
non-algebraic information to bear in order to find a proof. We then turn to
the fundamental theorem’s history, with special attention to a gap in some of
the early proofs that can be filled through the introduction of the algebraic
notion of a field. We will return to the fundamental theorem in Section 7.5,
in order to provide a proof.
A quadratic equation has either two real roots or a pair of conjugate
complex roots; a cubic equation always has a real root and either another
two real roots or a pair of conjugate complex roots; a quartic equation has
zero, two, or four real roots, any others occuring in conjugate complex pairs.
For higher degrees, we know that every odd degree polynomial has a real
root (Theorem 1.14), but we have no results for even degrees. Given our
experience with polynomials of degrees 2 and 4, we might expect that even
degree polynomials have roots provided we allow complex numbers as well
as real numbers. The truth of this is the fundamental theorem of algebra.
Theorem 7.1 (fundamental theorem of algebra). Any polynomial of positive

degree with real coefficients has a root in the complex numbers.
Theorem 4.2 states that if a complex number r is a root of a polynomial

with real coefficients, then so is r . We can use this to prove Theorem 7.2.
Theorem 7.2. Let f .x/ be a positive-degree polynomial with real coef-

ficients and let r a root of f .x/ that is a non-real complex number. Let
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 186 — #202
i i
bD .r C r/ and c D r r. Then b and c are real and f .x/ factors as
.x 2 C bx C c/g.x/;
for a polynomial g.x/ with real coefficients.
Theorem 7.2 has the following consequence:
Theorem 7.3. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of degree n > 0 with real coeffi-
cients.
(i) f .x/ factors as a constant multiple of a polynomial of the form
.x r1 / : : : .x rj /.x 2 C b1 x C c1 / : : : .x 2 C bk x C ck /;
where j and k are non-negative integers satisfying j C 2k D n and

the coefficients occurring are real numbers.
(ii) The numbers r1 ; : : : ; rj are the real roots of f .x/, each value occur-
ring as often as its multiplicity as a root.
(iii) The non-real roots of f .x/ are the roots of the quadratic factors x 2 C
bi x C ci . There are k conjugate pairs of such roots, allowing repeti-
tions.
The principal point of Theorem 7.3 is that any positive-degree polyno-

mial with real coefficients factors as a product of linear and quadratic poly-
nomials with real coefficients. This both follows from and implies Theorem
7.1, and is thus also called the fundamental theorem of algebra.
The fundamental theorem extends to polynomials with complex coeffi-
cients:
Theorem 7.4. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of degree n > 0 with real or

complex numbers as coefficients.
(i) f .x/ has a root in the complex numbers. In fact, f .x/ has exactly n
complex numbers as roots, counting multiplicities.
(ii) f .x/ factors as a constant multiple of a polynomial of the form
.x r1 / : : : .x rn /;
where r1; : : : ; rn are the complex numbers that are roots of f .x/.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 187 — #203
i i
Theorem 7.4 appears at first to be a significant extension of the funda-

mental theorem, but it follows almost immediately via a simple trick. Write
f .x/ for the polynomial obtained by conjugating each of the coefficients of
f .x/. It’s easily checked that the product f .x/f .x/ is a polynomial with
real coefficients. But then Theorem 7.3 can be applied to it, yielding Theo-
rem 7.4.
Despite its name, the fundamental theorem cannot be proved by algebra
alone. This should not be surprising. Even proving that the polynomial x 2
c has a real root for a positive real number c (Theorem 1.10) requires the
intermediate value theorem, which is also needed to prove that every cubic
polynomial with real coefficients has a real root (Theorem 1.14). We can
hardly expect to prove the full fundamental theorem with anything less than
the intermediate value theorem as a tool.
Typically, the more powerful the tools used from calculus or the broader
field of analysis, the shorter the proof of the fundamental theorem. For ex-
ample, the fundamental theorem can be proved in just two or three sen-
tences [3, p. 122] from Liouville’s theorem, which states that a bounded en-
tire function must be a constant. (Joseph Liouville was a nineteenth-century
French mathematician.) The hard work comes in proving Liouville’s theo-
rem. A proof also follows from the result from topology that a continuous
real-valued function on a disk in the plane takes on a minimum and a maxi-
mum value, but a longer argument is needed. See for example the proof that
Charles Fefferman published in 1967 while still an undergraduate [27].
From an algebraic perspective, the most attractive approach to proving
the fundamental theorem would be to rely on the intermediate value the-
orem to prove that every positive real number has a real square root and
every cubic polynomial with real coefficients has a real root, and then rely
on algebra alone for the full theorem. A short, elegant proof follows from
more advanced results of group theory and Galois theory, both of which
grew from Galois’s ideas in proving the unsolvability of quintic polynomi-
als. See, for example, the exposition in [22, pp. 615–617]. Alternatively, we
can give a proof using more elementary algebraic ideas. We will introduce
these ideas in Section 7.4, then discuss the proof in Section 7.5. A useful
reference is The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra, by Benjamin Fine and
Gerhard Rosenberger [29], which presents proofs of the fundamental theo-
rem using analysis, algebra, and topology.
Let’s turn to some high points in the history of the fundamental theorem.
Reinhold Remmert’s article on the theorem provides an excellent overview
[55, pp. 97–122]. See also Chapter 14 of John Stillwell’s Mathematics and
its History [61, p. 266] and Chapter 6 of Bashmakova and Smirnova’s The
Beginnings and Evolution of Algebra [8, pp. 98–99].
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 188 — #204
i i
The first mathematician to state the theorem was Albert Girard, in 1629,
in Invention Nouvelle en l’Algèbre [32]. We briefly examined Girard’s ac-
count of cubic equations in Section 5.8. After discussing cubics, he states
a theorem that begins, “All algebraic equations have as many solutions as
the size of the highest quantity.” Girard makes no effort to provide justi-
fication, but he illustrates the statement with examples. For the first one,
Girard writes, “Given the equation x 4 D 4x 3 C 7x 2 34x 24, the size of
the highest quantity is 4, which signifies that there are 4 certain solutions,
4
neither more nor less.” Girard’s p final example
p is x D 4x 3, for which
he lists the solutions 1; 1; 1 C 2; 1 2. From this, we can infer
that Girard intends his theorem to be understood in the context of complex
numbers, with roots counted according to their multiplicities. Thus, he has
provided a correct statement of the fundamental theorem.
Several of the leading mathematicians of the eighteenth century—Jean-
le-Rond d’Alembert, Euler, Lagrange, and Pierre-Simon Laplace (1749–
1827)—attempted to prove the fundamental theorem, but their arguments
were not complete. (See Chapter 6 of Dunham’s Euler: The Master of Us
All [23] for an account of Euler’s efforts.) One problem with these early
proofs was their reliance on the implicit assumption that a polynomial has
roots somewhere, where not being clear. Within this mysterious domain,
they would then show that the roots actually lie in the complex numbers. As
Remmert puts it [55, pp. 98–99], “until Gauss all mathematicians believed
in the existence of solutions in some sort of no-man’s land . . . and tried
imaginatively to show that these solutions were in fact complex numbers.”
It was Gauss who first pointed out this problem, in his doctoral dissertation
of 1799 [55, p. 104]:
Gauss begins his dissertation by a detailed critical examination of all

previous attempts to prove the theorem known to him. This is not the
place to discuss in detail the objections raised by the twenty-two year
old student against the proofs of d’Alembert, Euler, and Lagrange—
and thus against the leading mathematicians of the time . . . . Gauss’s
main objection was that the existence of a point at which the poly-
nomials take the value zero is always assumed and that this existence
needs to be proved. Thus for example he reproaches Euler for using
hypothetical roots.
Gauss was not yet aware of Laplace’s proof. In 1815, he would subject
Laplace to the same criticism [55, p. 105]: “The ingenious way in which
Laplace dealt with this matter cannot be absolved from the main objections
affecting all these attempted proofs.”
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 189 — #205
i i
Gauss offered not just criticism in his 1799 dissertation, but also a proof
of his own, one that did not rely on the existence of roots in some unspeci-
fied domain. Rather, he set out to prove their existence from scratch, within
the complex numbers. Although Gauss avoided the error of his predeces-
sors, his proof, which is topological in nature, had gaps.
The first proof of the fundamental theorem that appears to be free of
error is one given by Argand in 1814, relying on the existence of a minimum
for a continuous function. He doesn’t justify the existence of the minimum,
something Cauchy would later do. Gauss would continue to give additional
proofs using a variety of methods. His second proof, from 1816, is algebraic
in nature, and correct. It completes Euler’s argument.
Regarding the gap in the proofs of Gauss’s predecessors, Remmert ob-
serves [55, p. 109]:
Nowadays one can only speculate about how mathematicians before
the beginning of the nineteenth century had visualized the solutions
of equations in their mind’s eye. It is difficult for us to understand
why, until the time of Gauss, they had an unshakable belief in a kind
of “extraterrestrial” existence of such solutions “somewhere or other,”
and then sought to show that these solutions were complex numbers.
With the development of algebra in the nineteenth century, it became a sim-
ple matter to construct the extraterrestrial solutions.
In studying polynomial equations, we typically wish to find solutions
in some familiar domain of numbers, such as the rational numbers, the real
numbers, or perhaps the complex numbers. As our historical discussion sug-
gests, it may be convenient, at least provisionally, to search for solutions in
a broader domain of numbers, one that may contain the complex numbers
and be large enough to contain roots of the polynomial. If we can introduce
such a domain, we can then work within it to show that the roots are in fact
complex numbers. This leads to the algebraic notion of a field.
The families of numbers with which we are most familiar—integers,
rationals, reals, and complexes—all have certain basic arithmetic properties
in common. To describe them, let us write K to denote any of these four
sets of numbers. Then K satisfies:
(1) Commutativity: Any two numbers a and b in K satisfy a C b D b C a
and a b D b a.
(2) Associativity: Any three numbers a, b, and c in K satisfy .aCb/Cc D
a C .b C c/ and .a b/ c D a .b c/.
(3) Distrtibutivity: Any three numbers a, b, and c in K satisfy a.b Cc/ D
a b C a c.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 190 — #206
i i
(4) Additive Identity: There is an additive identity in K, that is, a number

o satisfying o C a D a D a C o for any number a.
(5) Additive Inverses: For any number a in K, there is an additive inverse;
that is, a number a0 in K such that a C a0 D o.
(6) Multiplicative Identity: There is a multiplicative identity in K, that is,
a number ` satisfying ` a D a D a ` for any number a.
There is a seventh property that K may satisfy:
(7) Multiplicative Inverses: For any number a in K other than the additive
identity o, there is a multiplicative inverse; that is, a number a00 in K
such that a a00 D `.
Any set K of numbers that satisfies properties .1/ to .6/ is called a ring.
The integers, rationals, reals, and complexes all form rings, with 0 as the
additive identity, a as the additive inverse of a number a, and 1 as the
multiplicative identity. If property .7/ is satisfied also, and if the additive
and multiplicative identities of K are distinct, then K is a field. The in-
tegers aren’t a field, since only 1 and 1 have multiplicative inverses. The
rational, real, and complex numbers are fields. (The existence of multiplica-
tive inverses for complex numbers was treated in Exercise 4.3.) It will be
convenient to use standard notations for these fields: Q is the field of ratio-
nal numbers, R is the field of real numbers, and C is the field of complex
numbers. The letter ‘Q’ is chosen for the rational numbers since they are
quotients of integers.
Rings and fields are treated in any standard undergraduate algebra course.
We will not pursue the derivation of the basic results on them here. What
matters for us is that a field is the natural setting in which to study polyno-
mials and their roots.
We now ask, given a polynomial f .x/ whose coefficients are real num-
bers, if we can construct a field K containing, but possibly larger than, C
that contains a root of f .x/. Once we have developed the basic results on
rings and fields, it is not difficult to prove this and more:
Theorem 7.5. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of positive degree n with real

coefficients. There exist a field K containing C and elements r1 ; r2 ; : : : ; rn
in K, repetitions allowed, such that
f .x/ D .x r1 /.x r2 / .x rn /:
We call K a field extension of C and say that f .x/ splits into linear
factors over K. We may also call K a splitting field for f .x/, although this
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 191 — #207
i i
7.3. Polynomial Factorization 191
term is usually reserved for a field of this type that is minimal in a suitable
sense.
Theorem 7.5 is the result that the mathematicians of the eighteenth cen-
tury were missing, or unjustifiably took for granted. It is purely algebraic,
the proof requiring no property of the real numbers other than the fact that
they form a field. Once it is available, the proofs of the fundamental the-
orem that Gauss criticized can now be completed [55, pp. 107–108]: “The
Gaussian objection against the attempts of Euler-Lagrange and Laplace was
invalidated as soon as Algebra was able to guarantee the existence of a split-
ting field for every polynomial. From that moment on, as Adolf Kneser al-
ready observed in 1888, the attempted proofs became in effect fully valid.”
We will discuss Theorem 7.5 in Section 7.3 and use it in Section 7.5,
where we present Laplace’s 1795 proof of the fundamental theorem.
7.3 Polynomial Factorization

In studying roots of a polynomial f .x/, we have had occasion to look at
factorizations of f .x/ as a product of lower-degree polynomials. For in-
stance, our proof that a polynomial of degree n has at most n roots relied
on Theorem 1.5, which states that a polynomial f .x/ with distinct roots
a1 ; : : : ; ak can be factored as
.x a1 /.x a2 / .x ak /g.x/
for a polynomial g.x/. In this section, we will study factorizations of f .x/

more generally. The principal theme that emerges is that polynomial fac-
torization is analogous to integer factorization. Moreover, a result on poly-
nomials can often be proved by mimicking the proof of the corresponding
integer result. A second theme is that the results do not require the poly-
nomial coefficients to be real numbers. As we will see, the coefficients can
come from any set satisfying the axioms of a field. Working with more
general fields will allow us to sketch a proof of Theorem 7.5, the missing
ingredient in some early proofs of the fundamental theorem of algebra.
Let’s begin our study of polynomial factorization by determining the
polynomial analogue to prime number. Given a non-zero polynomial f .x/
of degree n and a non-zero number c, we can factor f .x/ as the product
of the degree 0 polynomial c and the degree n polynomial c 1 f .x/. This
is as interesting as the factorization of an integer n > 1 as n 1. In both
cases, we call such factorizations trivial. A factorization of n as a product
r s of smaller positive integers is called non-trivial, as is a factorization of
f .x/ as a product of lower-degree polynomials g.x/h.x/. An integer n > 1
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 192 — #208
i i
is prime if it has no non-trivial factorizations. Equivalently, n cannot be

factored as the product of two smaller positive integers. Similarly, we say
that a positive-degree polynomial f .x/ is irreducible if it has no non-trivial
factorizations; that is, it cannot be factored as the product of two lower-
degree polynomials.
Any degree 1 polynomial is irreducible, since constants are the only
lower-degree polynomials and no product of constants can have degree 1.
An example of an irreducible polynomial of degree 2 is x 2 C 1. If it could
be factored as a product of lower degree polynomials, then the resulting
degree 1 factors would correspond to roots, but x 2 C 1 has no real roots.
More generally, a quadratic polynomial x 2 C bx C c either factors as a
product .x r /.x s/, corresponding to real roots r and s, or has no such
factorization. Which of the two cases occurs can be determined by the sign
of the discriminant b 2 4c, allowing us to conclude that x 2 C bx C c is
irreducible precisely when b 2 4c < 0.
We are assuming that the numbers we allow as coefficients are real num-
bers. However, we may wish to select the allowable coefficients from other
classes of numbers, and this will lead to different factorization results. For
example, if we allow complex numbers as coefficients, then x 2 C bx C c
is never irreducible. If we allow only rational numbers
p as coefficients,
p then
x 2 2 is irreducible, even though it factors as .x 2/.x C 2/ when we
allow real numbers as coefficients.
If we choose to work with real coefficients, then the fundamental theo-
rem of algebra (in the form of Theorem 7.3) states that any polynomial of
positive degree factors as a product of degree 1 and degree 2 polynomials,
from which it follows that the irreducible polynomials are the degree 1 poly-
nomials and the degree 2 polynomials with negative discriminant. Theorem
7.4 implies that when we allow complex numbers as coefficients, the irre-
ducible polynomials are precisely the degree 1 polynomials. In contrast, if
we allow only rational numbers as coefficients, there are irreducible poly-
nomials of every positive degree. For instance, for any positive integer n,
x n 2 is irreducible. These examples make it clear that the study of poly-
nomial factorization will depend on our choice of allowable coefficients.
It turns out that there are many natural choices besides the rational num-
bers, the real numbers, and the complex numbers. What they have in com-
mon is that they are examples of fields.
We have described fields as collections of numbers with addition and
multiplication rules that satisfy seven properties. A review of the proper-
ties reveals that nothing in their wording requires that what we are adding
and multiplying be numbers. They can be any sort of object—polynomials,
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 193 — #209
i i
M&M’s, Lego bricks—as long as addition and multiplication rules are in-
troduced that satisfy the properties. We will have a better perspective on the
notion of a field if we introduce two examples besides rational, real, and
complex numbers.
Binary arithmetic gives one example. Write F2 for the set of symbols 0
and 1 with the familiar addition rules 0 C 0 D 0 and 0 C 1 D 1 C 0 D 1
along with the not-so-familiar rule 1 C 1 D 0. For multiplication, we will
adopt the usual rules 0 0 D 0 1 D 1 0 D 0 and 1 1 D 1.
Exercise 7.2. Under the definitions for addition and multiplication, verify
that F2 is a field, with 0 as the additive identity and 1 as the multiplicative
identity.
We have constructed a field with just two elements. It is important to

recognize that the elements, 0 and 1, are not the usual numbers zero and
one shared by Q, R, and C. Rather, they are symbols satisfying the addition
and multiplication rules just introduced. We may wish to give them concrete
meaning, but F2 as described is a field whether we do so or not.
One way to give meaning to 0 and 1 is to regard 0 as a symbol for the
collection of all even integers and 1 as a symbol for the collection of all odd
integers. The addition and multiplication rules for 0 and 1 then represent
familiar arithmetic facts about the addition and multiplication of even and
odd integers. For example, 0 C 1 D 1 represents the fact that the sum of an
even integer and an odd integer is odd, while 1 1 D 1 represents the fact
that the product of two odd integers is again odd. But we needn’t have this
in mind when working with F2 .
A second example of a field is the set R.t/ of rational functions. A ratio-
nal function is a fraction f .t/=g.t/, where f .t/ and g.t/ are polynomials
with real coefficients and g.t/ is non-zero. Just as in describing rational
numbers as the fractions formed from integers, we have to be precise, iden-
tifying two fractions f .t/=g.t/ and h.t/= k.t/ as the same if f .t/k.t/ D
g.t/h.t/. Addition and multiplication are performed in the usual way, using
common denominators for addition. The fraction f .t/=g.t/ is 0 precisely
when f .t/ D 0. Assuming f .t/=g.t/ is non-zero, its multiplicative inverse
is g.t/=f .t/.
Once a field K is chosen, we can study polynomials with coefficients
in K. The standard notation for the set of polynomials is KŒx. Thus, RŒx
consists of polynomials whose coefficients are real numbers—the polyno-
mials with which we have worked for most of this book—and F2 Œx consists
of polynomials whose coefficients lie in the field F2.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 194 — #210
i i
Given two polynomials f .x/ and g.x/ in KŒx, the addition and mul-
tiplication laws for K allow us to add and multiply f .x/ and g.x/ in the
way defined in Section 1.2, obtaining new polynomials f .x/ C g.x/ and
f .x/g.x/ that also lie in KŒx. (Under these addition and multiplication
rules, KŒx satisfies the defining properties of a ring, the polynomial ring
with coefficients in K.) For example, we can add and multiply polynomials
whose coefficients lie in our new fields F2 and R.t/.
Exercise 7.3. Let x C 1 and x 2 C x C 1 be polynomials in F2Œx. (That

is, we regard the coefficients as elements of F2 . Thus, 1 is not our usual
number 1. It is the element 1 of F2 .)
(i) Verify that .x C 1/ C .x 2 C x C 1/ D x 2 .
(Hint: 1 C 1 D 0.)
(ii) Verify that .x C 1/.x 2 C x C 1/ D x 3 C 1.
Exercise 7.4. Let

1 3t 5 C 4t 4
2tx 2 x C 1 and x C .3t 2 5/x
t t2 C 1
be polynomials in R.t/Œx. Compute their sum and product.
Given a field K, let’s write 0 for its additive identity. In all our examples
of fields besides F2, the additive identity is the actual number 0, but some-
times, as is the case with F2 , we can’t identify 0 with a number. It is simply
a distinguished member of the field. We can define the notion of root for any
polynomial f .x/ in KŒx: a root of f .x/ is an element a of K satisfying
f .a/ D 0. For example, the polynomial x 2 C 1 in F2 Œx has 1 as a root,
since
12 C 1 D 1 C 1 D 0:
The definition of irreducible polynomial makes sense for polynomials
with coefficients in any field: a polynomial f .x/ of positive degree in KŒx
is irreducible if it cannot be factored as the product of two polynomials of
lower degree in KŒx. In the next exercise, we determine the irreducible
polynomials of low degree in F2 Œx.
Exercise 7.5. Consider polynomials in F2 Œx.

(i) Show that x and x C 1 are the only polynomials of degree 1 in F2 Œx,
and that both are irreducible.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 195 — #211
i i
(ii) Show that x 2 , x 2 C x, and x 2 C 1 are not irreducible. Show that x 2 C

x C 1 is the only other polynomial of degree 2 and that it is irreducible.
(iii) Write all eight polynomials of degree 3 in F2 Œx. Determine which
are irreducible. For those that are not, factor them as products of irre-
ducible polynomials of lower degree.
We can show, just as with QŒx, that for every positive integer n, there
is an irreducible polynomial of degree n in F2 Œx.
Once we broaden the study of polynomials to allow any field as the set
of coefficients, we become interested in two types of theorems: those that
are specific to the choice of K, and those that hold no matter what field K
is chosen. The fundamental theorem of algebra is an example of the first
type of theorem, as it is a statement about polynomials with real or complex
coefficients. The results of Sections 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 are examples of the
second type. They make sense for polynomials with coefficients in any field
K and the proofs work when real numbers are replaced by elements of
K. For example, combining Theorems 1.3 and 1.4, and extending them to
arbitrary fields, we obtain:
Theorem 7.6. Let K be a field and let f .x/ be a polynomial in KŒx. If

x a divides f .x/, then a is a root of f .x/. Conversely, if a is a root of
f .x/, then x a divides f .x/.
Also, Theorem 1.5, which we restated at the beginning of this section,

holds for polynomials with coefficients in any field K:
Theorem 7.7. Let K be a field and let f .x/ be a polynomial in KŒx. If

a1 ; : : : ; ak are distinct roots of f .x/ in K, then there is a polynomial g.x/
in KŒx such that
f .x/ D .x a1 /.x a2 / .x ak /g.x/:
In the remainder of this section, we will look at results on polynomial
factorization that, like these theorems, hold for any choice of coefficient
field K. Let us begin with a refinement of Theorem 7.7. The multiplicity
of an element a as a root of a polynomial f .x/ is the largest integer m for
which .x a/m divides f .x/.
Theorem 7.8. Let K be a field and let f .x/ be a polynomial in KŒx with
exactly k distinct roots a1 ; : : : ; ak in K. For 1 i k, let mi denote the
multiplicity of ai as a root of f .x/. Then f .x/ has a factorization
f .x/ D .x a1 /m1 .x a2 /m2 .x ak /mk g.x/
for a polynomial g.x/ in KŒx that itself has no roots in K.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 196 — #212
i i
We might try to prove Theorem 7.8 by extending the argument in the

proof of Theorem 1.5. Certainly we can show by that argument that f .x/
factors as
.x a1 /r1 .x a2 /r2 .x ak /rk g.x/
for some positive integers r1 ; : : : ; rk and for a polynomial g.x/ not divisible
by any of the x ai . However, we must do a little more work to verify that
each exponent ri equals mi . Let’s sketch the argument, using Exercise 1.9.
We will take i D 1, but the argument is the same for any index.
By the definition of m1 , there is a polynomial h.x/ not divisible by
x a1 such that f .x/ D .x a1 /m1 h.x/. Also by the definition of m1 , we
must have r1 m1 . Setting our two factorizations of f .x/ equal to each
other and canceling .x a1 /r1 , we obtain
.x a2 /r2 .x ak /rk g.x/ D .x a1 /m1 r1

h.x/:
If m1 D r1 , we are done. Otherwise, we find that x a1 divides the prod-

uct on the left side. Making an argument like the one used in the proof of
Theorem 1.6, we find that either x a1 divides one of the factors x ai
for i > 1, which is impossible, or it divides g.x/, which is also impossible.
Therefore we have m1 D r1 .
Recall the following fact about factorization of integers:
Theorem 7.9. Any integer n > 1 can be factored as a product of prime

numbers.
It is easy to take this for granted. Yet, it requires proof. The proof is
straightforward. If n is prime, we are done. Otherwise, by the definition of
prime, n factors as a product r s for smaller positive integers r and s. If r
or s is prime, we leave it as is. If not, we factor it as the product of smaller
positive integers. We continue in this way as we test each new factor for
primeness. Any non-prime factors become smaller with each round, so that
after at most n 1 rounds, we will have factored n as a product of prime
numbers.
Theorem 7.9 has a polynomial analogue, with essentially the same proof:
Theorem 7.10. Let K be a field. Any polynomial f .x/ of positive degree

in KŒx can be factored in KŒx as a product of irreducible polynomials.
Let’s sketch the argument. If f .x/ is itself irreducible, we are done.

Otherwise, by the definition of irreducibility, f .x/ factors as a product
g.x/h.x/ for lower-degree polynomials g.x/ and h.x/ in KŒx. If g.x/
or h.x/ is irreducible, we leave it as is. If not, we factor it as the product
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 197 — #213
i i
of lower-degree polynomials in KŒx. After at most n rounds, where n is

the degree of f .x/, we will have factored f .x/ as a product of irreducible
polynomials.
We can refine the statements of the last two theorems to obtain the next
two.
Theorem 7.11. Let n be an integer greater than 1. There exist prime num-
bers p1 ; : : : ; pk and positive integers m1 ; : : : ; mk satisfying
m m
n D p1 1 pk k :
Theorem 7.12. Let K be a field and let f .x/ be a polynomial of positive

degree in KŒx. Then there exist irreducible polynomials p1 .x/; : : :, pk .x/
in KŒx and positive integers m1 ; : : : ; mk satisfying
f .x/ D p1 .x/m1 pk .x/mk :
The irreducible factors of f .x/ of degree 1 in the factorization of The-

orem 7.12 correspond to roots, whereas irreducible factors of higher degree
have no roots.
A counterpart to the existence of prime factorizations for integers is the
famous theorem that such factorizations are unique. The formal statement
of this requires some care. Here’s one version:
Theorem 7.13. Let n be an integer greater than 1. Suppose

m
p1m1 pk k
and
n
q1n1 q` `
are two prime factorizations of n, for prime numbers p1 < p2 < < pk
and q1 < q2 < < q` and for positive integer exponents mi and nj . Then
k D ` and for each i between 1 and k, we have the equalities pi D qi and
mi D ni .
The key to proving Theorem 7.13 is a property of prime numbers that

is analogous to the result we proved in Exercise 1.9 for polynomials of the
form x a: if a prime number p divides a product r s of positive integers,
then p divides r or p divides s. This result goes back to Euclid. It is a
consequence of the result known as the euclidean algorithm for finding the
greatest common divisor of two positive integers. Given it, we can prove
Theorem 7.13 in much the same way as Theorem 7.8. The difficulties are
more ones of organization than of conception.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 198 — #214
i i
Euclid’s key property of prime numbers has its counterpart for irre-
ducible polynomials: given a field K, if an irreducible polynomial p.x/
in KŒx divides the product r .x/s.x/ of two polynomials r .x/ and s.x/
in KŒx, then p.x/ divides r .x/ or s.x/. This is an extension of Exercise
1.9. We will not prove it. The proof is not difficult, paralleling as it does
the proof of the integer result. We introduce the notion of greatest common
divisor for polynomials, obtain a polynomial analogue of the euclidean al-
gorithm, and prove the result, mimicking the classical integer arguments.
Once this property of irreducible polynomials is available, we can mimic
the proof of Theorem 7.13 to obtain what is essentially an extension of The-
orem 7.8, a unique factorization theorem for polynomials. The statement is
more complicated than its integer counterpart because we can alter a fac-
torization of a polynomial by inserting constant factors without changing
it in an essential way, but this is the only issue: up to constant factors, the
same irreducible polynomials occur in any factorization of a polynomial
into irreducible polynomials with the same exponents.
With these general factorization theorems in place, we may next wish to
study factorization problems with particular fields of coefficients, such as Q
or F2 . They turn out to be important, and difficult. Let us instead conclude
by returning to the issue that prompted us to introduce the notion of a field
in Section 7.2.
We saw that several eighteenth-century attempts to prove the fundamen-
tal theorem of algebra failed because of a missing ingredient, Theorem 7.5.
This states, given a polynomial f .x/ in RŒx of positive degree n, that there
exists a field K containing C and elements r1; r2 ; : : : ; rn in K satisfying
f .x/ D .x r1 /.x r2 / .x rn /:
The proof does not depend on working with the real numbers. It yields more
generally, with no additional work, the following theorem.
Theorem 7.14. Let K be a field and let f .x/ be a polynomial of positive de-
gree in KŒx. There exists a field L containing K and elements r1 ; r2 ; : : : ; rn
in L, repetitions allowed, such that
f .x/ D .x r1 /.x r2 / .x rn /
in LŒx.
The proof is not difficult, and can be found in many algebra texts (for
example, [22, p. 536]). A full discussion would take us too far afield. Let us
take a brief look at the essential issue, which is the following partial result:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 199 — #215
i i
Theorem 7.15. Let K be a field and let f .x/ be a polynomial of positive

degree in KŒx. There exists a field L containing K and a root r of f .x/ in
L.
If we can prove Theorem 7.15, we can iterate its construction to prove

Theorem 7.14.
The construction of L is surprisingly easy. All we need to do is mimic
the construction of C from R, which was done to build a field larger than
R that contains a root of x 2 C 1. In that construction, we created a new
element, i , took C to be the set of polynomial expressions of degree at most
one in i with real coefficients, and defined addition and multiplication in the
obvious way, taking into account that i must satisfy i 2 C1 D 0, or i 2 D 1.
For Theorem 7.15 we can assume f .x/ is monic. Suppose it has the
form
x n an 1 x n 1 a1 x a0 ;
where we choose minus signs to simplify what follows. We introduce a new
element r that will be the analogue for f .x/ of i for x 2 C 1. We want r to
be a root of f .x/, which means r satisfies
rn an 1r
n 1
a1 r a0 D 0;
or
r n D an 1r
n 1
C C a1 r C a0 :
We then take L to be the set of all polynomial-like expressions in r of degree
at most n 1 with coefficients from K.
Addition of expressions is defined in the obvious way. For multiplica-
tion, we first treat r as a polynomial indeterminate and multiply as usual.
The result will be a polynomial in r , but it may have degree n or greater. We
then use the last equation, which we can think of as a rewrite rule telling us
how to replace r n by a sum of lower-degree terms in r . Iterating, we can
write any polynomial in r as a polynomial in r of degree less than n. Having
defined addition and multiplication in L, we easily verify that L satisfies the
defining conditions of a ring.
What requires closer examination is the additional requirement that fields
must satisfy: that every non-zero element has a multiplicative inverse. Is this
the case for L? It is not difficult to see that the answer is no whenever f .x/
fails to be irreducible. However, if f .x/ is irreducible, then L is a field. The
proof of this, like the proof of unique factorization for polynomials, depends
on polynomial analogues of integer results on greatest common divisors and
the euclidean algorithm.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 200 — #216
i i
Theorem 7.15 follows. If f .x/ is irreducible, L is a field and we are

done. Otherwise, we can replace f .x/ with one of its irreducible factors
g.x/ in KŒx and apply the same construction to g.x/. The result will be a
field containing a root of g.x/ and hence a root of f .x/ as well.
The idea behind enlarging R in order to create a new field containing
a square root of 1 is a powerful one. We see now that it can be used to
expand any field to a larger one containing roots of a given polynomial.
7.4 Symmetric Polynomials

In our study of quadratic, cubic, and quartic polynomials, we found for-
mulas for the discriminant in terms of the polynomial’s coefficients. The
discriminant can be defined for a polynomial of any degree, and the lower-
degree examples suggest the possibility that it can again be written in terms
of the coefficients. There are two issues. Does such an expression exist? If
so, what is it? The answer to the first is yes, as we will see in this section.
Finding the formula turns out to be a more difficult problem, which we will
not pursue.
The theorem that the discriminant of a polynomial can be expressed in
terms of the polynomial’s coefficients is a special case of a far-reaching
result on symmetric expressions in the roots of a polynomial. An example
of a symmetric expression is r 2 s C r s 2, which remains unchanged if we
swap r and s. In contrast, r 2s C 2r s 2 changes under the swap and therefore
is not symmetric. The general result—which will apply to discriminants—
is that any symmetric expression in a polynomial’s roots can be written in
terms of the polynomial’s coefficients. We will develop the relevant ideas in
this section, and conclude with some history.
Let’s begin by defining the discriminant. Suppose f .x/ is a polynomial
of positive degree n, of the form
xn a1 x n 1
C a2 x n 2
C . 1/n 1
an 1x C . 1/n an :
We index the coefficients so that the subscript of a coefficient and the expo-
nent of its associated power of x sum to n, and also we write the coefficients
with alternating signs. The convenience of these choices will soon be clear.
Assume that the coefficients are real numbers.
By the fundamental theorem of algebra, f .x/ factors as
.x r1 /.x r2/ .x rn /;
where r1 ; : : : ; rn are the real or complex roots of f .x/, listed with possible
repetitions. The discriminant of f .x/ is defined to be the square of the
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 201 — #217
i i
7.4. Symmetric Polynomials 201
product of differences of all the pairs of roots. In product notation,

Y
D .ri rj /2 :
1i <j n
We take the product over all roots, with repetitions, not over the set of dis-
tinct roots. If there is a repeated root, which means there is a pair of indices
i and j with i ¤ j and ri D rj , then the difference ri rj is 0 and D 0. If
no root is repeated, then the factors in the product are non-zero and ¤ 0.
We are assuming that coefficients are real numbers. We could choose to
work in the generality of Section 7.3, with an arbitrary field K as the field of
coefficients for the polynomial f .x/. Theorem 7.14 ensures the existence
of a larger field L that contains a set r1 ; : : : ; rn of roots for f .x/ for which
f .x/ factors in LŒx as
f .x/ D .x r1 /.x r2 / .x rn /:
We can then define the discriminant of f .x/ as the product

Y
D .ri rj /2 :
1i <j n
However, we would have to prove that doesn’t depend on the field L and
roots ri . This is a journey we choose not to take.
For polynomials f .x/ of degree 2, 3, or 4, we found formulas for the
discriminant that express it as a sum of integer multiples of products of the
coefficients. For example, we found in Theorem 5.6 that the discriminant of
x 3 C bx 2 C cx C d is
18bcd 4b 3 d C b 2c 2 4c 3 27d 2:
We wish to show for f .x/ of any degree n that a formula like this exists:
the discriminant of f .x/ can be written as a polynomial expression in the
coefficients of f .x/ with integer coefficients.
The discriminant is not the only expression in the roots of f .x/ that we
have written as a polynomial expression in its coefficients. In Theorem 5.14
we saw for a cubic polynomial x 3 a1 x 2 C a2 x a3 with roots r1 , r2 , and
r3 that
a1 D r1 C r2 C r3 ;
a2 D r1 r2 C r1 r3 C r2 r3 ;
a3 D r1 r2 r3 :
The proof amounts to factoring the cubic as .x r1 /.x r2 /.x r3 / and car-
rying out the multiplication of the degree-one terms. The simpler quadratic
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 202 — #218
i i
analogue was obtained for real roots in Exercise 2.5 and in general in Exer-
cise 4.8, and the quartic analogue was Theorem 6.11.
A similar result holds for polynomials of higher degree. We have fac-
tored a general degree n polynomial f .x/ as
.x r1 /.x r2 / .x rn 1 /.x rn /:
When we carry out the multiplication of the n terms, the result is the sum
of the expressions we obtain by choosing from each term x ri either the
x or the ri and then multiplying them together. For an integer k between
1 and n, the coefficient of x n k will be the sum of the terms we obtain
when we choose x from n k of the factors and choose ri ’s from k of
the factors. We might for instance choose constants from the factors with
indices i1 ; i2; : : : ; ik . This would yield
. 1/ri1 . 1/ri2 . 1/rik x n k

;
or
. 1/k ri1 ri2 rik x n k
:
To get the entire coefficient of x n k , which we have written as . 1/k ak ,
we need to add all these expressions together. The result is
X
ak D ri1 ri2 rik :
1i1 <i2 <<ik n
The notation is formidable, but what it says is that ak is the sum of

all products of k of the roots ri . This gives us a sequence of polynomial
expressions in the roots that equal the simplest of polynomial expressions
in the coefficients: the coefficients themselves, up to sign. Two special cases
are
a1 D r1 C r2 C C rn
and
an D r1 r2 rn :
We have now introduced several polynomial expressions in the roots
of a polynomial f .x/ that can be written in terms of its coefficients: the
discriminant and the sums of products of roots. What connects them? Each
remains unchanged if we reorder the roots. The roots are specific complex
numbers, but we have assigned names to them—r1, r2 , and so on—that do
not take into account which is which. Our naming is arbitrary. When we
sum them, or sum their two-by-two products, or sum their fifth powers, we
are forming quantities that are independent of our choice of names. This
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 203 — #219
i i
is the case as well for the discriminant, a point that is worth a moment of
thought.
By definition,
Y
.r1 ; : : : ; rn / D .ri rj /2 :
1i <j n
If we reorder the roots ri in some way, the order of the factors in the product
will change, but the list of factors is unchanged: we choose every possible
pair of roots, take its difference, square it, and multiply. Since multiplica-
tion doesn’t depend on the ordering, the product that defines .r1 ; : : : ; rn /
doesn’t either. If we were to omit the squares in the product, the resulting
product Y
.ri rj /
1i <j n
would fail to be independent of the ordering of the ri ’s. For example, con-
sider what happens if we switch the order of r1 and r2 but leave the order
of r3 ; : : : ; rn intact. The factor r1 r2 changes to its opposite, r2 r1 . For
any i > 2, the factors r1 ri and r2 ri switch with each other, but their
product is unchanged. The remaining factors ri rj with i; j > 2 remain
unchanged. The product as a whole, then, is changed to its opposite.
Expressions in the roots of f .x/ that remain unchanged under re-naming
of the roots, such as the examples we have just examined, are called sym-
metric.
To proceed, we pass to a more abstract framework. The formulas we
have obtained relating roots and coefficients of a polynomial make sense
whatever the values of the coefficients are. In effect, we can regard them
as variables, to be replaced by particular real numbers when we identify
a specific polynomial of interest. If we are studying the polynomial x 3 C
3x 2 2x C 7, for example, then we substitute 3 for a1 , 2 for a2 and 7
for a3 (keeping our sign convention in mind).
This suggests the path we should take, which is to start over, working
with a generic polynomial of degree n whose coefficients are variables or
indeterminates. We can in this way discuss all degree n polynomials at once,
specializing the variable coefficients to actual ones when we have a specific
polynomial in mind.
Let us begin anew, then. Not only should the coefficients of a degree
n polynomial be generic, but the roots should be too. In other words, we
replace the roots ri by variables. Fix a positive integer n and introduce the
new variables or indeterminates t1 ; t2 ; : : : ; tn , which we think of as stand-
ins for the roots of a degree n polynomial. We anticipate that when we study
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 204 — #220
i i
a specific polynomial, we will substitute the complex numbers that arise as

roots of the polynomial for the ti s.
We are interested in polynomial expressions in the ti s with integer co-
efficients. The most general such expression can be written as
ai1 ;i2 ;:::;in t1i1 t2i2 tnin :

X
It is understood that the sum is finite and the coefficients ai1 ;i2 ;:::;in are in-
tegers, all but finitely many of them being 0. Just as the ti s are stand-ins for
the roots of a given degree n polynomial, the expressions are stand-ins for
polynomial expressions in the roots.
We already know some expressions that will interest us. For each k
between 1 and n, let’s define ek .t1 ; : : : ; tn / by
X
ek .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D ti1 ti2 tik
1i1 <i2 <<ik n
and call it the kth elementary symmetric polynomial. Repeating the analysis
we made for sums of products of roots, we obtain:
Theorem 7.16. Let n be a positive integer and let t1 ; t2 ; : : : ; tn be n inde-

terminates. Then
n
X
.x t1 /.x t2 / .x tn 1 /.x tn / D x n C . 1/k ek .t1 ; : : : ; tn /x n k
kD1
We also introduce, for each positive integer k, the power sum polyno-
mials pk .t1 ; : : : ; tn /, defined by
pk .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D t1k C C tnk ;
with p0 .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D 1. For n 2, we introduce the polynomial .t1 ; : : : ; tn /

defined by Y
.t1 ; : : : ; tn / D .ti tj /2 :
1i <j n
We call this the discriminant.

Let’s return for a moment to the polynomial f .x/ with which we worked
earlier in this section. It had the form
f .x/ D x n a1 x n 1
C a2 x n 2
C . 1/n 1
an 1 C . 1/n an :
with roots r1 ; : : : ; rn and factorization
.x r1/.x r2 / .x rn /:
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 205 — #221
i i
If, for each index i from 1 to n, we substitute ri for ti , then we pass from
the generic polynomial
n
X
xn C . 1/k ek .t1 ; : : : ; tn /x n k
kD1
to the specific polynomial
f .x/ D x n a1 x n 1
C a2 x n 2
C . 1/n 1
an 1 C . 1/n an :
The coefficients ai , which are real numbers, can be expressed in terms of

the roots rj :
ai D ei .r1 ; : : : ; rn /:
Similarly, when we specialize the variables ti to be the roots ri of f .x/, the
resulting number
.r1 ; : : : ; rn /
is the discriminant of f .x/.
We have observed that certain expressions in the roots of a polynomial,
such as its discriminant, remain unchanged when we reorder the roots. We
can now study such expressions.
We say a polynomial p.t1 ; : : : ; tn / in the variables ti with integer coeffi-
cients is symmetric if any reordering of the variables leaves the polynomial
unchanged. We can introduce notation to make this more precise. We define
a permutation of the set of numbers 1; : : : ; n to be a function that takes
the set to itself so that any two numbers i ¤ j are moved to two num-
bers .i / and .j / that remain unequal: .i / ¤ .j /. With that notation,
p.t1 ; : : : ; tn / is symmetric if for every permutation ,
p.t.1/ ; : : : ; t.n// D p.t1 ; : : : ; tn /:
Our earlier observations made for a specific polynomial’s roots carry

over: the elementary symmetric polynomials, power sum polynomials, and
discriminant are all examples of symmetric polynomials. In contrast, the
square root of the discriminant (obtained by omitting the squares in the
definition of the discriminant) fails to be symmetric, as will just about any
polynomial expression in the ti s with integer coefficients that we write down
at random.
It is easy to see that integer multiples, sums, and products of symmetric
polynomials are symmetric. We can form sums of integer multiples of prod-
ucts of the elementary symmetric polynomials and obtain new symmetric
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 206 — #222
i i
polynomials. For example, with n D 2, since e1 .t1 ; t2/ and e2 .t1 ; t2/ are
symmetric, so is
e1 .t1 ; t2 /2 4e2 .t1 ; t2 /:
Expanding, we find that
e1 .t1 ; t2 /2 4e2 .t1 ; t2 / D .t1 C t2 /2 4t1 t2 D .t1 t2 /2 D .t1 ; t2/:
Thus, we have written the discriminant .t1 ; t2 / as a polynomial expression

in elementary symmetric polynomials with integer coefficients.
This expression is familiar. What’s new is the context we have now es-
tablished in which we can ask whether such expressions exist for any n.
That is, for a positive integer n, is .t1 ; : : : ; tn / equal to a polynomial ex-
pression in the elementary symmetric polynomials ei .t1 ; : : : ; tn / with inte-
ger coefficients? If such an expression exists, then when we specialize the
ti s to the roots ri of a polynomial f .x/, the elementary symmetric poly-
nomials specialize to the values ei .r1 ; : : : ; rn/, which are up to sign the
coefficients of f .x/.
Our main result is that every symmetric polynomial, not just the dis-
criminant, can be obtained as a polynomial expression in the elementary
symmetric polynomials. This is the fundamental theorem on symmetric
polynomials.
Theorem 7.17. Let n be a positive integer. Every symmetric polynomial

in the variables t1 ; : : : ; tn with integer coefficients is an integer-coefficient
polynomial expression in the elementary symmetric polynomials
e1.t1 ; : : : ; tn /; : : : ; en .t1 ; : : : ; tn /:
That is, given a symmetric polynomial p.t1 ; : : : ; tn /, there is an n-variable

integer-coefficient polynomial q for which
p.t1 ; : : : ; tn / D q.e1 .t1 ; : : : ; tn /; : : : ; en .t1 ; : : : ; tn //:
As a special case of Theorem 7.17, we obtain:
Theorem 7.18. Let n be an integer, n 2. The discriminant

Y
.t1 ; : : : ; tn / D .ti tj /2
1i <j n
is a polynomial expression in the elementary symmetric polynomials with

integer coefficients.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 207 — #223
i i
We obtain the same result for power sum polynomials, too, but we can
say more, as we will later in the section.
To see the power of Theorem 7.18, let’s return to our standard degree n
polynomial
xn a1 x n 1
C a2 x n 2
C . 1/n 1
an 1 C . 1/n an
with roots r1 ; : : : ; rn . Suppose we are able to find the explicit n-variable

polynomial q for which
.t1 ; : : : ; tn / D q.e1 .t1 ; : : : ; tn /; : : : ; en .t1 ; : : : ; tn //:
We know that when we substitute the roots ri for the variables ti , the ele-
mentary symmetric polynomials ek specialize to the coefficients ak :
ek .r1 ; : : : rn / D ak . We can therefore use .t1 ; : : : ; tn / to calculate the
discriminant .r1 ; : : : ; rn / of f .x/ in terms of the coefficients ak :
.r1 ; : : : ; rn / D q.e1 .r1 ; : : : ; rn /; : : : ; en .r1 ; : : : ; rn //

D q.a1 ; a2 ; : : : ; an /:
We have obtained expressions for .t1 ; : : : ; tn / in terms of the elemen-

tary symmetric polynomials for n D 2; 3; 4. Theorem 7.18 ensures that
there is such an expression for any n. They can be quite complicated. For
example, the discriminant of the principal quintic polynomial
x 5 C cx 2 C dx C e;
is given by
D 108c 5e 27c 4 d 2 C 2250c 2de 2 1600cd 3e C 256d 5 C 3125e 4:
The formula for the discriminant of a general quintic polynomial is a sum

of 59 terms! As n increases, it becomes increasingly difficult to determine
the expression for the discriminant.
The proof of Theorem 7.17 is not difficult conceptually, but requires a
good choice of notation. Let’s see how it is proved for n D 2.
Since we have only two variables, we will dispense with indices. Let’s
write the variables as t and u. The elementary symmetric polynomials are
t C u and tu. What we are to prove is that any symmetric polynomial in t
and u is a polynomial expression in t C u and tu.
Suppose p.t; u/ is a symmetric polynomial. Since there are only two
variables t and u, being symmetric means that if we switch t and u in the
expression for p.t; u/, we leave the polynomial unchanged. In particular, if
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 208 — #224
i i
t m un occurs in p.t; u/ with a non-zero coefficient a, then t n um must also

occur in p.t; u/ with coefficient a. It follows that p.t; u/ must be a sum of
integer multiples of terms of the form
t m un C t n um ;
for non-negative integers m and n with m < n, and integer multiples of

terms of the form
t m um ;
for non-negative integers m. Therefore, if we show that these expressions
can be written as polynomials in t C u and tu, it will follow that every
symmetric polynomial in t and u can be written in terms of t C u and tu.
We can simplify further. Given non-negative integers m < n, let n D
m C k. Then
t m un C t n um D t m um .t k C uk / D .tu/m .t k C uk /:
Thus we can combine the two cases into one, and it suffices to show for all
non-negative integers m and k that
.tu/m .t k C uk /
is a polynomial expression in t C u and tu. Since .tu/m is already such

an expression, we need only show for every non-negative integer k that the
sum t k C uk is a polynomial expression in t C u and tu.
This is easily done. If k D 0, the sum t 0 C u0 is 1, and if k D 1, it is
t C u. These are both polynomial expressions in t C u. Suppose we already
know for an integer k > 1 that t k 2 Cuk 2 and t k 1 Cuk 1 are polynomial
expressions in t C u and tu. Then
t k C uk D .t k 1
C uk 1
/.t C u/ tu.t k 2
C uk 2
/
shows that t k C uk is also a polynomial expression in t C u and tu. In this

way, starting from the knowledge that our result holds for k D 0 and k D 1,
we can work our way through all possible positive integers k, concluding
for any positive integer k that the sum t k C uk is a polynomial expression
in t C u and tu. (We are implicitly using the principle of mathematical
induction, which will be discussed in Section 7.5.) By the earlier reductions,
we have proved that every symmetric polynomial in t and u is a polynomial
expression in t C u and tu. This proves Theorem 7.17 for polynomials in
two variables.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 209 — #225
i i
Theorem 7.17 is proved for polynomials in more variables by a similar

bootstrap process. The organization of the proof is more complicated, but
the idea is the same. See [22, pp. 621–622] for an outline.
In proving Theorem 7.17 for two variables t and u, we were able to
reduce to the case of the power sum polynomials t k C uk , which we then
proved to be polynomial expressions in t C u and tu. For general n, The-
orem 7.17 guarantees that the power sum polynomials pk .t1 ; : : : ; tn / can
be expressed as polynomials in e1 .t1 ; : : : ; tn /; : : : ; en.t1 ; : : : ; tn / with inte-
ger coefficients. But we can do better, obtaining an explicit formula that
relates power sum polynomials and elementary symmetric polynomials. In
this formula, Theorem 7.19, it is understood that e0 .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D 1 and
ek .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D 0 for k > n. We omit the proof. (See [22, pp. 618–619]
for a discussion.)
Theorem 7.19 (Girard-Newton identities). Let k and n be positive integers.

Then
k
X
kek .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D . 1/i 1
ek i .t1 ; : : : ; tn /pi .t1 ; : : : ; tn /:
i D1
By using e0.t1 ; : : : ; tn / D 1 and moving terms around, we can re-write

the kth Girard-Newton identity as
pk .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D . 1/k 1
kek .t1 ; : : : ; tn /
k 1
X
. 1/k i ek i .t1 ; : : : ; tn /pi .t1 ; : : : ; tn /:
i D1
When k D 1, this is
e1 .t1 ; : : : ; tn / D p1 .t1 ; : : : ; tn /;
which holds since both sides are equal to t1 C C tn by definition. From

this starting point, as k increases, the other Girard-Newton identities allow
us to express each power sum pk .t1 ; : : : ; tn / recursively as a polynomial in
the elementary symmetric polynomials. When we specialize to a degree n
polynomial
xn a1 x n 1
C a2 x n 2
C . 1/n 1
an 1 C . 1/n an ;
we are able to write the power sums pk .r1 ; : : : ; rk / in terms of the coeffi-
cients ai . Girard wrote such formulas explicitly for k 4. Let’s conclude
the section with a look at his work.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 210 — #226
i i
Prior to Girard, Viète obtained formulas in special cases for the coeffi-
cients of a polynomial as sums of products of the roots. Girard was the first
to state such formulas in general. In his 1629 book Invention Nouvelle en
l’Algèbre [32], Girard stated the theorem that any polynomial of degree n
has n roots. Only with the presence of n roots can we even contemplate ex-
pressions for the coefficients of the polynomial in terms of the roots. Girard
provided them in the second part of the same theorem.
Before stating the theorem, Girard introduced a notion he called a fac-
tion:
When several numbers are proposed, their sum is called the first fac-
tion; the sum of all the products two-by-two is called the second fac-
tion; the sum of all the products three-by-three is called the third fac-
tion; and so on up to the end, with the product of all the numbers called
the last faction. There are as many factions as the numbers proposed.
The second part of the theorem then states:
The first faction of the solutions [of a polynomial equation] equals the
first coefficient, the second faction of the same is equal to the second
coefficient, the third the third, and so on, so that the last faction is equal
to the last, and this according to the signs, which one observes are in
alternating order.
Girard offers no proof. But the proof is clear, provided we understand a
polynomial of degree n to have n roots, as Girard states, and provided we
understand that the polynomial factors as the product of terms x r , as r
runs through the n roots, which he surely did.
A few pages later, Girard introduces the expressions in the roots ri that
we call the power sum polynomials. He then writes formulas for them in
terms of the coefficients ai , for powers up to 4:
r1 C C rn D a1 ;
r12 C C rn2 D a12 2a2;
r13 C C rn3 D a13 3a1 a2 C 3a3 ;
r14 C C rn4 D a14 4a12a2 C 4a1 a3 C 2a22 4a4 :
These are the first four Girard-Newton identities of Theorem 7.19. Girard
doesn’t continue with higher exponents, but it is clear that a sequence of
such formulas exists.
Isaac Newton (1643–1727) obtained the same result in 1707 [47, pp.
392–393], again without proof. (In supplementary notes immediately after
Newton’s statement of the result, Reverend Wilder provides a proof [47, pp.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 211 — #227
i i
7.5. A Proof of the Fundamental Theorem 211
393–396].) The identities are often named after Newton alone, but credit is
due to both.
Girard’s observation that certain symmetric expressions in the roots of a
polynomial can be written in terms of the polynomial’s coefficients comes
in for praise in H. Gray Funkhouser’s 1930 paper, “A short account of the
history of symmetric functions of roots of equations” [30, pp. 358, 360]:
As is the case with the development of algebra as a whole, the sub-

ject of symmetric functions to a perhaps greater extent waited upon
the introduction and improvement of symbolism. It was hard to per-
ceive with any clarity relations between roots and coefficients when
the equation was wrapped up in a paragraph of words representing it.
Prior to the time of Franciscus Vieta, who was among the first to em-
ploy letters to represent numbers, we find very little trace of the thing
we are seeking. . . .
We can appreciate how great an advance Vieta made when there is
considered the few fragmentary statements that have come from his
predecessors. He paves the way and provides an introduction to the
first man who really has a place in the history of symmetric functions
of roots of equations, a man, who for clearness and grasp of material
at hand in not only this topic but also in other phases of algebra could
well hold his place a century later.
The man was Albert Girard and his work on algebra is a little 34-leaf
pamphlet called Invention Nouvelle en l’Algèbre, published in 1629.
7.5 A Proof of the Fundamental Theorem

The fundamental theorem of algebra states that every polynomial with real
coefficients has a root in the complex numbers. As we discussed in Section
7.2, the theorem’s name is misleading. Any proof depends on some infor-
mation about the real numbers, hence on results from calculus or analysis.
At the end of Section 7.2, we mentioned the existence of proofs that are en-
tirely algebraic if we take two results as given: every positive real number
has a real square root (Theorem 1.10) and every cubic polynomial with real
coefficients has a real root (Theorem 1.14). With the ideas of Section 7.4,
we can now describe one such proof, essentially due to Laplace in 1795.
That is the purpose of this section.
In addition to Theorems 1.10 and 1.14, our proof of the fundamental
theorem will use two results developed in this chapter: Theorem 7.5, which
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 212 — #228
i i
states for a polynomial f .x/ with real coefficients that a field K exists con-
taining both C and a set of roots of f .x/, so that f .x/ factors in KŒx as
a product of linear factors, and Theorem 7.17, the fundamental theorem on
symmetric polynomials. We will also need the principle of mathematical
induction.
Induction has been used implicitly on occasion, for instance in the proof
of de Moivre’s formula in Exercise 4.23 and the proof of the two-variable
case of the fundamental theorem on symmetric polynomials in Section 7.4.
Its application in proving the fundamental theorem is more subtle. Hence, in
preparation for that proof, an explicit discussion of induction is warranted.
Let’s write N for the set of positive integers. (This is a traditional math-
ematical notation, the letter “N” suggesting the natural numbers, another
name for the positive integers.) Here is the statement of the principle:
Theorem 7.20 (principle of mathematical induction). Let S be a subset of

N. Assume that S contains 1 and that if S contains a positive integer k,
then S contains k C 1. Then S D N.
It is perhaps misleading to call the induction principle a theorem. In

developing the foundations of arithmetic, we typically adopt the principle
as an axiom to be satisfied by the positive integers rather than a theorem to
be proved about them. But this is a subject for another book (for instance,
[42, pp. 149–150]). Whatever the principle’s logical status, we will accept
it as a valid statement.
The principle becomes a proof technique when we want to verify a fam-
ily of statements indexed by the positive integers. De Moivre’s formula is
an example. We wish to prove for every positive n that
Let S be the set of positive integers for which the equality holds. We see im-
mediately that S contains 1. Suppose we can show for any positive integer
k that if k is in S , so is k C 1. Then the principle of mathematical induction
implies that S D N and de Moivre’s formula holds for all positive integers.
What we must show, then, is that if
.cos C i sin /k D cos k C i sin k;
then
.cos C i sin /kC1 D cos.k C 1/ C i sin.k C 1/:
This is essentially what we checked in Exercise 4.23.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 213 — #229
i i
Sometimes we wish to prove a family of statements indexed not by N

but by the set N [ f0g of non-negative integers. The principle of induction
works. We prove that the statement associated with 0 is true, then we prove
for any non-negative integer k that the validity of the .k C 1/st statement
follows from the validity of the kth statement.
We are ready to prove the fundamental theorem of algebra: any poly-
nomial f .x/ of positive degree in RŒx has a root in C. We might think of
proceeding inductively using the degree of f .x/ as the induction index. But
we already know the fundamental theorem is true for odd-degree polynomi-
als, so induction on degree isn’t likely to be a successful strategy. Instead,
following Laplace, we do something more clever, applying induction not to
the degree of f .x/ but to its “degree of evenness.”
A positive integer n factors as 2k s for some non-negative integer k and
positive odd integer s. What interests us is the exponent k. The smaller k is,
the closer n is to being odd. Or, the larger k is, the more even (so to speak)
n is. This exponent k is the basis for our induction argument.
The starting point for our induction is the case k D 0. The positive
integers for which k is 0 are the odd ones. Thus, we begin by considering
the odd-degree polynomials in RŒx. By Theorem 1.14, they have real roots,
so the fundamental theorem holds for them. Our induction argument is off
to a successful start.
We next choose an integer k 0 and assume for all odd positive inte-
gers s that the fundamental theorem holds for polynomials of degree 2k s.
This is called the inductive hypothesis. Using it, we wish to prove for all
odd positive integers t that the fundamental theorem holds for polynomials
of degree 2kC1 t. If we do, then by the principle of mathematical induction,
we will have shown that the fundamental theorem holds for polynomials of
degree 2` u, for all non-negative integers ` and all odd positive integers u.
In other words, it holds for all polynomials of positive degree, as desired.
Suppose f .x/ is a polynomial in RŒx of degree n, with n of the form
2kC1 t and t odd. The induction argument requires us to show that f .x/ has
a root in C. By Theorem 7.5, there is a field K containing C that contains
roots r1 ; r2 ; : : : ; rn of f .x/ (repetitions allowed), with f .x/ factoring in
KŒx as
.x r1 / .x rn /:
Fix an arbitrary integer m. For a pair of integers i and j satisfying 1 i <
j n, we can form in K the element
ri C rj C mri rj :
Since there are n.n 1/=2 pairs i and j , there will be n.n 1/=2 such
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 214 — #230
i i
elements. Therefore, the polynomial

Y
F .x/ D .x .ri C rj C mri rj //
i <j
in KŒx has degree n.n 1/=2.

If we permute the roots r1 ; : : : ; rn , we permute the n.n 1/=2 elements
ri C rj C mri rj , leaving them unchanged as a set. Therefore we also leave
unchanged the coefficients of the polynomial F .x/. But these are polyno-
mial expressions in the roots r1 ; : : : ; rn of f .x/ with integer coefficients.
Therefore, by a suitable application of the fundamental theorem on sym-
metric polynomials, they are polynomial expressions in the coefficients of
f .x/ with integer coefficients, which is to say, they are real numbers.
We have proved that F .x/ lies in RŒx. Recall that f .x/ has degree n,
with n D 2kC1 t and t odd. Since k C 1 is positive, n is even. Hence, n 1
and t.n 1/ are odd. But F .x/ has degree n.n 1/=2 and
n.n 1/ 2kC1 t.n 1/

D D 2k t.n 1/:
2 2
Thus, the degree of F .x/ is exactly of the form for which we assumed by
the inductive hypothesis that the fundamental theorem holds: the product of
2k and an odd number. We conclude that F .x/ has a root in C, which means
that there is a fixed pair fi; j g (depending on m) for which the element ri C
rj C mri rj of K lies in the smaller field C. At the risk of over-complicating
the notation, we might write this element as ri.m/ C rj.m/ C mri.m/ rj.m/ to
emphasize its dependence on the choice of the integer m.
We chose m arbitrarily. The argument we just made applies for each
choice of m, and there are infinitely many such choices. But there are only
n.n 1/=2 pairs of integers fi; j g between 1 and n. Therefore, there must be
distinct integers m and m0 yielding the same pair; that is, there exist integers
m ¤ m0 for which i.m/ D i.m0 / and j.m/ D j.m0 /.
Let’s simplify our notation, writing i and j for the integers in this pair.
Then ri C rj C mri rj and ri C rj C m0 ri rj are both complex numbers, so
their difference .m m0 /ri rj is as well. Since m m0 is a non-zero integer,
we can divide by it to deduce that ri rj is complex. Hence mri rj is complex
and we can subtract it from the complex number ri C rj C mri rj to deduce
that ri C rj is complex. We have proved that f .x/ has two roots ri and rj
in the field K whose sum ri C rj and product ri rj lie in the smaller field C.
There is one last step. The polynomial .x ri /.x rj / equals
x2 .ri C rj / C ri rj :
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 215 — #231
i i
Since ri C rj and ri rj are complex, it lies in CŒx. By design, its roots are
ri and rj . We proved in Theorem 4.7 that any quadratic polynomial in CŒx
has complex roots. Hence, ri and rj lie in C. But ri and rj are roots of
f .x/, so f .x/ has roots in C.
We have proved, under the assumption that polynomials whose degree
is a product of 2k and an odd number have roots in C, that polynomials
whose degree is a product of 2kC1 and an odd number also have roots in C.
We also proved the base case, that polynomials of odd degree have roots in
C. By the principle of mathematical induction, polynomials of any positive
degree have roots in C, proving the fundamental theorem.
Let’s review where we used our two assumptions. The existence of real
roots for odd-degree polynomials entered the stage at the beginning, as the
base case of the induction argument. The existence of real square roots for
positive real numbers was used, implicitly, at the end, when we quoted The-
orem 4.7 on quadratic polynomials in CŒx having roots in C. This followed
by a completing-the-square argument from the existence in C of square
roots of complex numbers (Theorem 4.6), which followed from the exis-
tence of real square roots for positive real numbers.
What a beautiful proof! It depends on several of the ideas we have in-
troduced in this chapter, plus a touch of genius. It is a perfect peak on which
to bring our study of polynomials to a close.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 216 — #232
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 217 — #233
i i
References
[1] Niels Abel, Mémoire sur les équations algébriques ou l’on démontre
l’impossibilité de la résolution de l’équation générale du cinquième degré,
(1824) in Œuvres Complètes, Volume I, Grøndahl & Søn, Christiania, 1881,
28-33; translated by P. Pesic in [52, pp. 155–169].
[2] Irving Adler, The Giant Golden Book of Mathematics, illustrated by Lowell
Hess, Golden Press, New York, 1960.
[3] Lars V. Ahlfors, Complex Analysis, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 1979.
[4] Jean-Robert Argand, Imaginary Quantities: Their Geometrical Interpretation,
translated by A.S. Hardy with a preface by J. Hoüel, D. Van Nostrand, New
York, 1881.
[5] Raymond G. Ayoub, Paolo Ruffini’s contributions to the quintic, Archive for
History of Exact Sciences, 23 (1980) 253–277.
[6] Claude-Gaspard Bachet, Problèmes Plaisants et Délectables, 4th ed.,
Gauthier-Villars, Paris, 1905.
[7] I.G. Bashmakova, Diophantus and Diophantine Equations, translated by Abe
Shenitzer with the editorial assistance of Hardy Grant, Mathematical Associa-
tion of America, Washington, D.C., 1997.
[8] I.G. Bashmakova and G.S. Smirnova, The Beginnings and Evolution of Alge-
bra, translated by Abe Shenitzer with the editorial assistance of David A. Cox,
Mathematical Association of America, Washington, D.C., 2000.
[9] William P. Berlinghoff and Fernando Q. Gouvêa, Math Through the Ages, Ox-
ton House Publishers, Farmington, Maine, 2002.
[10] A.E. Berriman, The Babylonian quadratic equation, The Mathematical
Gazette, 40 (1956) 185–192.
[11] Rafael Bombelli, l’Algebra, Giovanni Rossi, Bologna, 1579.
[12] Girolamo Cardano, The Great Art; or, The Rules of Algebra, translated and
edited by T. Richard Witmer, The M.I.T. Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts,
1968.
217
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 218 — #234
i i
218 References
[13] Girolamo Cardano, The Book of My Life, translated by Jean Stoner with an
introduction by Anthony Grafton, New York Review Books, New York, 2002.
[14] Henry Thomas Colebrooke, Algebra with Arithmetic and Mensuration from
the Sanskrit of Brahmegupta and Bhascara, John Murray, London, 1817.
[15] S. Cuomo, Ancient Mathematics, Routledge, London, 2001.
[16] Abraham de Moivre, The analytic solution of certain equations of the third,
fifth, seventh, ninth and other higher uneven powers, by rules similar to those
called Cardan’s, Philosophical Transactions, 25 (1707) 2368–2371; portions
translated in [60, pp. 441–444].
[17] Abraham de Moivre, On the reduction pof radicals pto simpler terms, or the ex-
traction of roots of any binomial a C Cb or a C b, Philosophical Trans-
actions, 40 (1739) 463-478; portions translated in [60, pp. 447–450].
[18] René Descartes, A Discourse on the Method of Correctly Conducting One’s
Reason and Seeking Truth in the Sciences, translated by Ian Maclean, Oxford
University Press, Oxford, 2006.
[19] René Descartes, The Geometry of René Descartes, translated by David Eugene
Smith and Marcia L. Latham, Open Court Publishing Company, La Salle, Illi-
nois, 1952.
[20] Leonard Eugene Dickson, Elementary Theory of Equations, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1914.
[21] Peter Doyle and Curt McMullen, Solving the quintic by iteration, Acta Math-
ematica, 163 (1989) 151–180.
[22] David S. Dummit and Richard M. Foote, Abstract Algebra, 3rd ed., John Wiley
& Sons, New York, 2004.
[23] William Dunham, Euler: The Master of Us All, Mathematical Association of
America, Washington, D.C., 1999.
[24] Gotthold Eisenstein, Allgemeine Auflösung der Gleichung von den ersten vier
Graden, Journal für die reine and angewandte Mathematik 27 (1844) 81-83;
reprinted in Mathematische Werke, Vol. I, Chelsea Publishing Company, New
York, 1975, 7–9.
[25] Gotthold Eisenstein, Entwicklung von ˛˛ ˛ , Journal für die reine and ange-
wandte Mathematik 28 (1844) 49-52; reprinted in Mathematische Werke, Vol.
I, Chelsea Publishing Company, New York, 1975, 122–125.
[26] Leonhard Euler, Elements of Algebra, translated by Rev. John Hewlett,
Springer-Verlag, New York, Berlin, Heidelberg, Tokyo, 1984.
[27] Charles Fefferman, An easy proof of the fundamental theorem of algebra,
American Mathematical Monthly, 74 (1967) 854–855.
[28] Fibonacci, Fibonacci’s Liber Abaci: A Translation into Modern English of
Leonardo Pisano’s Book of Calculation, translated by L.E. Sigler, Springer-
Verlag, New York, 2002.
[29] Benjamin Fine and Gerhard Rosenberger, The Fundamental Theorem of Alge-
bra, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1997.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 219 — #235
i i
References 219
[30] H. Gray Funkhouser, A short account of the history of symmetric functions of

roots of equations, The American Mathematical Monthly, 37 (1930) 357–365.
[31] Évariste Galois, Mémoire sur les conditions de résolubilité des équations par
radicaux, in Écrits et Mémoires Mathémathiques d’Évariste Galois, Robert
Bourgne and J.-P.Azra, eds., Gauthier-Villars & Cie, Paris, 1962, 43–71.
[32] Albert Girard, Invention Nouvelle en l’Algèbre, Guillaume Iansson Blaeuw,
Amsterdam, 1629.
[33] Anthony Grafton, Cardano’s Cosmos, Harvard University Press, Cambridge,
Massachusetts, 1999.
[34] C. Hermite, Sur la résolution de l’équation du cinquième degré, Comptes Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 46 (1858) 508–515.
[35] Jens Høyrup, Lengths, Widths, Surfaces, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2002.
[36] Louis Charles Karpinski, Robert of Chester’s Latin Translation of the Algebra
of Al-Khowarizmi, with an Introduction, Critical Notes and an English Version,
MacMillan Company, New York, 1915.
[37] Felix Klein, Lectures on the Icosahedron and Solutions of Equations of the
Fifth Degree, translated by George Gavin Morrice, Dover Publications, New
York, 1956.
[38] Steven G. Krantz, Real Analysis and Foundations, 2nd ed., Chapman and Hall,
Boca Raton, Florida, 2005.
[39] J.L. Lagrange, Traité de la résolution des équations numériques de tous les
degrés, fourth edition, reprinted from the second edition of 1808, in Œuvres de
Lagrange, Tome Huitième, Gauthier-Villars, Paris, 1879.
[40] Eli Maor, Trigonometric Delights, Princeton University Press, Princeton, New
Jersey, 1998.
[41] Barry Mazur, Imagining Numbers (Particularly the Square Root of Minus Fif-
teen), Farrar, Straus and Giroux, New York, 2003.
[42] Elliott Mendelson, Introduction to Mathematical Logic, 5th ed., Chapman and
Hall, Boca Raton, Florida, 2010.
p
[43] Paul J. Nahin, An Imaginary Tale: The Story of 1, Princeton University
Press, Princeton, New Jersey, 1998.
[44] Otto Neugebauer, Mathematische Keilschrift-Texte, reprinted by Springer-
Verlag, New York, Heidelberg, Berlin, 1973. (Originally printed by Julius
Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1935.)
[45] O. Neugebauer, The Exact Sciences in Antiquity, Princeton University Press,
Princeton, New Jersey, 1952.
[46] O. Neugebauer and A. Sachs, eds, Mathematical Cuneiform Texts, American
Oriental Society and the American Schools of Oriental Research, New Haven,
Connecticut, 1945.
[47] Isaac Newton, Universal Arithmetic, or, a Treatise of Arithmetical Composi-
tion and Resolution, Translated from the Latin by Mr. Ralphson, Revised and
Corrected by Mr. Cunn, Illustrated and explained in a series of notes by Rev.
Theaker Wilder, W. Johnston, London, 1769.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 220 — #236
i i
220 References
[48] R.W.D. Nickalls, Viète, Descartes and the cubic equation, Mathematical
Gazette 90 (2006) 203–208.
[49] Øystein Ore, Cardano: The Gambling Scholar, Princeton University Press,
[50] Luca Pacioli, Summa de arithmetica, geometria, proportioni e proportionalità,
Paganino de Paganini, Venice, 1494.
[51] S.J. Patterson, Eisenstein and the quintic equation, Historia Mathematica 17
(1990) 132–140.
[52] Peter Pesic, Abel’s Proof, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 2004.
[53] Satya Prakash, A Critical Study of Brahmagupta and His Works, The Indian
Institute of Astronomical & Sanskrit Research, New Delhi, 1968.
[54] Roshdi Rashed, editor, translator, commentator, Al-Khwārizmı̄: The Begin-
nings of Algebra, SAQI Books, London, 2009.
[55] Reinhold Remmert, The fundamental theorem of algebra, in Numbers,
Springer-Verlag, New York, 1990.
[56] Eleanor Robson, Mathematics in Ancient Iraq, Princeton University Press,
[57] Paolo Ruffini, Opere Matematiche di Paolo Ruffini, 3 volumes, edited by Ettore
Bortolotti, Volume 1, Palermo, 1915, Volumes 2 and 3, Edizioni Cremonese,
Rome, 1953 and 1954.
[58] J.F. Scott, The Mathematical Work of John Wallis, Chelsea Publishing Com-
pany, New York, 1981.
[59] Jacques Sesiano, An Introduction to the History of Algebra: Solving Equations
from Mesopotamian Times to the Renaissance, translated by Anna Pierrehum-
bert, American Mathematical Society, Providence, Rhode Island, 2009.
[60] David Eugene Smith, A Source Book in Mathematics, Dover Publications, Mi-
neola, New York, 1959.
[61] John Stillwell, Mathematics and Its History, 3rd ed., Springer Sci-
ence+Business Media, New York, 2010.
[62] John Stillwell, Eisenstein’s footnote, The Mathematical Intelligencer 17
(1995) 58–62.
[63] Niccolò Tartaglia, Quesiti et Inventioni Diverse, fascimile reproduction from
the 1554 edition, Ateneo di Brescia, Brescia, 1959.
[64] B.L. van der Waerden, Science Awakening, translated by Arnold Dresden, P.
Noordhoff, Groningen, Holland, 1954.
[65] B.L. van der Waerden, Geometry and Algebra in Ancient Civilizations,
Springer-Verlag, Berlin, New York, 1983.
[66] B.L. van der Waerden, A History of Algebra from Al-Khwārizmı̄ to Emmy
Noether, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, New York, 1985.
[67] V.S. Varadarajan, Algebra in Ancient and Modern Times, American Mathemat-
ical Society, Providence, Rhode Island, 1998.
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 221 — #237
i i
References 221
[68] François Viète, The Analytic Art, translated by T. Richard Witmer, The Kent
State University Press, Kent, Ohio, 1983.
[69] John Wallis, A Treatise of Algebra, both Historical and Practical, John Play-
ford, London, 1685.
[70] Caspar Wessel, On the analytical representation of direction, Memoirs of the
Royal Danish Academy of Sciences 1799; portions translated in [60, pp. 55–
66].
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 222 — #238
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 223 — #239
i i
Index
Abel, Niels, 182–183 de Moivre’s formula, 93–95

Adler, Irving, xiii definition, 73
al-Khwarizmi, 41–44 Euler’s formula, 93–94
Annibale della Nave, 67 geometry of multiplication, 91
Argand, Jean-Robert, 106–107, 189 imaginary part, 73
Aryabhata, 40 multiplication, 74
associative law, 89 real part, 73
square roots, 81–83, 96
Bézout, Etienne, 181 complex plane, 85–88
Babylonian mathematics, 33–39 connected set, 14
Bachet, Claude-Gaspard, 40 converse, 9
Bhaskara, 41 cubic polynomials
Bombelli, Rafael, 135 Cardano’s formula, 51–57, 109–115,
on the irreducible case, 135 120–123
Brahmagupta, 40–41 irreducible case, 124–130
Bring, Erland, 180 reduced, 49
resolvent quadratic, 113–115
Cardano, Girolamo, 47 signs of roots, 130–133
dispute with Tartaglia, 67–70 Viète’s formula, 125–130
formula, 51–57, 109–115, 120–123
on the irreducible case, 133–135 d’Alembert, Jean-le-Rond, 188
change of variables de Moivre, Abraham, 93, 103–104, 138–
cubic polynomials, 48 140
general polynomials, 180 formula, 93–95
quadratic polynomials, 28 Descartes, René
quartic polynomials, 145 La Géométrie, 170–175
completing the square, 24–28 cogito, ergo sum, 171
complex numbers quartic solution, 149–154
addition, 74 Dickson, Leonard Eugene, x
conjugate, 76 Diophantus, 39–40
cube roots, 83–84, 96–98 discriminant
223
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 224 — #240
i i
224 Index
of a cubic polynomial, 115–120 Hermite, Charles, 184

of a generic polynomial, 204
of a quadratic polynomial, 33, 80 indeterminate, 3
of a quartic polynomial, 157–162 induction, 212–213
of a reduced cubic polynomial, 64 integers, 13
Doyle, Peter, 184 intermediate value theorem, 15
existence of roots, 15
Eisenstein, Gotthold, 183–184 polynomials, 15
quintic solution, 184 interval
Euclid, 39 closed, 14
Euler, Leonhard, 104–105, 113 open, 14
formula, 93–94
fundamental theorem of algebra, Jerrard, George, 181
188
on the cubic, 140–142 Klein, Felix, 184
on the quartic, 175–177
Lagrange, Joseph, 163, 181, 188
quartic solution, 154–157
Laplace, Pierre-Simon, 188
proof of fundamental theorem, 211–
Fefferman, Charles
215
fundamental theorem of algebra,
Legendre, Adrien-Marie, 107
187
Leonardo da Pisa, see Fibonacci
Fermat, Pierre de, 40
Liouville, Joseph, 187
Ferrari, Lodovico, 68, 169–170
theorem, 187
quartic solution, 146–149
logic
Fibonacci, 44–45
converse, 9
numbers, 45
or, 10
field
definition, 189–190 mathematical induction, principle of,
examples, 192–193 212–213
field extension, 191 McMullen, Curt, 184
splitting field, 191, 198–200 multiplicity, 10
Fior, Antonio Maria, 67
fundamental theorem of algebra, 185– Neugebauer, Otto, 34
191 Newton, Isaac, 211
proof, 213–215
Omar Khayyam, 44
Galois Theory, ix, 187 or, 10
Galois, Évariste, 182–183
Gauss, Carl Friedrich, 107 Pacioli, Luca, 45
fundamental theorem of algebra, parabola, 30
189 axis of symmetry, 30
on solutions by radicals, 182 directrix, 30
Gerard of Cremona, 42 focus, 30
Girard, Albert, 136–137 vertex, 30
fundamental theorem of algebra, polar coordinates, 85
188 polynomial
symmetric polynomials, 209–211 coefficients, 2
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 225 — #241
i i
Index 225
constant, 2 ring
constant term, 2 definition, 189–190
cubic, 2 polynomial ring, 194
definition, 2 Robert of Chester, 42
degree, 2 root of a polynomial, 4
division, 6 in a field, 194
factor, 6 multiple, 10
irreducible, 192, 194 multiplicity, 10
linear, 2 repeated, 10
monic, 3 simple, 10
product, 5–6 root of unity, 98
quadratic, 2 Ruffini, Paolo, 181
quartic, 2 on the quintic, 181–182
quintic, 2
sum, 5 Scipione del Ferro, 47, 66
polynomial equation, 3 symmetric polynomials
solution, 3 definition, 205
solution by radicals, 179 discriminant, 204
polynomial factorization elementary symmetric polynomi-
existence, 196–197 als, 204
non-trivial, 191 fundamental theorem, 206
trivial, 191 Newton’s identities, 209
uniqueness, 198 power sum polynomials, 204
Ptolemy, 91
theorem, 91 Tartaglia, 47, 67
pure imaginary numbers, 73 dispute with Cardano, 67–70
Thabit ibn Qurra, 44
quadratic formula, 21, 24, 26 Tschirnhausen, Ehrenfried Walter von,
complex coefficients, 83 180
Tschirnhausen transformation, 180
quartic polynomials
turning point, 20
Descartes’ solution, 149–154
global minimum, 20
Euler’s solution, 154–157
local maximum, 19
Ferrari’s solution, 146–149
local minimum, 20
nature of roots, 162–169
reduced, 145
Viète, François, 127, 135–136
resolvent cubic, 152, 173, 175–176
formula, 125–130
quintic polynomials
symmetric polynomials, 209
Bring-Jerrard form, 181
Eisenstein’s solution, 184 Wallis, John, 105, 137–138
solvability by iteration, 184 on the cubic, 138
unsolvability by radicals, 181–183 Waring, Edward, 181
Wessel, Caspar, 105
rational numbers, 13
resolvent polynomial
general notion, 181
of a cubic, 113–115
of a quartic, 152, 173, 175–176
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 226 — #242
i i
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 227 — #243
i i
About the Author
Ron Irving is a mathematics professor at the University of Washington in

Seattle. He was born in suburban New York City, studied mathematics and
philosophy at Harvard, and received his Ph.D. in mathematics at MIT. Fol-
lowing a postdoctoral position at Brandeis and a National Science Founda-
tion postdoctoral fellowship year at the University of Chicago and UC San
Diego, Irving came to Seattle. He has been a visiting faculty member at
UCSD and Aarhus and a member of the Institute for Advanced Study in
Princeton. His research interests have ranged over several areas of algebra,
including ring theory and the representation theory of Lie groups and Lie
algebras.
When Irving began teaching the department’s senior algebra course for
majors planning on secondary teaching careers, he developed an interest in
the preparation of pre-service and in-service teachers. His work with this
audience led to receipt of the university’s Distinguished Teaching Award
and to his book Integers, Polynomials, and Rings.
Irving spent seven years in academic administration, serving as depart-
ment chair for a year, divisional dean of natural sciences for four, and in-
terim dean of the College of Arts and Sciences for two. During this time,
he established the Summer Institute for Mathematics at UW, a six-week
residential program that brings talented high school students in the Pacific
Northwest to the university to share in the excitement of doing mathematics.
He continues to serve as the program’s executive director. He also began the
planning for a new undergraduate degree in integrated sciences designed to
meet the needs of future secondary science teachers.
Since returning to the department, Irving has taught a variety of algebra
courses and written this book. He has been the director of the Integrated Sci-
227
i i
i i
i i
“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page 228 — #244
i i
228 About the author
ences program, completing its planning, approval, and implementation. He

serves as the secretary-treasurer of the Astrophysical Research Consortium,
which oversees Apache Point Observatory in the Sacramento Mountains of
New Mexico, and is president of the board of the Burke Museum of Natural
History and Culture.
Irving is a member of the Mathematical Association of America and the
American Mathematical Society. As this book goes to press, he is beginning
a second stint as department chair.
i i
i i

Ronald S. Irving - Beyond The Quadratic Formula

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ronald S. Irving - Beyond The Quadratic Formula

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ronald S. Irving - Beyond The Quadratic Formula

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

i i

“IrvingBook” — 2013/5/22 — 15:39 — page i — #1

c 2013 by the Mathematical Association of America, Inc.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 2013940989

Published and Distributed by

Council on Publications and Communications

CLASSROOM RESOURCE MATERIALS

Classroom Resource Materials is intended to provide supplementary class-

101 Careers in Mathematics, 2nd edition edited by Andrew Sterrett

MAA Service Center

I have also omitted here the demonstration of most of my

for such an audience as well as for undergraduates who desire to look at

Let’s take a quick tour of the book.

to René Descartes’ approach of a few decades later and Leonhard Euler’s

Acknowledgements: I thank my Math 497 students for working with early

4.4 The Complex Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

We will be studying polynomial equations throughout this book, especially

where n is a non-negative integer and an ; an 1 ; : : : ; a1 ; a0 are numbers. As

Polynomials of low degree have special names: degree 1 polynomials

Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number c, there is a natural way to

with an ¤ 0, multiply by 1=an .

with f .x/ a polynomial. A solution to this equation is a real number a

The number a is also called a root of f .x/. For example,

is a polynomial equation, and one can check that x D 2 is a solution.

1.2 Multiplication and Degree

1.2. Multiplication and Degree 5

(We do not assume that n is the degree of r .x/ or of s.x/, so an or bn may

The product is also as expected, but its description is more involved.

.ax m / .bx n / D abx mCn :

If m D n D 0, we are multiplying the constant polynomials a and b,

Suppose s.x/ is a non-zero polynomial of degree n, with

(i) The coefficients am and bn are non-zero. Why?

(ii) Show that the constant coefficient of r .x/s.x/ is a0 b0 .

(iii) Show that the degree 1 coefficient of r .x/s.x/ is

(iv) Show that the degree 2 coefficient of r .x/s.x/ is

(It is understood that ai D 0 for i > m and bj D 0 for j > n.)

(vi) Check that the coefficient of x mCn in r .x/s.x/ is am bn .

(vii) Deduce Theorem 1.1.

Theorem 1.1. Suppose m and n are non-negative integers, r .x/ is a poly-

Exercise 1.4. Practice multiplying polynomials. Determine the product of

We say that r .x/ is a factor of f .x/. As a consequence of Theorem 1.1, a

1.2. Multiplication and Degree 7

b.x/ D a.x/q.x/ C r .x/:

Theorem 1.2. Suppose f .x/, g.x/, and r .x/ are polynomials.

Exercise 1.6. Prove Theorem 1.2.

1.3 Factorization and Roots

If we substitute a for x on both sides, we find that

f .a/ D .a a/s.a/ D 0 s.a/ D 0:

Let’s record what we have just found as a theorem:

Theorem 1.3. Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a, if x a

Theorem 1.3 provides motivation for developing techniques to factor

and shows that 4 and 9 are roots of x 2 13x C 36.

1.3. Factorization and Roots 9

Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a, it is useful to know that

Theorem 1.4. Given a polynomial f .x/ and a real number a, if f .a/ D 0,

Exercise 1.7. Let f .x/ be a polynomial of degree n and let a be a real

(iv) From y D x a, get a new expression for f .x/:

We have discussed x n only for x 0. If x < 0, then . x/n D x n